WO2006005585A2 - Secreted polypeptide species differentially expressed during pregnancy - Google Patents

Secreted polypeptide species differentially expressed during pregnancy Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2006005585A2
WO2006005585A2 PCT/EP2005/007563 EP2005007563W WO2006005585A2 WO 2006005585 A2 WO2006005585 A2 WO 2006005585A2 EP 2005007563 W EP2005007563 W EP 2005007563W WO 2006005585 A2 WO2006005585 A2 WO 2006005585A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
pap
polypeptide
protein
paps
antibody
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/EP2005/007563
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2006005585A3 (en
Inventor
Lydie Bougueleret
Isabelle Cusin
Eve Mahe
Anne Niknejad
Samia Reffas
Original Assignee
Geneprot, Inc.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Geneprot, Inc. filed Critical Geneprot, Inc.
Publication of WO2006005585A2 publication Critical patent/WO2006005585A2/en
Publication of WO2006005585A3 publication Critical patent/WO2006005585A3/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K14/00Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K14/435Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • C07K14/46Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans from vertebrates
    • C07K14/47Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans from vertebrates from mammals
    • C07K14/4701Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans from vertebrates from mammals not used
    • C07K14/4715Pregnancy proteins, e.g. placenta proteins, alpha-feto-protein, pregnancy specific beta glycoprotein
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N33/00Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
    • G01N33/48Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
    • G01N33/50Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
    • G01N33/68Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving proteins, peptides or amino acids
    • G01N33/689Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing involving proteins, peptides or amino acids related to pregnancy or the gonads
    • GPHYSICS
    • G01MEASURING; TESTING
    • G01NINVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
    • G01N2800/00Detection or diagnosis of diseases
    • G01N2800/36Gynecology or obstetrics
    • G01N2800/368Pregnancy complicated by disease or abnormalities of pregnancy, e.g. preeclampsia, preterm labour

Definitions

  • the invention relates to secreted polypeptide species involved in pregnancy, to isolated polynucleotides encoding such polypeptides, to polymorphic variants thereof, and to the use of said nucleic acids and polypeptides or compositions thereof in detection assays, and for drug development.
  • the invention provides specific serum polypeptides whose concentrations are down- or up-regulated in the serum from women during the course of their pregnancies.
  • concentrations are down- or up-regulated in the serum from women during the course of their pregnancies.
  • differences in mRNA processing and splicing, translation rate, mRNA stability, and posttranslational modifications such as proteolytic processing, phosphorylation, glycosylation, and amidation are revealed.
  • the polypeptides of the invention are thus described as "Pregnancy-Associated Polypeptides" or PAPs. These polypeptide sequences are described as PAP 1-33 and comprise the tryptic sequences listed in Table 3.
  • the present invention is directed to compositions related to secreted polypeptides whose concentration is specifically altered in the serum of pregnant women during the course of pregnancy.
  • These polypeptide species are designated herein "Pregnancy-Associated Polypeptides", or PAPs.
  • Pregnancy-Associated Polypeptides comprise an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of PAPs 1-33.
  • Preferred PAPs comprise a polypeptide selected from the group consisting of PAPs 1, 6-17, and 30-31. Even more preferred PAPs comprise a polypeptide selected from the group consisting of PAPs 6-9, and 30-31.
  • Compositions include PAP precursors, antibodies specific for PAPs, including monoclonal antibodies and other binding compositions derived therefrom. Further included are methods of making and using these compositions.
  • Precursors of the invention include unmodified precursors, proteolytic precursors, and intermediates resulting from alternative proteolytic sites in the amino acid sequences of PAPs 1-33.
  • a preferred embodiment of the invention includes PAPs having a posttranslational modification, such as a phosphorylation, glycosylation, acetylation, amidation, or a C-, N- or O- linked carbohydrate group.
  • PAPs having intra- or inter-molecular interactions e.g., disulfide and hydrogen bonds that result in higher order structures.
  • PAPs that result from differential mRNA processing or splicing are also preferred.
  • the PAPs represent posttranslationally modified species, structural variants, or splice variants that are altered in serum from individuals with PAP-related disorder.
  • the invention includes PAPs comprising a sequence which is at least 75 percent identical to a sequence selected from the group consisting of PAPs 1-33.
  • the invention includes polypeptides comprising at least 80 percent, and more preferably at least 85 percent, and still more preferably at least 90 percent, identity with any one of the sequences selected from PAPs 1-33.
  • the invention includes polypeptides comprising a sequence at least 95 percent identical to a sequence selected from the group consisting of PAPs 1-33.
  • the invention includes natural variants of PAPs having a frequency in a selected population of at least two percent. More preferably, such natural variant has a frequency in a selected population of at least five percent, and still more preferably, at least ten percent. Most preferably, such natural variant has a frequency in a selected population of at least twenty percent.
  • the selected population may be any recognized population of study in the field of population genetics. Preferably, the selected population is Caucasian, Negroid, or Asian. Mote preferably, the selected population is French, German, English, Spanish, Swiss, Japanese, Chinese, Irish, Korean, Singaporean, Icelandic, North American, Israeli, Arab, Turkish, Greek, Italian, Polish, Pacific Islander, Finnish, Norwegian, Swedish, Estonian, Austrian, or Indian.
  • the selected population is Icelandic, Saami, Finnish, French of Caucasian ancestry, Swiss, Singaporean of Chinese ancestry, Korean, Japanese, Quebecian, North American Pima Indians, Pennsylvanian Amish and Amish Mennonite, Newfoundlander, or Polynesian.
  • a preferred aspect of the invention provides a composition comprising an isolated PAP, i.e., a PAP free from proteins or protein, isoforms having a significantly different isoelectric point or a significantly different apparent molecular weight from the PAP.
  • the isoelectric point and molecular weight of a PAP may be indicated by affinity and size-based separation chromatography, 2-dimensional gel analysis, and mass spectrometry.
  • the invention provides particular polypeptide species that comprise a sequence selected from the group consisting of the amino acid sequences listed in Table 3 (PAPs 1-33).
  • PAPs 1-33 comprise additional contiguous amino acids from the sequences of the corresponding polypeptide entries in public databases, as set forth in Table 1.
  • Preferred species are polypeptides that i) comprise an amino acid sequence of any one of PAPs 1-33; ii) appear in serum from pregnant women, with an altered level during the course of pregnancy; and iii) comprise additional amino acids from the sequences of the corresponding polypeptide entries set forth in Table 1.
  • the invention includes modified PAPs.
  • modifications include protecting/blocking groups, linkage to an antibody molecule or other cellular ligand, and detectable labels, such as an enzymatic, fluorescent, isotopic or affinity label to allow for detection and isolation of the protein.
  • Chemical modifications may be carried out by known techniques, including but not limited to, specific chemical cleavage by cyanogen bromide, trypsin, chymotrypsin, papain, V8 protease, NaBH4, acetylation, formylation, oxidation, reduction, or metabolic synthesis in the presence of tunicamycin.
  • polypeptides of the invention may provide additional advantages such as increased solubility, stability and circulating time of the polypeptide, or decreased immunogeniciry (e.g., water soluble polymers such as polyethylene glycol, ethylene glycol/propylene glycol copolymers, carboxymethylcellulose, dextran, polyvinyl alcohol).
  • immunogeniciry e.g., water soluble polymers such as polyethylene glycol, ethylene glycol/propylene glycol copolymers, carboxymethylcellulose, dextran, polyvinyl alcohol.
  • the PAPs are modified at random positions within the molecule, or at predetermined positions within the molecule and may include one, two, three or more attached chemical moieties.
  • the invention provides a method of identifying a modulator of at least one PAP biological activity comprising the steps of: i) contacting a test modulator of a PAP biological activity with the polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of the amino acid sequences listed in Table 3 (PAPs 1-33); ii) detecting the level of said PAP biological activity; and iii) comparing the level of said PAP biological activity to that of a control sample lacking said test modulator.
  • the test modulator is an inhibitor of at least one PAP biological activity.
  • the test substance is an activator of at least one PAP biological activity.
  • the invention includes polynucleotides encoding a PAP of the invention, polynucleotides encoding a polypeptide having an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of the amino acid sequences listed in Table 3 (PAPs 1-33), antisense oligonucleotides complementary to such sequences, oligonucleotides complementary to PAP gene sequences for diagnostic and analytical assays (e.g., PCR, hybridization-based techniques), and vectors for expressing PAPs.
  • PAPs 1-33 amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of the amino acid sequences listed in Table 3
  • antisense oligonucleotides complementary to such sequences oligonucleotides complementary to PAP gene sequences for diagnostic and analytical assays (e.g., PCR, hybridization-based techniques), and vectors for expressing PAPs.
  • the invention provides a vector comprising DNA encoding a PAP.
  • the invention also includes host cells and transgenic nonhuman animals comprising such a vector.
  • One preferred method comprises the steps of (a) providing a host cell containing an expression vector as disclosed above; (b) culturing the host cell under conditions whereby the DNA segment is expressed; and (c) recovering the protein encoded by the DNA segment.
  • Another preferred method comprises the steps of: (a) providing a host cell capable of expressing a PAP; (b) culturing said host cell under conditions that allow expression of said PAP; and (c) recovering said PAP.
  • the expression vector further comprises a secretory signal sequence operably linked to the DNA segment, the cell secretes the protein into a culture medium, and the protein is recovered from the medium.
  • An especially preferred method of making a PAP includes chemical synthesis using standard.peptide. synthesis techniques, as described in the section titled "Chemical Manufacture of PAP Compositions" and in Example 2.
  • the invention includes isolated antibodies specific for any of the polypeptides, peptide fragments, or peptides described above.
  • the antibodies of the invention are monoclonal antibodies.
  • antibodies that bind to a PAP exclusively that is, antibodies that do not recognize other polypeptides with high affinity.
  • Anti-PAP antibodies have purification, diagnostic and prognostic applications.
  • Preferred anti-PAP antibodies for purification and diagnosis are attached to a label group.
  • Diagnostic methods include, but are not limited to, those that employ antibodies or antibody-derived compositions specific for a PAP antigen. Diagnostic methods for detecting PAPs in specific tissue samples and biological fluids (preferably serum), and for detecting levels of expression of PAPs in tissues, also form part of the invention. Compositions comprising one or more antibodies described above, together with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier are also within the scope of the invention, for example, for in vivo diagnosis and drug screening methods.
  • the invention further includes methods of using PAP-modulating compositions to prevent or treat disorders associated with aberrant expression or processing of PAPs 1-33 in an individual.
  • a preferred embodiment of the invention is a method of preventing or treating a PAP-related disorder in an individual comprising the steps of: determining that an individual suffers from or is at risk of a PAP-related disorder and introducing a PAP- modulating composition to said individual.
  • the present invention described in detail below provides methods, compositions, and kits useful for screening PAP modulators; and for drug development.
  • the invention also encompasses the administration of therapeutic compositions to a mammalian individual to treat or prevent PAP-related disorders.
  • the mammalian individual may be a non-human mammal, but is preferably human, more preferably a human adult.
  • nucleic acids and “nucleic acid molecule” is intended to include DNA molecules (e.g., cDNA or genomic DNA) and RNA molecules (e.g., mENA) and analogs of the DNA or RNA generated using nucleotide analogs.
  • the nucleic acid molecule can be single-stranded or double-stranded, but preferably is double-stranded DNA.
  • nucleotide sequence may be employed to designate indifferently a polynucleotide or a nucleic acid. More precisely, the expression “nucleotide sequence” encompasses the nucleic material itself and is thus not restricted to the sequence information (i.e.
  • nucleic acids oligonucleotides
  • polynucleotides polynucleotides
  • an “isolated” nucleic acid molecule is one which is separated from other nucleic acid molecules which are present in the natural source of the nucleic acid.
  • an “isolated” nucleic acid is free of sequences which naturally flank the nucleic acid (i.e., sequences located at the 5' and 3 1 ends of the nucleic acid) in the genomic DNA of the organism from which the nucleic acid is derived.
  • the isolated PAP nucleic acid molecule can contain less than about 5 kb, 4 kb, 3 kb, 2 kb, 1 kb, 0.5 kb or 0.1 kb of nucleotide sequences which naturally flank the nucleic acid molecule in genomic DNA of the cell from which the nucleic acid is derived.
  • an "isolated" nucleic acid molecule such as a cDNA molecule, can be substantially free of other cellular material, or culture medium when produced by recombinant techniques, or substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals when chemically synthesized.
  • PAP nucleic acid molecules can be isolated using standard hybridization and cloning techniques (e.g., as described in Sambrook, J., Fritsh, E. F., and Maniatis, T. Molecular Cloning. A Laboratory Manual.2nd, ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N. Y., 1989).
  • hybridizes to is intended to describe conditions for moderate stringency or high stringency hybridization, preferably where the hybridization and washing conditions permit nucleotide sequences at least 60% homologous to each other to remain hybridized to each other.
  • the conditions are such that sequences at least about 70%, more preferably at least about 80%, even more preferably at least about 85%, 90%, 95% or 98% homologous to each other typically remain hybridizedio each other.
  • Stringent conditions are known to those skilled in the art and can be found in Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, N.Y. (1989), 6.3.1-6.3.6.
  • stringent hybridization conditions for nucleic acid interactions are as follows: the hybridization step is realized at 65°C in the presence of 6 x SSC buffer, 5 x Denhardt's solution, 0,5% SDS and lOO ⁇ g/ml of salmon sperm DNA. The hybridization step is followed by four washing steps:
  • hybridization conditions being suitable for a nucleic acid molecule of about 20 nucleotides in length. It will be appreciated that the hybridization conditions described above are to be adapted according to the length of the desired nucleic acid, following techniques well known to the one skilled in the art, for example be adapted according to the teachings disclosed in Hames B.D. and Higgins SJ. (1985) Nucleic Acid Hybridization: A Practical Approach. Hames and Higgins Ed., IRL Press, Oxford; and Current Protocols in Molecular Biology.
  • 'Tercent homology is used herein to refer to both nucleic acid sequences and amino acid sequences.
  • Amino acid or nucleic acid “identity” is equivalent to amino acid or nucleic acid “homology”.
  • the sequences are aligned for optimal comparison purposes (e.g., gaps can be introduced in the sequence of a first amino acid or nucleic acid sequence for optimal alignment with a second amino or nucleic acid sequence and non-homologous sequences can be disregarded for comparison purposes).
  • the length of a reference sequence aligned for comparison purposes is at least 30%, preferably at least 40%, more preferably at least 50%, even more preferably at least 60%, and even more preferably at least 70%, 80%, 90% or 95% of the length of the reference sequence.
  • the amino acid residues or nucleotides at corresponding amino acid positions or nucleotide positions are then compared.JWhen a position in the first sequence is occupied by the same amino acid residue or nucleotide as the corresponding position in the second sequence, then the molecules are homologous at that position.
  • the comparison of sequences and determination of percent homology between two sequences can be accomplished using a mathematical algorithm.
  • a preferred, non-limiting example of a mathematical algorithm utilized for the comparison of sequences is the algorithm of Karlin and Altschul (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87:2264-68, modified as in Karlin and Altschul (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:5873-77, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
  • Such an algorithm is incorporated into the NBLAST and XBLAST programs (version 2.0) of Altschul, et al. (1990) J. MoI. Biol. 215:403-10.
  • Gapped BLAST can be utilized as described in Altschul et al., (1997) Nucleic Acids Research 25(17):3389-3402.
  • the default parameters of the respective programs e.g., XBLAST and NBLAST
  • polypeptide refers to a polymer of amino acids without regard to the length of the polymer, thus, peptides, oligopeptides, and proteins are included within the definition of polypeptide. This term also does not specify or exclude post-translational modifications of polypeptides, for example, polypeptides which include the covalent .attachment of glycosyl, acetyl, phosphate, amide, lipid, carboxyl, acyl, or carbohydrate groups are expressly encompassed by the term polypeptide.
  • polypeptides which contain one or more analogs of an amino acid (including, for example, non-naturally occurring amino acids, amino acids which only occur naturally in an unrelated biological system, modified amino acids from mammalian systems etc.), polypeptides with substituted linkages, as well as other modifications known in the art, both naturally occurring and non-naturally occurring.
  • amino acid including, for example, non-naturally occurring amino acids, amino acids which only occur naturally in an unrelated biological system, modified amino acids from mammalian systems etc.
  • polypeptides with substituted linkages as well as other modifications known in the art, both naturally occurring and non-naturally occurring.
  • protein as used herein may be used synonymously with the term “polypeptide” or may refer to, in addition, a complex of two or more polypeptides which may be linked by bonds other than peptide bonds, for example, such polypeptides making up the protein may be linked by disulfide bonds.
  • protein may also comprehend a family of polypeptides having identical amino acid sequences but different post-translational modifications, particularly as may be added when such proteins are expressed in eukaryotic hosts.
  • An "isolated” or “purified” protein or biologically active portion thereof is substantially free of cellular material or other contaminating proteins from the cell or tissue source from which it is derived, or substantially free from chemical precursors or other chemicals when chemically synthesized.
  • the language “substantially free of cellular material” includes preparations_of-a protein according to the invention in which the protein is separated from cellular components of the cells from which it is isolated or recombinantly produced.
  • the language “substantially free of cellular material” includes preparations of a protein according to the invention having less than about 30% (by dry weight) of protein other than the protein of the invention (also referred to herein as a "contaminating protein”), more preferably less than about 20% of protein other than the protein according to the invention, still more preferably less than about 10% of protein other than the protein according to the invention, and most preferably less than about 5% of protein other than the protein according to the invention.
  • culture medium represents less than about 20%, more preferably less than about 10%, and most preferably less than about 5% of the volume of the protein preparation.
  • the language “substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals” includes preparations of a protein of the invention in which the protein is separated from chemical precursors or other chemicals which are involvedin the synthesis of the protein.
  • the language “substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals” includes preparations of a protein of the invention having less than about 30% (by dry weight) of chemical precursors or non-protein chemicals, more preferably less than about 20% chemical precursors or non-protein chemicals, still more preferably less than about 10% chemical precursors or non-protein chemicals, and most preferably less than about 5% chemical precursors or non-protein chemicals.
  • recombinant polypeptide is used herein to refer to polypeptides that have been artificially designed and which comprise at least two polypeptide sequences that are not found as contiguous polypeptide sequences in their initial natural environment, or to refer to polypeptides which have been expressed from a recombinant polynucleotide.
  • Pregnancy-Associated Polypeptide refers to a polypeptide comprising the sequence described by any one of the peptide sequences listed in Table 3. Each peptide listed in Table 3 corresponds to one of PAPs 1-33, as described in Table 3.
  • the polypeptide sequences of PAPs 1-33 comprise the amino acid sequences of the corresponding peptide(s) listed in Table 3.
  • PAPs 1-33 comprise additional contiguous amino acids from the sequences of the corresponding polypeptide entries in public databases as set forth in Table 1 Such polypeptide may be post-translationally modified as described herein.
  • PAPs may also contain other structural or chemical modifications such as disulfide linkages or amino acid side chain interactions such as hydrogen and amide bonds that result in complex secondary or tertiary structures.
  • PAPs also include mutant polypeptides, such as deletion, addition, swap, or truncation mutants, fusion polypeptides comprising such polypeptides, and polypeptide fragments of at least three, but preferably 8, 10, 12, 15, or 21 contiguous amino acids of the sequence of PAPs 1-33. Further included are PAP proteolytic precursors and intermediates of the sequence selected from the group consisting of PAPs 1-33.
  • the invention embodies polypeptides encoded by the nucleic acid sequences of PAP genes or PAP mKNA species, preferably human PAP genes and mRNA species, including isolated PAPs consisting of, consisting essentially of, or comprising the sequence of PAPs 1-33.
  • PAPs retain at least one biological activity of PAPs 1-33.
  • biological activity refers to any single function carried out by a PAP. These include but are not limited to: (1) having altered concentration levels in the bloodstream of women during the course of their pregnancy; (3) antigenicity, or the ability to bind an anti-PAP specific antibody; (4) immunogenicity, or the ability to generate an anti-PAP specific antibody; (5) forming intermolecular amino acid side chain interactions such as hydrogen, amide, or preferably disulfide links; (6) being posttranslationally modified, especially by specific proteolysis and arafdation; (7) interaction with a PAP target molecule; (8) promoting growth; (9) improving allogeneic-graft-survival; and (10) having immunomodulatory activities.
  • a 'TAP modulator is a molecule (e.g., polynucleotide, polypeptide, small molecule, or antibody) that is capable of modulating (i.e., increasing or decreasing) either the expression or the biological activity of the PAPs of the invention.
  • a PAP modulator that enhances PAP expression or activity is described as a PAP activator or agonist.
  • a PAP modulator that represses PAP expression or activity is described as a PAP inhibitor or antagonist.
  • PAP modulators increase/ decrease the expression or activity by at least 5, 10, or 20%.
  • PAP inhibitors include anti-PAP antibodies, fragments thereof, antisense polynucleotides, and molecules characterized by screening assays, as described herein.
  • PAP agonists include polynucleotide expression vectors and molecules characterized by screening assays as described herein.
  • PAP-related disorder or "PAP-related disease” describes a disorder or disease that can be characterized by an altered expression or activity of a Pregnancy-Associated Polypeptide.
  • disorders include cancer, immune and autoimmune diseases, as well as medical conditions such as those involving graft transplants.
  • the likelihood that an individual will develop or already has such a disorder is indicated by altered serum levels of at least one PAP.
  • antibody refers to immunoglobulin molecules and immunologically active portions of immunoglobulin molecules, i.e., molecules that contain an antigen-binding site which specifically binds (itnmunoreacts with) an antigen, such as a PAP, or a biologically active fragment or homologue thereof.
  • Preferred antibodies bind to a PAP exclusively and do not recognize other polypeptides with high affinity.
  • immunologically active portions of immunoglobulin molecules include F(ab) and F(ab") 2 fragments which can be generated by treating the antibody with an enzyme such as pepsin.
  • the invention provides polyclonal and monoclonal antibodies that bind a PAP, or a biologically active fragment or homologue thereof.
  • a monoclonal antibody composition thus typically displays a single binding affinity for a particular PAP with which it immunoreacts.
  • Preferred PAP antibodies are attached to a label group.
  • label group is any compound that, when attached to a polynucleotide or polypeptide (including antibodies), allows for detection or purification of • said polynucleotide or polypeptide. Label groups may be detected or purified directly or indirectly by a secondary compound, including an antibody specific for said label group.
  • label groups include radioisotopes (e.g., P, S, H 5 T), fluorescent compounds (e.g., 5-bromodesoxyuridin, umbelliferone, fluorescein, fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, dichlorotriazinylamine fluorescein, dansyl chloride, phycoerythrin acetylaminofluorene, digoxigenin), luminescent compounds (e.g., luminol, GFP, luciferin, aequorin), enzymes or enzyme co-factor detectable labels (e.g., peroxidase, luciferase, alkaline phosphatase, galactosidase, or acetylcholinesterase), or compounds that are recognized by a secondary factor such as strepavidin, GST, or biotin.
  • a label group is attached to a polynucleotide or polypeptide in such a
  • Radioisotopes may be detected by direct-counting of radioemission, film exposure, or by scintillation counting, for example.
  • Enzymatic labels may be detected by determination of conversion of an appropriate substrate to product, usually causing a fluorescent reaction.
  • Fluorescent and luminescent compounds and reactions may be detected by, e.g., radioemission, fluorescent microscopy, fluorescent activated cell sorting, or a luminometer.
  • an antibody is said to "selectively bind” or “specifically bind” to a target if the antibody recognizes and binds the target of interest but does not substantially recognize and bind other molecules in a sample, e.g., a biological sample, which includes the target of interest.
  • vector refers to a nucleic acid molecule capable of transporting another nucleic acid to which it has been linked.
  • plasmid refers to a circular double stranded DNA loop into which additional DNA segments can be ligated.
  • viral vector Another type of vector is a viral vector, wherein additional DNA segments can be ligated into the viral genome.
  • Certain vectors are capable of autonomous replication in a host cell into which they are introduced (e.g., bacterial vectors having a bacterial origin of replication and episomal mammalian vectors).
  • vectors e.g., non- episomal mammalian vectors
  • Other vectors are integrated into the genome of a host cell upon introduction into the host cell, and thereby are replicated along with the host genome.
  • certain vectors are capable of directing the expression of genes to which they are operatively linked.
  • Such vectors are referred to herein as "expression vectors".
  • expression vectors of utility in recombinant DNA techniques are often in the form of plasmids.
  • plasmid and vector can be used interchangeably as the plasmid is the-most commonly used form of vector.
  • an anti-PAP-related disorders effective amount is the amount of an agent required to reduce a symptom of PAP-related disorders in an individual by at least 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, or preferably 25%.
  • the term may also describe the amount of an agent required to ameliorate a PAP- related disorders-caused symptom in an individual.
  • the effective amount for a particular patient may vary depending on such factors as the diagnostic method of the symptom being measured, the state of the condition being treated, the overall health of the patient, method of administration, and the severity of side-effects.
  • PAPs The Pregnancy-Associated Polypeptides (PAPs) of the invention are described PAPs 1-33, and comprise an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of the peptide sequences listed in Table 3.
  • PAPs 1-33 are secreted and circulate in blood serum, but appear at an increasing or a decreasing levels, as detailed in Table 1, in the serum of women during the course of their pregnancy.
  • PAPs are useful for drug design and in therapeutic strategies for prevention and treatment of PAP-related disorders.
  • Preferred PAPs comprise a polypeptide selected from the group consisting of PAP 18 and PAPs 23-29.
  • PAPs are polypeptides comprising an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of the peptide sequences listed in Table 3.
  • PAPs 1-33 comprise additional contiguous amino acids from the sequences of the corresponding polypeptide entries set forth in Table 1. Such additional amino acids are fused in frame with the selected PAP sequence to form contiguous amino acid sequence.
  • Pregnancy-Associated Polypeptides and "PAPs” are used herein to embrace any and all of the peptides, polypeptides and proteins of the present invention. Also forming part of the invention are polypeptides encoded by the polynucleotides of the invention, as well as fusion polypeptides comprising such polypeptides.
  • the invention embodies PAPs from humans, including isolated or purified PAPs consisting of, or comprising an amino * acid sequence selected from the group consisting of the peptide sequences set forth in Table 3. Further included are unmodified precursors, proteolytic precursors and intermediates of the sequence selected from the group consisting of the peptide sequences set forth in Table 3.
  • the present invention embodies isolated, purified, and recombinant polypeptides comprising a contiguous span of at least 3 amino acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids, with a PAP biological activity.
  • the contiguous stretch of amino acids comprises the site of a mutation or functional mutation, including a deletion, addition, swap or truncation of the amino acids in the PAP sequence.
  • the invention also concerns the polypeptide encoded by the PAP nucleotide sequences of the invention, or a complementary sequence thereof or a fragment thereof.
  • PAPs and biologically active portions thereof, as well-as-polypeptide fragments suitable for use as immunogens to raise anti-PAP antibodies.
  • native PAP peptides can be isolated from serum, cells or tissue sources by an appropriate purification scheme using standard protein purification techniques.
  • PAPs are produced by recombinant DNA techniques.
  • a PAP can be synthesized chemically using peptide synthesis techniques, as described in the section titled "Chemical Manufacture of PAP compositions" and in Example 2.
  • biologically active portions comprise a domain or motif with at least one activity of a PAP.
  • a biologically active PAP may, for example, comprise at least 1 , 2, 3, or 5 amino acid changes from the sequence selected from the group consisting of the peptide sequences listed in Table 3, or comprise at least 1%, 2%, 3%, 5%, 8%, 10% or 15% change in amino acids from said sequence.
  • polypeptides of the invention are described in Tables 1 and 3.
  • Table 1 provides: • an accession number in a public database, corresponding to the related polypeptide sequence;
  • accession numbers listed in Table 1 are references for the SwissPROT/TrEMBL databases, both of which are publicly available, for example at: http://www.expasy.ch. PAP 10, however, is defined as the sequence identified in International PCT publication WO01/53312 by SEQ ID NO 2232. Finally, the accession number for PAP 18 represents a protein entry available from NCBI, at http ://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/
  • polypeptides of the invention are defined by the tryptic peptides listed in Table 3. These peptides were isolated from the serum of pregnant women and they display an altered concentration level during the course of pregnancy. They were characterized according to the-MicroProt® method, as described in Example 1.
  • the PAPs of the invention are all less than or around 2OkD in molecular weight, as the serum sample is first separated based on molecular weight. Higher molecular weight polypeptide species are separated and characterized by a different method. As described in Example 1, the serum sample is subjected to a number of chromatography separations. Details about these chromatography methods are given in Example 1.
  • the first separation is on a cation exchange chromatography column, which is eluted with increasing salt concentration. Twelve fractions are collected.
  • the CEX column in Table 3 lists which fraction contained each tryptic peptide.
  • Table 2 provides the NaCl concentration at which each fraction"was-eluted,-according to the protocol described in Step 3 of Example 1 herein. Separation by cation exchange provides an indication of the overall positive charge of a polypeptide species. Cation exchange is followed by a reverse phase HPLC separation.
  • the RPl column in Table 3 lists in which of the 15 fractions each tryptic peptide eluted.
  • Table 2 provides the elution conditions (%B), according to the protocol described in Step 4 of Example 1.
  • the ratio of protein level during the first trimester samples (“E") versus the protein level during the last trimester samples (“L”) is calculated by two methods.
  • the first method calculates the E / L ratio by the number of fractions from each sample containing the PAP. For example, for PAP 7, this calculation is 6 / 1 (see Table 3), indicating a 6-fold increase in PAP 7 during the first trimester of pregnancy when compared to the third trimester of pregnancy.
  • the Olav scores obtained for each peptide in the mass spectrometry data analysis software are used to give a weighted ratio.
  • the calculation is 1775.4 / 347.4, resulting in 5.1.
  • PAP 7 is present at a 4.1-fold higher level during theJirst-trimester of pregnancy when compared to the third trimester of pregnancy..
  • PAPs 1-5 were detected only during the first trimester of pregnancy.
  • the MicroProt® process is able to detect very low abundance proteins with a serum concentration in the range of a few hundreds of pM. Thus, these polypeptides are present at vanishingly low levels, if at all, during third trimester of pregnancy. Conversely, PAP 29 was detected only during the third trimester of pregnancy.
  • the MicroProt® process is able to detect very low abundance proteins with a serum concentration in the range of a few hundreds of pM. Thus, this polypeptide is present at vanishingly low levels, if at all, during first trimester of pregnancy.
  • VLGAFSDGLAHLDNLK (19 [268.9135]), VNVDAVGGEALGR (19 [87.6927]), WAGVANALAHK (19 [68.6771]), EFTPQMQAAYQK (20 [31.2968]), FFESFGDLSSPDAVMGNPK (20 [198.4139]), GAFSDGLAHLDNLK (20 [120.7702]), GTFSQLSELHCDK (20 [114.6803]), GTFSQLSELHCDKLHVDPENFR (20 [59.8995]), KVLGAFSDGLAHLDNLK (20 [76.1654]), LHVDPENFR (20 [25.3495]), LLGNVLVCVLAR (20 [174.0128]), LLWYPWTQR (20 [66.5586]), TAVNALWGK (20 [58.2381]), VHLTPEEK (20 [156.8604]), VLGAFSDGLAHLDNLK (20 [238.1596]), VNVDAVGGEALGR (20 [82.
  • One aspect of the invention pertains to purified or isolated nucleic acid molecules that encode PAPs or biologically active portions thereof as further described herein, as well as nucleic acid fragments thereof.
  • Said nucleic acids may be used for example in therapeutic (DNA vaccine) and diagnostic methods and in drug screening assays as further described herein.
  • An object of the invention is a purified, isolated, or recombinant nucleic acid coding for a PAP, complementary sequences thereto, and fragments thereof.
  • the invention also pertains to a purified or isolated nucleic acid comprising a polynucleotide having at least 95% nucleotide identity with a polynucleotide coding for a PAP, advantageously 99 % nucleotide identity, preferably 99.5% nucleotide identity and most preferably 99.8% nucleotide identity with a polynucleotide coding for a PAP, or a sequence complementary thereto or a biologically active fragment thereof.
  • Another object of the invention relates to purified, isolated or recombinant nucleic acids comprising a polynucleotide that hybridizes, under the stringent hybridization conditions defined herein, with a polynucleotide coding for a PAP, or a sequence complementary thereto or a variant thereof or a biologically active fragment thereof.
  • the invention pertains to purified or isolated nucleic acid molecules that encode a portion or variant of a PAP, wherein the portion or variant displays a PAP biological activity.
  • said portion or variant is a portion or variant of a naturally occurring PAP or precursor thereof.
  • Another object of the invention is a purified, isolated, or recombinant nucleic acid encoding a PAP comprising, consisting essentially of, or consisting of the amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of the peptide sequences listed in Table 3, wherein the isolated nucleic acid molecule encodes one or more motifs such as a target binding site, or a disulfide bonding site.
  • the nucleotide sequence determined from tihe cloning of the PAP-encoding gene allows for the generation of probes and primers designed for use in identifying and/or cloning other PAPs (e.g. sharing the novel functional domains), as well as PAP homologues from other species.
  • a nucleic acid fragment encoding a "biologically active portion of a PAP” can be prepared by isolating a portion of a nucleotide sequence coding for a PAP, which encodes a polypeptide having a PAP biological activity, expressing the encoded portion of the PAP (e.g., by recombinant expression in vitro or in vivo) and assessing the activity of the encoded portion of the PAP.
  • the invention further encompasses nucleic acid molecules that differ from the PAP nucleotide sequences of the invention due to degeneracy of the genetic code and encode the same PAPs of the invention.
  • DNA sequence polymorphisms that lead to changes in the amino acid sequences of the PAPs may exist within a population (e.g., the human population). Such genetic polymorphism may exist among individuals within a population due to natural allelic variation. Such natural allelic variations can typically result in 1,-5% variance in the nucleotide sequence of a PAP-encoding gene or nucleic acid sequence.
  • Nucleic acid molecules corresponding to natural allelic variants and homologues of the PAP nucleic acids of the invention can be isolated based on their homology to the PAP nucleicacids-disclosed herein-using thexDNAs disclosed herein, or a portion thereof, as a hybridization probe according to standard hybridization techniques under stringent hybridization conditions. It will be appreciated that the invention comprises polypeptides having an amino acid sequence encoded by any of the polynucleotides of the invention.
  • PAP nucleic acids Polynucleotide sequences (or the complements thereof) encoding PAPs have various applications, including uses as hybridization probes, in chromosome and gene mapping, and in the generation of antisense RNA and DNA.
  • PAP-encoding nucleic acids are useful as targets for pharmaceutical intervention, e.g. for the development of DNA vaccines, and for the preparation of PAPs by recombinant techniques, as described herein.
  • the polynucleotides described herein, including sequence variants thereof, can be used in diagnostic assays. Accordingly, diagnostic methods based on detecting the presence of such polynucleotides in body fluids or tissue samples are a feature of the present invention.
  • nucleic acid based diagnostic assays examples include, but are not limited to, hybridization assays, e.g., in situ hybridization, and PCR- based assays.
  • Polynucleotides including extended length polynucleotides, sequence variants and fragments thereof, as described herein, may be used to generate hybridization probes or PCR primers for use in such assays.
  • Such probes and primers will be capable of detecting polynucleotide sequences, including genomic sequences that are similar, or complementary to, the PAP polynucleotides described herein.
  • the invention includes primer pairs for carrying out a PCR to amplify a segment of a polynucleotide of the invention.
  • Each primer of a pair is an oligonucleotide having a length of between 15 and 30 nucleotides such that i) one primer of the pair forms a perfectly matched duplex with one strand of a polynucleotide of the invention and the other primer of the pair form a perfectly match duplex with the complementary strand of the same polynucleotide, and ii) the primers of a pair form such perfectly matched duplexes at sites on the polynucleotide that separated by a distance of between 10 and 2500 nucleotides.
  • the annealing temperature of each primer of a pair to its respective complementary sequence is substantially the same.
  • Hybridization probes derived from polynucleotides of the invention can be used, for example, in performing in situ hybridization on tissue samples, such as fixed or frozen tissue sections prepared on microscopic slides or suspended cells. Briefly, a labeled DNA or RNA probe is allowed to bind its DNA or RNA target sample in the tissue section on a prepared microscopic, under controlled conditions. Generally, dsDNA probes consisting of the DNA of interest cloned into a plasmid or bacteriophage DNA vector are used for this purpose, although ssDNA or ssRNA probes may also be used. Probes are generally oligonucleotides between about 15 and 40 nucleotides in length.
  • the probes can be polynucleotide probes generated by PCR random priming primer extension or in vitro transcription of RNA from plasmids (riboprobes). These latter probes are typically several hundred base pairs in length.
  • the probes can be labeled by any of a number of label groups and the particular detection method will correspond to the type of label utilized on the probe (e.g., autoradiography, X-ray detection, fluorescent or visual microscopic analysis, as appropriate).
  • the reaction can be further amplified in situ using immunocytochemical techniques directed against the label of the detector molecule used, such as an antibody directed to a fluorescein moiety present on a fluorescently labeled probe. Specific labeling and in situ detection methods can be found, for example, in Howard, G.
  • Hybridization probes and PCR primers may also be selected from the genomic sequences corresponding to the full-length proteins identified in accordance with the present invention, including promoter, enhancer elements and introns of the gene encoding the naturally occurring polypeptide.
  • Nucleotide sequences encoding a PAP can also be used to construct hybridization probes for mapping the gene encoding that PAP and for the genetic analysis of individuals. Individuals carrying variations of, or mutations in the gene encoding a PAP of the present invention may be detected at the DNA level by a variety of techniques.
  • Nucleic acids used for diagnosis may be obtained from a patient's cells, including, for example, tissue biopsy and autopsy material. Genomic DNA may be used directly for detection or may be amplified enzyrnatically by using PCR (Saiki, et al. Nature 324:163-166 (1986)) prior to analysis. RNA or cDNA may also be used for the same purpose. As an example, PCR primers complementary to the nucleic acid of the present invention can be used to identify and analyze mutations in the gene of the present invention. Deletions and insertions can be detected by a change in size of the amplified product in comparison to the normal genotype.
  • Point mutations can be identified by hybridizing amplified DNA to radiolabeled RNA of the invention or alternatively, radiolabeled antisenseJDNA.sequences of the invention. Sequence changes at specific locations may also be revealed by- nuclease protection assays, such as RNase and Sl protection or the chemical cleavage method (e.g. Cotton, et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL USA 85:4397-4401 (1985)), or by differences in melting temperatures. "Molecular beacons" (Kostrikis L. G.
  • hairpin-shaped, single-stranded synthetic oligonucleotides containing probe sequences which are complementary to the nucleic acid of the present invention may also be used to detect point mutations or other sequence changes as well as monitor expression levels of PAPs.
  • Oligonucleotides of the invention are synthesized by conventional means on a commercially available automated DNA synthesizer, e.g. an Applied Biosystems (Foster City, CA) model 380B, 392 or 394 DNA/RNA synthesizer, or like instrument.
  • a commercially available automated DNA synthesizer e.g. an Applied Biosystems (Foster City, CA) model 380B, 392 or 394 DNA/RNA synthesizer, or like instrument.
  • phosphoramidite chemistry is employed, e.g. as disclosed in the following references: Beaucage and Iyer, Tetrahedron, 48: 2223-2311 (1992); Molko et al, U.S. patent 4,980,460; Koster et al, U.S. patent 4,725,677; Caruthers et al, U.S.
  • nuclease resistant backbones are preferred.
  • modified oligonucleotides are available that confer nuclease resistance, e.g. phosphorothioate, phosphorodithioate, phosphoramidate, or the like, described in many references, e.g. phosphorothioates: Stec et al, U.S. patent 5,151,510; Hirschbein, U.S. patent 5,166,387; Bergot, U.S.
  • the length of the antisense oligonucleotides has to be sufficiently large to ensure that specific binding will take place only at the desired target polynucleotide and not at other fortuitous sites.
  • the upper range of the length is determined by several factors, including the inconvenience and expense of synthesizing and purifying oligomers greater than about 30-40 nucleotides in length, the greater tolerance of longer oligonucleotides for mismatches than shorter oligonucleotides, and the like.
  • the antisense oligonucleotides of the invention have lengths in the range of about 15 to 40 ' nucleotides. More preferably, the oligonucleotide moieties have lengths in the range of about 18 to 25 nucleotides.
  • Primers and probes of the invention can be prepared by any suitable method, including, for example, cloning and restriction of appropriate sequences and direct chemical synthesis by a method such as the phosphodiester method of Narang SA et al (Methods Enzymol 1979;68:90-98), the phosphodiester method of Brown EL et al (Methods Enzymol 1979;68: 109-151), the diethylphosphoramidite method of Beaucage et al (Tetrahedron Lett 1981, 22: 1859-1862) and the solid support method described in EP 0707 592, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
  • a method such as the phosphodiester method of Narang SA et al (Methods Enzymol 1979;68:90-98), the phosphodiester method of Brown EL et al (Methods Enzymol 1979;68: 109-151), the diethylphosphoramidite method of Beaucage
  • Detection probes are generally nucleic acid sequences or uncharged nucleic acid analogs such as, for example peptide nucleic acids which are disclosed in International Patent Application WO 92/20702, morpholino analogs which are described in U.S. Patents Numbered 5,185,444; 5,034,506 and 5,142,047.
  • the probe maybe rendered "non- extendable" in that additional dNTPs cannot be added to the probe, in and of themselves analogs usually are non-extendable and nucleic acid probes can be rendered non-extendable by modifying the 3 1 end of the probe such that the hydroxyl group is no longer capable of participating in elongation.
  • the 3' end of the probe can be functionalized with the capture or detection label to thereby consume or otherwise block the hydroxyl group.
  • Any of the polynucleotides of the present invention can be labeled, if desired, by incorporating any label group known in the art to be detectable by spectroscopic, photochemical, biochemical, immunochemical, or chemical means. Additional examples include non-radioactive labeling of nucleic acid fragments as described in Urdea et al. (Nucleic Acids Research. 11:4937-4957, 1988) or Sanchez-Pescador et al. (J. Clin. Microbiol. 26(10):1934-1938, 1988).
  • the probes according to the present invention may have structural characteristics such that they allow the signal amplification, such structural characteristics being, for example, branched DNA probes as those described by Urdea et al (Nucleic Acids Symp. Ser.24:197-200, 1991) or in the European patent No. EP 0225807 (Chiron).
  • a label can also be used to capture the primer, so as to facilitate the immobilization of either the primer or a primer extension product, such as amplified DNA, on a solid support.
  • a capture label is attached to the primers or probes and can be a specific binding member which forms a binding pair with the solid's phase reagent's specific binding member (e.g. biotin and streptavidin). Therefore depending upon the type of label carried by a polynucleotide or a probe, it may be employed to capture or to detect the target DNA. Further, it will be understood that the polynucleotides, primers or probes provided.herein, may, themselves, serve as the capture label.
  • a solid phase reagent's binding member is a nucleic acid sequence
  • it may be selected such that it binds a complementary portion of a primer or probe to thereby immobilize the primer or probe to the solid phase.
  • a polynucleotide probe itself serves as the binding member
  • the probe will contain a sequence or "tail" that is not complementary to the target.
  • a polynucleotide primer itself serves as the capture label
  • at least a portion of the primer will be free to hybridize with a nucleic acid on a solid phase. DNA labeling techniques are well known to the skilled technician.
  • the probes of the present invention are useful for a number of purposes. They can be notably used in Southern hybridization to genomic DNA. The probes can also be used to detect PCR amplification products. They may also be used to detect mismatches in PAP- encoding genes or iriRNA using other techniques. Any of the nucleic acids, polynucleotides, primers and probes of the present invention can be conveniently immobilized on a solid support. Solid supports are known to those skilled in the art and include the walls of wells of a reaction tray, test tubes, polystyrene beads, magnetic beads, nitrocellulose strips, membranes, microparticles such as latex particles, sheep (or other animal) red blood cells, duracytes and others.
  • the solid support is not critical and can be selected by one skilled in the art. Thus, latex particles, microparticles, magnetic or non-magnetic beads, membranes, plastic tubes, walls of microliter wells, glass or silicon chips, sheep (or other suitable animal's) red blood cells and duracytes are all suitable examples. Suitable methods for immobilizing nucleic acids on solid phases include ionic, hydrophobic, covalent interactions and the like.
  • a solid support refers to any material which is insoluble, or can be made insoluble by a subsequent reaction. The solid support can be chosen for its intrinsic ability to attract and immobilize the capture reagent. Alternatively, the solid phase can retain an additional receptor which has the ability to attract and immobilize the capture reagent.
  • the additional receptor can include a charged substance that is oppositely charged with respect to the capture reagent itself or to a charged substance conjugated to the capture reagent.
  • the receptor molecule can be any specific binding member attached to the solid support and which has the ability to immobilize the capture reagent through a specific binding reaction. The receptor molecule enables the indirect binding of the capture reagent to a solid support material before the performance of the assay or during the performance of the assay.
  • the solid phase thus can be a plastic, derivatized plastic, magnetic or non-magnetic metal, glass or silicon surface of a test tube, microtiter well, sheet, bead, microparticle, chip, sheep (or other suitable animal's) red blood cells, duracytes and other configurations known to those of ordinary skill in the art.
  • the nucleic acids, polynucleotides, primers and probes of the invention can be attached to or immobilized on a solid support individually or in groups of at least 2, 5, 8, 10, 12, 15, 20, or 25 distinct polynucleotides of the invention to a single solid support.
  • polynucleotides other than those of the invention may be attached to the same solid support as one or more polynucleotides of the invention.
  • any polynucleotide provided herein may be attached in overlapping areas or at random locations on a solid support.
  • the polynucleotides of the invention may be attached in an ordered array wherein each polynucleotide is attached to a distinct region of the solid support which does not overlap with the attachment site of any other polynucleotide.
  • such an ordered array of polynucleotides is designed to be "addressable" where the distinct locations are recorded and can be accessed as part of an assay procedure.
  • Addressable polynucleotide arrays typically comprise a plurality of different oligonucleotide probes that are coupled to a surface of a substrate in different known locations. The knowledge of the precise location of each polynucleotides location makes these "addressable" arrays particularly useful in hybridization assays. Any addressable array technology known in the art can be employed with the polynucleotides of the invention. One particular embodiment of these polynucleotide arrays is known as the Genechips, and has been generally described in US Patent 5,143,854; PCT publications WO 90/15070 and 92/10092, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
  • allelic variants of the PAP sequences that may exist in the population, the skilled artisan will appreciate that changes can be introduced by mutation into the nucleotide sequences coding for PAPs, thereby leading to changes in the amino acid sequence of the encoded PAPs, with or without altering the functional ability of the PAPs.
  • variants including 1) one in which one or more of the amino acid residues are substituted with a conserved or non-conserved amino acid residue and such substituted amino acid residue may or may not be one encoded by the genetic code, or 2) one in which one or more of the amino acid residues includes a substituent group, or 3) one in which the mutated PAP is fused with another compound,_such as a compound .to increase the half-life of the polypeptide (for example, polyethylene glycol), or 4) one in which the additional amino acids are fused to the PAP, such as a leader, a signal or anchor sequence, a sequence which is employed for purification of the PAP, or sequence from a precursor protein.
  • Such variants are deemed to be within the scope of those skilled in the art.
  • nucleotide substitutions leading to amino acid substitutions can be made in the sequences that do not substantially change the biological activity of the protein.
  • amino acid residues that are shared among the PAPs of the present invention are predicted to be less amenable to alteration.
  • Hie invention pertains to nucleic acid molecules.encod.ng PAPs that contain changes in amino acid residues that result in increased biological activity, or a modified biological activity.
  • the invention pertains to nucleic acid molecules encoding PAPs that contain changes in amino acid residues that are essential for a PAP biological activity. Such PAPs differ in amino acid sequence from PAPs 1-33 and display reduced activity, or essentially lack one or more PAP biological activities. Mutations, substitutions, additions, or deletions can be introduced into any of PAPs
  • conservative amino acid substitutions may be made at one or more predicted non-essential amino acid residues.
  • a "conservative amino acid substitution” is one in which the amino acid residue is replaced with an amino acid residue having a similar side chain. Families of amino acid residues having similar side chains have been defined in the art.
  • amino acids with basic side chains e.g., lysine, arginine, histidine
  • acidic side chains e.g., aspartic acid, glutamic acid
  • uncharged polar side chains e.g., glycine, asparagine, glutamine, serine, threonine, tyrosine, cysteine
  • nonpolar side chains e.g., alanine, valine, leucine, isoleucine, proline, phenylalanine, methionine, tryptophan
  • beta-branched side chains e.g., threonine, valine, isoleucine
  • aromatic side chains e.g., tyrosine, phenylalanine, tryptophan, histidine
  • a predicted nonessential amino acid residue in a PAP, or a biologically active fragment or homologue thereof may be replaced with another amino acid residue from the same side chain family.
  • mutations can be introduced randomly along all or part of a PAP coding sequence, such as by saturation mutagenesis, and the resultant mutants can be screened for PAP biological activity to identify mutants that retain activity.
  • the encoded protein can be expressed recombinantly and the activity of the protein can be determined in any suitable assay, for example, as provided herein.
  • a PAP "chimeric protein" or “fusion protein” comprises a PAP of the invention or fragment thereof, operatively linked or fused in frame to a non-PAP polypeptide sequence.
  • a PAP fusion protein comprises at least one biologically active portion of a PAP.
  • a PAP fusion protein comprises at least two biologically active portions of a PAP.
  • the fusion protein is a GST-PAP fusion protein in which PAP domain sequences are fused to the C-terminus of the GST sequences. Such fusion proteins can facilitate the purification of recombinant PAPs.
  • the fusion protein is a PAP containing a heterologous signal sequence at its N-terminus, for example, to allow for a desired cellular localization in a certain host cell.
  • the fusion is a PAP biologically active fragment and an immunoglobulin molecule.
  • Such fusion proteins are useful, for example, to increase the valency of PAP binding sites.
  • a bivalent PAP binding site may be formed by fusing biologically active PAP fragments to an IgG Fc protein.
  • PAP fusion proteins of the invention can be used as immunogens to produce anti- PAP antibodies in a subject, to purify PAP or PAP ligands and in screening assays to identify PAP modulators.
  • isolated fragments of PAPs can also be obtained by screening peptides recombinantly produced from the corresponding fragment of the nucleic acid encoding such peptides.
  • fragments can be chemically synthesized using techniques known in the art such as conventional Merrifield solid phase f-Moc or t-Boc chemistry.
  • a PAP of the present invention may be arbitrarily divided into fragments of desired length with no overlap of the fragments, or preferably divided into overlapping fragments of a desired length.
  • the fragments can be produced (recombinantly or by chemical synthesis) and tested to identify those peptidyl fragments with a PAP biological activity, for example, by microinjection assays or in vitro protein binding assays.
  • peptidyl portions of a PAP such as a PAP target binding region, can be tested for PAP activity by expression-asihioredoxin fusion proteins, each of which contains a discrete fragment of the PAP (see, for example, U.S. Patents 5, 270,181 and 5,292,646; and PCT publication WO94/02502, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference).
  • libraries of fragments of a PAP coding sequence can be used to generate a variegated population of PAP fragments for screening and subsequent selection of variants of a PAP.
  • a library of coding sequence fragments can be generated by treating a double stranded PCR fragment of PAP coding sequence with a nuclease under conditions wherein nicking occurs only about once per molecule, denaturing the double stranded DNA, renaturing the DNA to form double stranded DNA which can include sense/antisense pairs from different nicked products, removing single stranded portions from reformed duplexes by treatment with Sl nuclease, and ligating the resulting fragment library into an expression vector.
  • an expression library can be derived which encodes N-terminal, C-terminal and internal fragments of various sizes of the PAP.
  • Modified PAPs can be used for such purposes as enhancing therapeutic or prophylactic efficacy, or stability (e.g., ex vivo shelf life and resistance to proteolytic degradation in vivo).
  • Such modified peptides when designed to retain at least one activity of the naturally occurring form of the protein, are considered functional equivalents of the PAP described in more detail herein.
  • Such modified peptide can be produced, for instance, by amino acid substitution, deletion, or addition.
  • Whether a change in the amino acid sequence of a peptide results in a functional PAP homolog can be readily determined by assessing at least one PAP biological activity of the variant peptide. Peptides in which more than one replacement has taken place can readily be tested in the same manner.
  • This invention further contemplates a method of generating sets of combinatorial mutants of the presently disclosed PAPs, as well as truncation and fragmentation mutants, and is especially useful for identifying potential variant sequences which are functional in binding to a PAP target protein but differ from a wild-type form of the protein by, for example, efficacy, potency and/or intracellular half-life.
  • One purpose for screening such combinatorial libraries is, for example, to isolate novel PAP homologs with altered biological activity, when compared with the wild-type protein, or alternatively, possessing novel activities all together. For example, mutagenesis can give rise to PAP homologs which have intracellular half-lives dramatically different than the corresponding wild-type protein.
  • the altered protein can be rendered either more stable or less stable to proteolytic degradation, or cellular processes which result in destruction of, or otherwise inactivation of, a PAP.
  • PAP homologs, and the genes which encode them can be utilized to alter the envelope of expression for a particular recombinant PAP by modulating the half-life of the recombinant protein. For instance, a short half-life can give rise to more transient biological effects associated with a particular recombinant PAP and, when part of an inducible expression system, can allow tighter control of recombinant protein levels within a cell and in circulating plasma.
  • proteins, and particularly their recombinant nucleic acid constructs can be used in gene therapy protocols.
  • the amino acid sequences for a population of PAP homologs or other related proteins are aligned, preferably to promote the highest homology possible.
  • a population of variants can include, for example, PAP homologs from one or more species, or PAP homologs from the same species but which differ due to mutation.
  • Amino acids which appear at each position of the aligned sequences are selected to create a degenerate set of combinatorial sequences.
  • the library of potential PAP homologs can be generated from a degenerate oligonucleotide sequence.
  • degenerate gene sequence can be carried out in an automatic DNA synthesizer, and the synthetic genes then be ligated into an appropriate gene for expression.
  • the purpose of a degenerate set of genes is to provide, in one mixture, all of the sequences encoding the desired set of potential PAP sequences.
  • the synthesis of degenerate oligonucleotides is well known in the art (see for example. Narang, SA (1983) Tetrahedron 393; Itakura et al. (1981) Recombinant DNA, Proc 3rd Cleveland Sympos. Macromolecules, ed. AG Walton, Amsterdam: Elsevier pp.273-289; Itakura et al. (1984) Annu. Rev.
  • PAP homologs can be generated and isolated from a library by screening using, for example, alanine scanning mutagenesis and the like (Ruf et al. (1994) Biochemistry 33:1565-1572; Wang et al. (1994) J Biol. Chem. 269:3095-3099; Balint et al. (1993) Gene 137:109-118; Grodberg et al. (1993) Eur. J Biochem. 218:597-601; Nagashima et al. (1993) J Biol.
  • a further method exploits automatic protein design to generate protein libraries for screening and optimization of the sequence of a protein of the invention. See, for example, U.S. Patent 6403312, disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • a primary library is generated using computational processing based on the sequence and structural characteristics of the PAP. Generally speaking, the goal of the computational processing is to determine a set of optimized protein sequences that result in the lowest energy conformation of any possible sequence. However, a plurality of sequences that are not the global minimum may have low energies and be useful. Thus, a primary library comprising a rank ordered list of sequences, generally in terms of theoretical quantitative stability, is generated.
  • sequences may be used to synthesize or express peptides displaying an extended half-life or stabilized interactions with PAP binding compounds and proteins.
  • a wide range of techniques are known in the art for screening gene products of combinatorial libraries made by point mutations, as well as for screening cDNA libraries for gene products having a certain property. Such techniques will be generally adaptable for rapid screening of the gene libraries generated by the combinatorial mutagenesis of PAPs.
  • the most widely used techniques for screening large gene libraries typically comprises cloning the gene library into replicable expression vectors, transforming appropriate cells with the resulting library of vectors, and expressing the combinatorial genes under conditions in which detection of a desired activity facilitates relatively easy isolation of the vector encoding the gene whose product was detected.
  • each of the illustrative assays described below are amenable to high throughput analysis as necessary to screen large numbers of degenerate PAP sequences created by combinatorial mutagenesis techniques.
  • the candidate gene products are displayed on the surface of a cell or viral particle, and the ability of particular cells or viral particles to bind a PAP target molecule (for example a modified peptide substrate) via this gene product is detected in a "panning assay".
  • the gene library can be cloned into the gene for a surface membrane protein of a bacterial cell, and the resulting fusion protein detected by panning (Ladner et al., WO 88/06630; Fuchs et al.
  • the gene library is expressed as a fusion protein on the surface of a viral particle. For instance, in the filamentous phage system, foreign peptide sequences can be expressed on the surface of infectious phage, thereby conferring two significant benefits.
  • the recombinant phage antibody system (RPAS, Pharmacia Catalog number 27-9400-01) can be easily modified for use in expressing PAP combinatorial libraries, and the PAP phage library can be panned on immobilized PAP target molecule (glutathione immobilized PAP target-GST fusion proteins or immobilized DNA). Successive rounds of phage amplification and panning can greatly enrich for PAP homologs which retain an ability to bind a PAP target and which can subsequently be screened further for biological activities in automated assays, in order to distinguish between agonists and antagonists.
  • the invention also provides for identification and reduction to functional minimal size of the PAP functional domains, to generate mimetics, e.g.
  • peptide or non-peptide agents which are able to disrupt binding of a polypeptide of the present invention with a PAP target molecule.
  • mutagenic techniques as described above are also useful to map the determinants of PAPs participating in protein-protein interactions involved in, for example, binding to a PAP target protein.
  • the critical residues of a PAP involved in molecular recognition of the PAP target can be determined and used to generate PAP target- 13P-derived peptidornimetics that competitively inhibit binding of the PAP to the PAP target.
  • non hydrolysable peptide analogs of such residues can be generated using retro- inverse peptides (e.g., see U.S.
  • Peptides of the invention are synthesized by standard techniques (e.g. Stewart and Young, Solid Phase Peptide Synthesis, 2nd Ed., Pierce Chemical Company, Rockford, IL, 1984).
  • a commercial peptide synthesizer is used, e.g. Applied Biosystems, Inc. (Foster City, CA) model 430A, and polypeptides of the invention may be assembled from multiple, separately synthesized and purified, peptide in a convergent synthesis approach, e.g. Kent et al, U.S. patent 6,184,344 and Dawson and Kent, Annu. Rev. Biochem., 69: 923-960 (2000).
  • Peptides of the invention may be assembled by solid phase synthesis on a cross- linked polystyrene support starting from the carboxyl terminal residue and adding amino acids in a stepwise fashion until the entire peptide has been formed.
  • the following references are guides to the chemistry employed-during synthesis: Schnolzer et al, Int. J.
  • chemical synthesis of polypeptides of the invention is carried out by the assembly of peptide fragments by native chemical ligation, as described by Dawson et al, Science, 266: 776-779 (1994) and Kent el al, U.S. patent 6,184,344. Briefly, in the approach a first peptide fragment is provided with an N-terminal cysteine having an unoxidized sulfhydryl side chain, and a second peptide fragment is provided with a C-terminal thioester.
  • the unoxidized sulfhydryl side chain of the N-terminal cysteine is then condensed with the C-terminal thioester to produce an intermediate peptide fragment which links the first and second peptide fragments with a ⁇ -aminothioester bond.
  • the ⁇ -aminothioester bond of the intermediate peptide fragment then undergoes an intramolecular rearrangement to produce the peptide fragment product which links the first and second peptide fragments with an amide bond.
  • the N-terminal cysteine of the internal fragments is protected from undesired cyclization and/or concatenation reactions by a cyclic thiazolidine protecting group as described below.
  • such cyclic thiazolidine protecting group is a thioprolinyl group.
  • Peptide fragments having a C-terminal thioester may be produced as described in the following references, which are incorporated by reference: Kent et al, U.S. patent 6, 184,344; Tarn et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL, 92: 12485-12489 (1995); Blake, Int. J. Peptide Protein Res., 17: 273 (1981); Canne et al, Tetrahedron Letters, 36: 1217-1220 (1995); Hackeng et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 94: 7845-7850 (1997); or Hackeng et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 96: 10068- 10073 (1999).
  • peptide fragments are synthesized on a solid phase support (described below) typically on a 0.25 mmol scale by using the in situ neutralization/HBTU activation procedure for Boc chemistry disclosed by Schnolzer et al, Int. J. Peptide Protein Res., 40: 180-193 (1992), which reference is incorporated herein by reference.
  • HBTU is 2-(lH-benzotriazol-l- yl)-l,l,3,3-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate and Boc is tert-butoxycarbonyl).
  • Each synthetic cycle consists of N"-Boc removal by a " l- to 2- minute treatment with neat TFA, a 1- minute DMF flow wash, a 10- to 20-minute coupling time with 1.0 mmol of preactivated Boc-amino acid in the presence of DIEA, and a second DMF flow wash.
  • TFA trifluoroacetic acid
  • DMF is N,N-dimethylformamide
  • DIEA is N 5 N- diisopropylethylamine
  • N ⁇ Boc-amino acids (1.1 mmol) are preactivated for 3 minutes with 1.0 mmol of HBTU (0.5 M in DMF) in the presence of excess DIEA (3 mmol).
  • yields are determined by measuring residual free amine with a conventional quantitative ninhydrin assay, e.g. as disclosed in Sarin et al, Anal. Biochem., 117: 147-157 (1981).
  • a DCM flow wash is used before and after deprotection by using TFA, to prevent possible high-temperature (TFA/DMF)-catalyzed pyrrolidone formation.
  • TFA high-temperature
  • dnp The imidazole side-chain 2,4-dinitrophenyl (dnp) protecting groups remain on the His residues because the dnp-removal procedure is incompatible with C-terminal thioester groups. However, dnp is gradually removed by thiols during the ligation reaction. After cleavage, peptide fragments are precipitated with ice-cold diethylether, dissolved in aqueous acetonitrile, and lyophilized.
  • Thioester peptide fragments described above are preferably synthesized on a trityl- associated mercaptopropionic acid-leucine (TAMPAL) resin, made as disclosed by Hackeng et al (1999), or comparable protocol. Briefly, N"-Boc-Leu (4 mmol) is activated with 3.6 mmol of HBTU in the presence of 6 mmol of DIEA and coupled for 16 minutes to 2 mmol of p-methylbenzhydrylamine (MBHA) resin, or the equivalent.
  • TAMPAL trityl- associated mercaptopropionic acid-leucine
  • TAMPAL resin can be used as a starting resin for polypeptide-chain assembly after removal of the trityl protecting group with two 1-minute treatments with 3.5% triisopropylsilane and 2.5% H 2 O in TFA.
  • the thioester bond can be formed with any desired amino acid by using standard in situ- neutralization peptide coupling protocols for 1 hour, as disclosed in Schnolzer et al (cited above). Treatment of the final peptide fragment with anhydrous HF yields the C-terminal activated mercaptopropionic acid-leucine (MPAL) thioester peptide fragments.
  • MPAL C-terminal activated mercaptopropionic acid-leucine
  • thiazolidine-protected thioester peptide fragment intermediates are used in native chemical ligation under conditions as described by Hackeng et al (1999), or like conditions. Briefly, 0.1 M phosphate buffer (pH 8.5) containing 6 M guanidine, 4% (vol/vol) benzylmercaptan, and 4% (vol/vol) thiophenol is added to dry peptides to be ligated, to give a final peptide concentration of 1-3 mM at about pH 7, lowered because of the addition of thiols and TFA from the lyophilized peptide.
  • the ligation reaction is performed in a heating block at 37 0 C and is periodically vortexed to equilibrate the thiol additives.
  • the reaction may be monitored for degree of completion by MALDI-MS or HPLC and electrospray ionization MS.
  • the N-terminal thiazolidine ring of the product is opened by treatment with a cysteine deprotecting agent, such as 0-methylhydroxylamine (0.5 M) at pH 3.5-4.5 for 2 hours at 37° C 5 after which a 10- fold excess of Tris-(2-carboxyethyl)-phosphine is added to the reaction mixture to completely reduce any oxidizing reaction constituents prior to purification of the product by conventional preparative HPLC.
  • a cysteine deprotecting agent such as 0-methylhydroxylamine (0.5 M) at pH 3.5-4.5 for 2 hours at 37° C 5 after which a 10- fold excess of Tris-(2-carboxyethyl)-phosphine is added to the reaction mixture to completely reduce any oxidizing reaction constituents prior to purification of the product by conventional preparative HPLC.
  • a cysteine deprotecting agent such as 0-methylhydroxylamine (0.5 M) at pH 3.5-4.5 for 2 hours at 37° C 5
  • the final polypeptide product may be refolded by conventional techniques, e.g. Creighton, Meth. EnzymoL, 107: 305-329 (1984); White, Meth. Enzymol., 11: 481-484 (1967); Wetlaufer, Meth. EnzymoL, 107: 301-304 (1984); and the like.
  • a final product is refolded by air oxidation by the following, or like:
  • the reduced lyophilized product is dissolved (at about 0.1 mg/mL) in I M guanidine hydrochloride (or like chaotropic agent) with 100 mM Tris, 10 mM methionine, at pH 8.6. After gentle overnight stirring, the re-folded product is isolated by reverse phase HPLC with conventional protocols.
  • the polynucleotide sequences described herein can be used in recombinant DNA molecules that direct the expression of the corresponding polypeptides in appropriate host cells. Because of the degeneracy in the genetic code, other DNA sequences may encode the equivalent amino acid sequence, and may be used to clone and express the PAPs. Codons preferred by a particular host cell may be selected and substituted into the naturally occurring nucleotide sequences, to increase the rate and/or efficiency of expression.
  • the nucleic acid (e.g., cDNA or genomic DNA) encoding the desired PAP may be inserted into a replicable vector for cloning (amplification of the DNA), or for expression.
  • the polypeptide can be expressed recombinantly in any of a number of expression systems according to methods known in the art (Aus ⁇ bel, et al. " 3 editors, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1990).
  • Appropriate host cells include yeast, bacteria, archebacteria, fungi, and insect and animal cells, including mammalian cells, for example primary cells, including stem cells, including, but not limited to bone marrow stem cells. More specifically, these include, but are not limited to, microorganisms such as bacteria transformed with recombinant bacteriophage, plasmid or cosmid DNA expression vectors, and yeast transformed with yeast expression vectors.
  • insect cells infected with a recombinant insect virus such as baculovirus
  • mammalian expression systems The nucleic acid sequence to be expressed may be inserted into the vector by a variety of procedures. In general, DNA is inserted into an appropriate restriction endonuclease site using techniques known in the art.
  • Vector components generally include, but are not limited to, one or more of a signal sequence, an origin of replication, one or more marker genes, an enhancer element, a promoter, and a transcription termination sequence. Construction of suitable vectors containing one or more of these components employs standard ligation techniques which are known to the skilled artisan.
  • the PAPs of the present invention are produced by culturing a host cell transformed with an expression vector containing a nucleic acid encoding a PAP, under the appropriate conditions to induce or cause expression of the protein.
  • the conditions appropriate for PAP expression will vary with the choice of the expression vector and the host cell, as ascertained by one skilled in the art.
  • the use of constitutive promoters in the expression vector may require routine optimization of host cell growth and proliferation, while the use of an inducible promoter requires the appropriate growth conditions for induction.
  • the timing of the harvest is important.
  • the baculoviral systems used in insect cell expression are lytic viruses, and thus harvest time selection can be crucial for product yield.
  • a host cell strain may be chosen for its ability to modulate the expression of the inserted sequences or to process the expressed protein in the desired fashion.
  • modifications of the protein include, but are not limited to, glycosyl, acetyl, phosphate, amide, lipid, carboxyl, acyl, or carbohydrate groups.
  • Post-translational processing which cleaves a "prepro" form of the protein, may also be important for correct insertion, folding and/or function.
  • host cells such as CHO, HeLa, BHK, MDCK, 293, W138, etc. have specific cellular machinery and characteristic mechanisms for such post- translational activities and may be chosen to ensure the correct modification and processing of the introduced, foreign protein.
  • Drosophila mela ⁇ ogaster cells Saccharomyces cerevisiae and other yeasts, E. coli, Bacillussubtilis, SF9 cells,. C129 cells, 293 cells, Neurospora, BHK, CHO, COS, and HeLa cells, fibroblasts, Schwanoma cell lines, immortalized mammalian myeloid and lymphoid cell lines, Jurkat cells, human cells and other primary cells.
  • the nucleic acid encoding a PAP must be "operably linked" by placing it into a functional relationship with another nucleic acid sequence.
  • DNA for a presequence or secretory leader is operably linked to DNA for a polypeptide if it is expressed as a preprotein that participates in the secretion of the polypeptide; a promoter or enhancer is operably linked to a coding sequence if it affects the transcription of the sequence; or a ribosome binding site is operably linked to a coding sequence if it is positioned so as to facilitate translation.
  • "operably linked" DNA sequences are contiguous, and, in the case of a secretory leader or other polypeptide sequence, contiguous and in reading phase. However, enhancers do not have to be contiguous. Linking is accomplished by ligation at convenient restriction sites.
  • Promoter sequences encode either constitutive or inducible promoters.
  • the promoters may be either naturally occurring promoters or hybrid promoters. Hybrid promoters, which combine elements of more than one promoter, are also known in the art, and are useful in the present invention.
  • the expression vector may comprise additional elements, for example, the expression vector may have two replication systems, thus allowing it to be maintained in two organisms, for example in mammalian or insect cells for expression and in a procaryotic host for cloning and amplification.
  • Both expression and cloning vectors contain a nucleic acid sequence that enables the vector to replicate in one or more selected host cells. Such sequences are well known for a variety of bacteria, yeast, and viruses.
  • the origin of replication from the plasmid pBR322 is suitable for most Gram-negative bacteria, the 2: plasmid origin is suitable for yeast, and various viral origins (SV40, polyoma, adenovirus, VSV or BPV) are useful for cloning vectors in mammalian cells.
  • the expression vector contains at least one sequence homologous to the host cell genome, and preferably, two homologous sequences which flank the expression construct.
  • the integrating vector may be directed to a specific locus in the host cell by selecting the appropriate homologous sequence for inclusion in the vector. Constructs for integrating vectors are well known in the art.
  • a heterologous expression control element may be operably linked with the endogenous gene in the host cell by homologous recombination (described in US Patents 6410266 and 6361972, disclosures of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties). This technique allows one to regulate expression to a desired level with a chosen control element while ensuring proper processing and modification of PAP endogenously expressed by the host cell.
  • Useful heterologous expression control elements include but are not limited to CMV immediate early promoter, the HSV thymidine kinase promoter, the early and late SV40 promoters, the promoters of retroviral LTRs, such as those of the Rous Sarcoma Virus (RSV), and metallothionein promoters.
  • the expression vector contains a selectable marker gene to allow the selection of transformed host cells. Selection genes are well known in the art and will vary with the host cell used. Expression and cloning vectors will typically contain a selection gene, also termed a selectable marker.
  • Typical selection genes encode proteins that (a) confer resistance to antibiotics or other toxins, e.g., ampicillin, neomycin, methotrexate, or tetracycline, (b) complement auxotrophic deficiencies, or (c) supply critical nutrients not available for from complex media, e.g., the gene encoding D-alanine racemase for Bacilli.
  • Host cells transformed with a nucleotide sequence encoding a PAP may be cultured under conditions suitable for the expression and recovery of the encoded protein from cell culture.
  • the protein produced by a recombinant cell may be secreted, membrane-bound, or contained intracellularly depending on the sequence and/or the vector used.
  • expression vectors containing polynucleotides encoding the PAP can be designed with signal sequences which direct secretion of the PAP through a prokaryotic or eukaryotic cell membrane.
  • the desired PAP may be produced recombinantly not only directly, but also as a fusion polypeptide with a heterologous polypeptide, which may be a signal sequence or other polypeptide having a specific cleavage site at the N-terminus of the mature protein or polypeptide.
  • a heterologous polypeptide which may be a signal sequence or other polypeptide having a specific cleavage site at the N-terminus of the mature protein or polypeptide.
  • the signal sequence may be a component of the vector, or it may be a part of the PAP-encoding DNA that is inserted into the vector.
  • the signal sequence may be a prokaryotic signal sequence selected, for example, from the group of the alkaline phosphatase, penicillinase, lpp, or heat-stable enterotoxin II leaders.
  • the signal sequence may be, e.g., the yeast invertase leader, alpha factor leader (including Saccharomyces and Kluyveromyces a-factor leaders, the latter described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,010,182), or acid phosphatase leader, the C. albicans glucoamylase leader (EP 362,179 published Apr. 4, 1990), or the signal described in WO * 90113646 published Nov. 15, 1990.
  • mammalian signal sequences may be used to direct secretion of the protein, such as signal sequences from secreted polypeptides of the same or related species, as well as viral secretory leaders.
  • the coding sequence is inserted into an appropriate vector, which in turn may require the presence of certain characteristic "control elements” or "regulatory sequences.”
  • Appropriate constructs are known generally in the art (Ausubel, et al., 1990) and, in many cases, are available from commercial suppliers such as Iavitrogen (San Diego, Calif.), Stratagene (La Jolla, Calif.), Gibco BRL (Rockville, Md.) or Clontech (Palo Alto, Calif.).
  • Transformation of bacterial cells may be achieved using an inducible promoter such as the hybrid lacZ promoter of the "BLUESCRIPT” Phagemid (Stratagene) or "pSPORTl” (Gibco BRL).
  • a number of expression vectors may be selected for use in bacterial cells to produce cleavable fusion proteins that can be easily detected and/or purified, including, but not limited to "BLUESCRIPT” (a-galactosidase; Stratagene) or pGEX (glutathione S-transferase; Promega, Madison, Wis.).
  • a suitable bacterial promoter is any nucleic acid sequence capable of binding bacterial RNA polymerase and initiating the downstream (3') transcription of the coding sequence of the PAP gene into mRNA.
  • a bacterial promoter has a transcription initiation ⁇ egion which is usually placed proximal to the 5' end of the coding sequence. This transcription initiation region typically includes an RNA polymerase binding site and a transcription initiation site.
  • Sequences encoding metabolic pathway enzymes provide particularly useful promoter sequences. Examples include promoter sequences derived from sugar metabolizing enzymes, such as galactose, lactose and maltose, and sequences derived from biosynthetic enzymes such as tryptophan.
  • Promoters from bacteriophage may also be used and are known in the art.
  • synthetic promoters and hybrid promoters are also useful; for example, the tat promoter is a hybrid of the trp and lac promoter sequences.
  • a bacterial promoter can include naturally occurring promoters of non-bacterial origin that have the ability to bind bacterial RNA polymerase and initiate transcription. An efficient ribosome-binding site is also desirable.
  • the expression vector may also include a signal peptide sequence that provides for secretion of the PAP in bacteria.
  • the signal sequence typically encodes a signal peptide comprised of hydrophobic amino acids which direct the secretion of the protein from the cell, as is well known in the art.
  • the protein is either secreted into the growth media (gram- positive bacteria) or into the periplasmic space, .located between the inner and outer membrane of the cell (gram-negative bacteria).
  • the bacterial expression vector may also include a selectable marker gene to allow for the selection of bacterial strains that have been transformed. Suitable selection genes include drug resistance genes such as ampicillin, chloramphenicol, erythromycin, kanamycin, neomycin and tetracycline. Selectable markers also include biosynthetic genes, such as those in the histidine, tryptophan and leucine biosynthetic pathways.
  • vectors which direct high level expression of fusion proteins that are readily purified may be desirable.
  • Such vectors include, but are not limited to, multifunctional E. coli cloning and expression vectors such as BLUESCRIPT (Stratagene), in which the PAP coding sequence may be ligated into the vector in-frame with sequences for the amino-terminal Met and the subsequent 7 residues of beta-galactosidase so that a hybrid protein is produced; PIN vectors (Van Heeke & Schuster JBiol Chem 264:5503-5509 1989)); PET vectors (Novagen, Madison Wis.); and the like.
  • BLUESCRIPT Multifunctional E. coli cloning and expression vectors
  • PIN vectors Van Heeke & Schuster JBiol Chem 264:5503-5509 1989
  • PET vectors Novagen, Madison Wis.
  • Expression vectors for bacteria include the various components set forth above, and are well known in the art. Examples include vectors for Bacillus subtilis, E. coli, Streptococcus cremoris, and Streptococcus lividans, among others. Bacterial expression vectors are transformed into bacterial host cells using techniques well known in the art, such as calcium chloride mediated transfection, electroporation, and others.
  • Yeast expression systems are well known in the art, and include expression vectors for Saccharomyces cerevisiae, Candida albicans and C. m ⁇ ltosa, Hansenula polymorpha, Kluyveromyces fragilis and K. lactis, Pichia guillermondii and Ppastoris, Schizosaccharomycespom.be, and Yarrowia lipolytica.
  • suitable promoters for use in yeast hosts include the promoters for 3-phosphoglycerate kinase (Hitzeman et al., J. Biol. Chem. 255:2073 (1980)) or other glycolytic enzymes (Hess et al., J. Adv. Enzyme Reg.
  • yeast promoters which are inducible have the additional advantage of transcription controlled by growth conditions, include the promoter regions for alcohol dehydrogenase 2, isocytochrome C, acid phosphatase, degradative enzymes associated with nitrogen metabolism, metallothionein, glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate dehydrogenase, and enzymes responsible for maltose and galactose utilization. Suitable vectors and promoters for use in yeast expression are further described in EP 73,657. Yeast selectable markers include ADE2. HIS4. LEU2. TRPl.
  • Yeast expression vectors can be constructed for intracellular production or secretion of a PAP from the DNA encoding the PAP of interest.
  • a selected signal peptide and the appropriate constitutive or inducible promoter maybe inserted into suitable restriction sites in the selected plasmid for direct intracellular expression of the PAP.
  • DNA encoding the PAP can be cloned into the selected plasmid, together with DNA encoding the promoter, the yeast alpha-factor secretory signal/leader sequence, and linker sequences (as needed), for expression of the PAP.
  • Yeast cells can then be transformed with the expression plasmids described above, and cultured in an appropriate fermentation media.
  • the protein produced by such transformed yeast can then be concentrated by precipitation with 10% trichloroacetic acid and analyzed following separation by SDS-PAGE and staining of the gels with Coomassie Blue stain.
  • the recombinant PAP can subsequently be isolated and purified from the fermentation medium by techniques known to those of skill in the art.
  • the PAP may be expressed in mammalian cells.
  • Mammalian expression systems are known in the art, and include retroviral vector mediated expression systems.
  • Mammalian host cells may be transformed with any of a number of different viral-based expression systems, such as adenovirus, where the coding region can be ligated into an adenovirus transcription/translation complex consisting of the late promoter and tripartite leader sequence. Insertion in a nonessential El or E3 region of the viral genome results in a viable virus capable of expression of the polypeptide of interest in infected host cells.
  • a preferred expression vector system is a retroviral vector system such as is generally described in PCT/US97/01019 and PCT/US97/101048.
  • Suitable mammalian expression vectors contain a mammalian promoter which is any DNA sequence capable of binding mammalian KNA polymerase and initiating the downstream (3 ') transcription of a coding sequence for PAP into mRNA.
  • a promoter will have a transcription initiating region, which is usually placed proximal to the 5' end of the coding sequence, and a TATA box, using a located 25-30 base pairs upstream of the transcription initiation site. The TATA box is thought to direct RNA polymerase II to begin RNA synthesis at the correct site.
  • a mammalian promoter will also contain an upstream promoter element (enhancer element), typically located within 100 to 200 base pairs upstream of the TATA box.
  • An upstream promoter element determines the rate at which transcription is initiated and can act in either orientation.
  • mammalian promoters are the promoters from mammalian viral genes, since the viral genes are often highly expressed and have a broad host range. Examples include promoters obtained from the genomes of viruses such as polyoma virus, fowlpox virus (UK 2,211, 504 published JuI.
  • adenovirus such as Adenovirus 2
  • bovine papilloma virus such as Adenovirus 2
  • bovine papilloma virus such as avian sarcoma virus
  • cytomegalovirus a retrovirus
  • hepatitis-B virus such as Simian Virus 40 (SV40)
  • heterologous mammalian promoters e.g., the actin promoter or an immunoglobulin promoter
  • heat-shock promoters provided such promoters are compatible with the host cell systems.
  • Transcription of DNA encoding a PAP by higher eukaryotes may be increased by inserting an enhancer sequence into the vector.
  • Enhancers are cis-acting elements of DNA, usually about from 10 to 300 bp, that act on a promoter to increase its transcription. Many enhancer sequences are now known from mammalian genes (globin, elastase, albumin, a-fetoprotein, and insulin). Typically, however, one will use an enhancer from a eukaryotic cell virus. Examples include the SV40 enhancer, the cytomegalovirus early promoter enhancer, the polyoma enhancer on the late side of the replication origin, and adenovirus enhancers. The enhancer is preferably located at a site 5' from the promoter.
  • the transcription termination and polyadenylation sequences recognized by mammalian cells are regulatory regions located 3' to the translation stop codon and thus, together with the promoter elements, flank the coding sequence.
  • the 3' terminus of the mature mRNA is formed by site-specific post-translational cleavage and polyadenylation.
  • transcription terminator and polyadenylation signals include those derived from SV40. Long term, high-yield production of recombinant proteins can be effected in a stable expression system. Expression vectors which contain viral origins of replication or endogenous expression elements and a selectable marker gene may be used for this purpose.
  • selectable markers for use in mammalian cells are readily available commercially and are known to persons skilled in the art.
  • selectable markers include, but are not limited to herpes simplex virus thymidine kinase and adenine phosphoribosyltransferase for use in tk- or hprt-cells, respectively.
  • the methods of introducing exogenous nucleic acid into mammalian hosts, as well as other hosts, is well known in the art, and will vary with the host cell used.
  • Techniques include dextran-mediated transfection, calcium phosphate precipitation, polybrene mediated transfection, protoplast fusion, electroporation, viral infection, encapsulation of the polynucleotide(s) in liposomes, and direct microinjection of the DNA into nuclei.
  • PAPs can be purified from culture supernatants of mammalian cells transiently transfected or stably transformed by an expression vector carrying a PAP-encoding sequence.
  • PAP is purified from culture supernatants of COS 7 cells transiently transfected by the pcD expression vector. Transfection of COS 7 cells with pcD proceeds as follows:
  • DME Dulbecco's modified Eagle medium
  • DEAE-Dextran and 50 ⁇ g of plasmid DNA.
  • the plates are incubated for four hours at 37°C, then the DNA-containing medium is removed, and the plates are washed twice with 5 ml of serum-free DME.
  • DME is added back to the plates which are then incubated for an additional 3 hrs at 37°C.
  • the plates are washed once with DME, after which DME containing 4% fetal calf serum, 2 mM glutamine, penicillin (100 U/L) and streptomycin (100 ⁇ g/L) at standard concentrations is added.
  • the cells are then incubated for 72 hrs at 37°C, after which the growth medium is collected for purification of PAP.
  • Plasmid DNA for the transfections is obtained by growing pcD(SR ⁇ ), or like expression vector, containing the PAP-encoding cDNA insert in E. coli MC1061 (described by Casadaban and Cohen, J. MoI. Biol., Vol. 138, pgs. 179-207 (1980)), or like organism.
  • the plasmid DNA is isolated from the cultures by standard techniques, e.g. Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, Second Edition (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, New York, 1989) or Ausubel et al (1990, cited above).
  • PAPs may also be produced in insect cells.
  • Expression vectors for the transformation of insect cells, and in particular, baculovirus-based expression vectors, are well known in the art.
  • the PAP-encoding DNA is fused upstream of an epitope tag contained within a baculovirus expression vector.
  • Autographa californica nuclear polyhedrosis virus (AcNPV) is used as a vector to express foreign geaes ⁇ trSpodcptera frugiperda Sf9 cells or in Trichoplusia larvae.
  • the PAP-encoding sequence is cloned into a nonessential region of the virus, such as the polyhedrin gene, and placed under control of the polyhedrin promoter.
  • Suitable epitope tags for fusion to the PAP-encoding DNA include poly-his tags and immunoglobulin tags (like Fc regions of IgG).
  • plasmids may be employed, including commercially available plasmids such as pVL1393 (Novagen). Briefly, the PAP-encoding DNA or the desired portion of the PAP-encoding DNA is amplified by PCR with primers complementary to the 5 ' and 3 ' regions. The 5' primer may incorporate flanking restriction sites. The PCR product is then digested with the selected restriction enzymes and subcloned into an expression vector.
  • Recombinant baculovirus is generated by co-transfecting the above plasmid and BaculoGoldTM virus DNA (Pharmingen) into Spodopterafrugiperda (“Sf9”) cells (ATCC CRL 1711) using lipofectin (commercially available from GIBCO-BRL), or other methods known to those of skill in the art.
  • Virus is produced by day 4-5 of culture in Sf9 cells at 28 0 C, and used for further amplifications. Procedures are performed as further described in O'Reilley et al., BACULOVIRUSEXPRESSION VECTORS: A LABORATORY MANUAL, Oxford University Press (1994).
  • Extracts may be prepared from recombinant virus-infected Sf9 cells as described in Rupert et al., Nature 362:175-179 (1993).
  • expressed epitope- tagged PAP can be purified by affinity chromatography, or for example, purification of an IgG tagged (or Fc tagged) PAP can be performed using chromatography techniques, including Protein A or protein G column chromatography.
  • Gene expression may be evaluated in a sample directly, for example, by standard techniques known to those of skill in the art, e.g., Northern blotting to determine the transcription of mRNA, dot blotting (DNA or RNA), or in situ hybridization, using an appropriately labeled probe, based on the sequences provided herein.
  • antibodies may be used in assays for detection of polypeptides, nucleic acids, such as specific duplexes, including DNA duplexes, RNA duplexes, and DNA-RNA hybrid duplexes or DNA-protein duplexes.
  • Such antibodies may.beJabeled and the.assay carried out where the duplex is bound to a surface, so that upon the formation of duplex on the surface, the presence of antibody bound to the duplex can be detected.
  • Gene expression maybe measured by immunohistochemical staining of cells or tissue sections and assay of cell culture or body fluids, to directly evaluate the expression of a PAP polypeptide or polynucleotide.
  • Antibodies useful for such immunological assays may be either monoclonal or polyclonal, and may be prepared against a native sequence PAP. Protein levels may also be detected by mass spectrometry. A further method of protein detection is with protein chips.
  • Expressed PAP may be purified or isolated after expression, using any of a variety of methods known to those skilled in the art. The appropriate technique will vary depending upon what other components are present in the sample. Contaminant components that are removed by isolation or purification are materials that would typically interfere with diagnostic or therapeutic uses for the polypeptide, and may include enzymes, hormones, and other solutes.
  • the purification step(s) selected will depend, for example, on the nature of the production process used and the particular PAP produced. As PAPs are secreted, they may be recovered from culture medium. Alternatively, the PAP may be recovered from host cell lysates. If membrane-bound, it can be released from the membrane using a suitable detergent solution (e.g.
  • Triton-X 100 or by enzymatic cleavage.
  • cells employed in expression of PAP can be disrupted by various physical or chemical means, such as freeze- thaw cycling, sonication, mechanical disruption, or by use of cell lysing agents.
  • Exemplary purification methods include, but are not limited to, ion-exchange column chromatography; chromatography using silica gel or a cation-exchange resin such as DEAE; gel filtration using, for example, Sephadex G-75; protein A Sepharose columns to remove contaminants such as IgG; chromatography using metal chelating columns to bind epitope-tagged forms of the PAP; ethanol precipitation; reverse phase HPLC; chromatofocusing; SDS-PAGE; and ammonium sulfate precipitation.
  • an isolated PAP will be prepared by at least one purification step.
  • the PAP may be purified using a standard anti-PAP antibody column.
  • the host cells of the invention can also be used to produce nonhuman transgenic animals.
  • a host cell of the invention is a fertilized oocyte or an embryonic stem cell into which PAP-coding sequences have been introduced.
  • Such host cells can then be used to create non-human transgenic animals in which exogenous PAP sequences have been introduced into their genome or homologous recombinant animals in which endogenous PAP sequences have been altered.
  • Such animals are useful for studying the function and/or activity of a PAP or fragment thereof and for identifying and/or evaluating modulators of PAP biological activity.
  • a "transgenic animal” is a non-human animal, preferably a mammal, more preferably a rodent such as a rat or mouse, in which one or more of the cells of the animal include a transgene.
  • Other examples of transgenic animals include non-human primates, sheep, dogs, cows, goats, chickens, amphibians, etc.
  • a transgene is exogenous DNA which is integrated into the genome of a cell from which a transgenic animal develops and which remains in the genome of the mature animal, thereby directing the expression of an encoded gene product in one or more cell types or tissues of the transgenic animal.
  • a "homologous recombinant animal” is a non-human animal, preferably a mammal, more preferably a mouse, in which an endogenous gene has been altered by homologous recombination between the endogenous gene and an exogenous DNA molecule introduced into a cell of the animal, e.g., an embryonic cell of the animal, prior to development of the animal.
  • a transgenic animal of the invention can be created by introducing a PAP-encoding nucleic acid into the male pronuclei of a fertilized oocyte, e.g., by microinjection or retroviral infection, and allowing the oocyte to develop in a pseudopregnant female foster animal.
  • the PAP cDNA sequence or a fragment thereof can be introduced as a transgene into the genome of a non-human animal.
  • a nonhuman homologue of a human PAP-encoding gene such as from mouse or rat, can be used as a transgene.
  • Bitronic sequences and polyadenylation signals can also be included in the transgene to increase the efficiency of expression of the transgene.
  • a tissue-specific regulatory sequence(s) can be operably linked to a PAP transgene to direct expression of a PAP to particular cells.
  • Methods for generating transgenic animals via embryo manipulation and microinjection, particularly animals such as mice, have become conventional in the art and are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,736,866 and 4,870,009, both by Leder et al., U.S. Pat. No.4,873, 191 by Wagner et al. and in Hogan, B ., Manipulating the Mouse Embryo, (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N. Y., 1986, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). Similar methods are used for production of other transgenic animals.
  • a transgenic founder animal can be identified based upon the presence of a PAP transgene in its genome and/or expression of PAP mRNA in tissues or cells of the animals. A transgenic founder animal can then be used to breed additional animals carrying the transgene. Moreover, transgenic animals carrying a transgene encoding a PAP can further be bred to other transgenic animals carrying other transgenes.
  • a vector which contains at least a portion of a PAP-encoding sequence into which a deletion, addition or substitution has been introduced to thereby alter, e.g., functionally disrupt, the PAP-encoding sequence.
  • the PAP- encoding sequence can be a human gene, but more preferably, is a non-human homologue of a human PAP- ⁇ ncoding sequence (e.g., a cDNA isolated by stringent hybridization with a nucleotide sequence coding for a PAP).
  • a mouse PAP-encoding sequence can be used to construct a homologous recombination vector suitable for altering an endogenous gene in the mouse genome.
  • the vector is designed such that, upon homologous recombination, the endogenous PAP-encoding sequence is functionally disrupted (i.e., no longer encodes a functional protein; also referred to as a "knock out" vector).
  • the vector can be designed such that, upon homologous recombination, the endogenous PAP-encoding sequence is mutated or otherwise altered but still encodes functional protein (e.g., the upstream regulatory region can be altered to thereby alter the expression of the endogenous PAP-encoding sequence).
  • the altered portion of the PAP-encoding sequence is flanked at its 5' and 3 1 ends by additional nucleic acid sequence of the PAP gene to allow for homologous recombination to occur between the exogenous sequence carried by the vector and an endogenous gene in an embryonic stem cell.
  • the additional flanking nucleic acid sequence is of sufficient length for successful homologous recombination with the endogenous gene.
  • flanking DNA both at the 5 1 and 3' ends
  • are included in the vector see e.g., Thomas, K. R. and CapeccKi, M. R.
  • the vector is introduced into an embryonic stem cell line (e.g., by electroporation) and cells in which the introduced PAP-encoding sequence has homologously recombined with the endogenous gene are selected (see e.g., Li, E. et al. (1992) Cell 69:915, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety).
  • the selected cells are then injected into a blastocyst of an animal (e.g., a mouse) to form aggregation chimeras (see e.g., Bradley, A.
  • a chimeric embryo can then be implanted into a suitable pseudopregnant female foster animal and the embryo brought to term.
  • Progeny harboring the homologously recombined DNA in their germ cells can be used to breed animals in which all cells of the animal contain the homologously recombined DNA by germline transmission of the transgene. Methods for constructing homologous recombination vectors and homologous recombinant animals are described further in Bradley, A. (1991) Current Opinion in
  • transgenic non-human animals can be produced which contain selected systems which allow for regulated expression of the transgene.
  • One example of such a system is the cre/loxP recombinase system of bacteriophage Pl.
  • cre/loxP recombinase system see, e.g., Lakso et al. (1992) PNAS 89:6232-6236, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirely.
  • Another example of a recombinase system is the FLP recombinase system of Saccharomyces cerevisiae (O'Gorman et al. (1991) Science 251:1351-1355, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety).
  • mice containing transgenes encoding both the Cre recombinase and a selected protein are required.
  • Such animals can be provided through the construction of "double" transgenic animals, e.g., by mating two transgenic animals, one containing a transgene encoding a selected protein and the other containing a transgene encoding a recombinase.
  • the invention further provides methods of testing the activity of or obtaining functional fragments and variants of PAPs and PAP sequences. Such methods involve providing a variant or modified PAP-encoding nucleic acid and assessing whether the encoded polypeptide displays a PAP biological activity. Encompassed is thus a method of assessing the function of a PAP comprising: (a) providing a PAP, or a biologically active fragment or homologue thereof; and (b) testing said PAP, or a biologically active fragment or homologue thereof for a PAP biological activity under conditions suitable for PAP activity. Cell free, cell-based and in vivo assays may be used to test PAP activity.
  • said assay may comprise expressing a PAP nucleic acid in a host cell, and observing PAP activity in said cell and other affected cells.
  • a PAP, or a biologically active fragment or homologue thereof is contacted with a cell, and a PAP biological activity is observed.
  • PAP biological activities include: (1) having altered concentration levels in the bloodstream of women during the course of their pregnancy; (3) antigenicity, or the ability to bind an anti-PAP specific antibody; (4) immunogeniciry, or the ability to generate an anti- PAP specific antibody; (5) forming intermolecular amino acid side chain interactions such as hydrogen, amide, or preferably disulfide links; (6) being posttranslationally modified, especially by specific proteolysis and amidation; (7) interaction with a PAP target molecule; (8) promoting growth; (9) improving allogeneic graft survival; and (10) having immunomodulatory activities.
  • PAP biological activity can be assayed by any suitable method known in the art.
  • Antigenicity and immunogenicity may be detected, for example, as described in the sections titled “Anti PAP antibodies” and “Uses of PAP antibodies”.
  • Circulation in blood serum may be detected as described in "Diagnostic and Prognostic Uses”. Determining the ability of the PAP to bind to or interact with a PAP target molecule can be accomplished by a method for directly or indirectly determining binding, as is common to the art. Such methods are further described in the section titled "Drug Screening Assays.”
  • Determining the ability of the PAP to bind to.or interact with a PAP target molecule can be accomplished by a method for directly or indirectly determining binding, as is common to the art. Such methods can be cell-based (e.g., such that binding to a membrane- bound PAP is detected) or cell free. Interaction of a test compound with a PAP can be detected, for example, by coupling the PAP or biologically active portion thereof with a label group such that binding of the PAP or biologically active portion thereof to its cognate target molecule can be determined by detecting the labeled PAP or biologically-active portion thereof in a complex. For example, the extent of complex formation may be measured by immunoprecipitating the complex or by performing gel electrophoresis.
  • Determining the ability of the PAP to bind to a PAP target molecule may also be accomplished using a technology such as real-time Biomolecular Interaction Analysis (BIA).
  • BIOA Biomolecular Interaction Analysis
  • BIOA is a technology for studying biospecific interactions in real time, without labeling any of the interactants (e.g., BIAcore). Changes in the optical phenomenon of surface plasmon resonance (SPR) can be used as an indication of real-time reactions between biological molecules.
  • Intermolecular and intramolecular interactions may be detected by sequence-based structural predictions. Such predictions are generally based on X-ray.crystallography or NMR structural data for a polypeptide with similar sequence. Detection of intramolecular interactions may also be accomplished using SDS-PAGE. For the example of disulfide bonds, links formed between different portions of a given protein result in a more compacted protein, and thus, a reduced apparent molecular weight. Disulfide bonds may be disrupted by a reducing agent, for example, dithiothreitol (DTT). A protein sample that has been treated with a reducing agent may thus be compared to an untreated control by SDS-PAGE to detect a change in apparent molecular weight. Such methods are common to the art.
  • a reducing agent for example, dithiothreitol (DTT).
  • Amidation may be detected by comparing the molecular weight of a sample peptide to that of an amidated form of the same peptide.
  • the amidated form may be prepared according to common methods, for example, as disclosed in US Patent 4708934.
  • Molecular weights are easily compared according to any method common to the art such as SDS-PAGE, gel chromatography, or mass spectrometry.
  • Proteolysis may also be detected by comparing the molecular weight of a sample peptide to that of a peptide of known molecular weight.
  • the molecular weight of a test peptide is obtained by mass spectrometry and compared to a database comprising molecular weights of peptides with posttranslational modifications.
  • Exemplary databases include Genpept, SWISSPROT, EMBL, and the Protein Sequence Database. Such techniques are detailed further herein.
  • the present invention provides antibodies and binding compositions specific for PAPs.
  • Such antibodies and binding compositions include polyclonal antibodies, monoclonal antibodies, Fab and single chain Fv fragments thereof, bispecific antibodies, heteroconjugates, and humanized antibodies.
  • Such antibodies and binding- compositions may be produced in a variety of ways, including hybridoma cultures, recombinant expression in bacteria or mammalian cell cultures, and recombinant expression in transgenic animals. There is abundant guidance in the literature for selecting a particular production methodology, e.g. Chadd and Chamow, Curr. Opin. Biotechnol., 12: 188-194 (2001).
  • metibodology depends on several factors including the antibody structure desired, the importance of carbohydrate moieties on the antibodies, ease of culturing and purification, and cost.
  • Many different antibody structures may be generated using standard expression technology, including full-length antibodies, antibody fragments, such as Fab and Fv fragments, as well as chimeric antibodies comprising components from different species.
  • Antibody fragments of small size, such as Fab and Fv fragments, having no effector functions and limited pharmokinetic activity may be generated in a bacterial expression system.
  • Single chain Fv fragments are highly selective for in vivo tumors, show good tumor penetration and low immunogenicity, and are cleared rapidly from the blood, e.g. Freyre et al, J.
  • the immunoglobulin G (IgG) molecule may be one of four subclasses: ⁇ l , ⁇ 2, ⁇ 3, or ⁇ 4. If a full-length antibody with effector function is required, then IgG subclasses ⁇ l or ⁇ 3 are preferred, and IgG subclass ⁇ l is most preferred.
  • the ⁇ l and ⁇ 3 subclasses exhibit potent effector function, complement activation, and promote antibody- dependent cell-mediated cytotoxicity through interaction with specific Fc receptors, e.g. Raju et al, Glycobiology, 10: 477-486 (2000); Lund et al, J. Immunol., 147: 2657-2662 (1991).
  • the anti-PAP antibodies of the present invention may be polyclonal antibodies.
  • Such polyclonal antibodies can be produced in a mammal, for example, following one or more injections of an immunizing agent, and preferably, an adjuvant.
  • the immunizing agent and/or adjuvant will be injected into the mammal by a series of subcutaneous or intraperitoneal injections.
  • the immunizing agent may include PAPs or a fusion protein thereof. It may be useful to conjugate the antigen to a protein known to be immunogenic in the mammal being-immunized.
  • immunogenic proteins include, but are not limited to, keyhole limpet hemocyanin (KLH), methylated bovine serum albumin (mBSA), bovine serum albumin (BSA), Hepatitis B surface antigen, serum albumin, bovine thyroglobulin, and soybean trypsin inhibitor.
  • Adjuvants include, for example, Freund's complete adjuvant and MPL-TDM adjuvant (monophosphoryl Lipid A, synthetic trehalose dicoryno-mycolate).
  • the immunization protocol may be determined by one skilled in the art based on standard protocols or by routine experimentation.
  • a crude protein preparation which has been enriched for a PAP or a portion thereof can be used to generate antibodies.
  • Such proteins, fragments or preparations are introduced into the non-human mammal in the presence of an appropriate adjuvant. If the serum contains polyclonal antibodies to undesired epitopes, the polyclonal antibodies are purified by immunoaffinity chromatography.
  • Effective polyclonal antibody production is affected by many factors related both to the antigen and the host species. Also, host animals vary in response to site of inoculations and dose, with both inadequate and excessive doses of antigen resulting in low titer antisera. Small doses (ng level) of antigen administered at multiple intradermal sites appear to be most reliable. Techniques for producing and processing polyclonal antisera are known in the art, see for example, Mayer and Walker (1987), the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. An effective immunization protocol for rabbits can be found in
  • Booster injections can be given at regular intervals, and antiserum harvested when antibody titer thereof, as determined semi-quantitatively, for example, by double immunodiffusion in agar against known concentrations of the antigen, begins to fall. See, for example, Ouchterlony, O. et al., Chap. 19 in: Handbook of
  • the anti-PAP antibodies may be monoclonal antibodies.
  • Monoclonal antibodies may be produced by hybridomas, wherein a mouse, hamster, or other appropriate host animal, is immunized with an immunizing agent to elicit lymphocytes that produce or are capable of producing antibodies that will specifically bind to the immunizing agent, e.g. Kohler and Milstein, Nature 256:495 (1975).
  • the immunizing agent will typically include the PAP or a fusion protein thereof and optionally a carrier.
  • the lymphocytes may be immunized in vitro.
  • lymph node cells are used if non-human mammalian sources are desired, or peripheral blood lymphocytes ("PBLs") are used if cells of human origin are desired.
  • the lymphocytes are fused with an immortalized cell line using a suitable fusing agent, such as polyethylene glycol, to produce a hybridoma cell, e.g. Goding, MONOCLONAL ANTIBODIES: PRINCIPLES AND PRAC ⁇ CE, Academic Press, pp. 59-103 (1986); Liddell and Cryer, A Practical Guide to Monoclonal Antibodies (John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1991); Malik and Lillenoj, Editors, Antibody Techniques (Academic Press, New York, 1994).
  • a suitable fusing agent such as polyethylene glycol
  • immortalized cell lines are transformed mammalian cells, for example, myeloma cells of rat, mouse, bovine or human origin.
  • the hybridoma cells are cultured in a suitable culture medium that preferably contains one or more substances that inhibit the growth or survival of unfused, immortalized cells.
  • a suitable culture medium that preferably contains one or more substances that inhibit the growth or survival of unfused, immortalized cells.
  • the culture medium for the hybridomas typically will include hypoxanthine, aminopterin, and thymidine (HAT) 5 substances which prevent the growth of HGPRT-deficient cells.
  • Preferred immortalized cell lines are those that fuse efficiently, support stable high level production of antibody, and are sensitive to a medium such as HAT medium.
  • More preferred immortalized cell lines are murine or human myeloma lines, which can be obtained, for example, from the American Type Culture Collection (ATCC), Rockville, MD.
  • Human myeloma and mouse-human heteromyeloma cell lines also have been described for the production of human monoclonal antibodies, e.g. Kozbor, J. Immunol. 133:3001 (1984); Brodeur et al., Monoclonal Antibody Production Techniques and Applications, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, pp. 51-63 (1987).
  • the culture medium (supernatant) in which the hybridoma cells are cultured can be assayed for the presence of monoclonal antibodies directed against a PAP.
  • the binding specificity of monoclonal antibodies present in the hybridoma supernatant is determined by immunoprecipitation or by an in vitro binding assay, such as radio ⁇ immunoassay (RlA) or Enzyme-Linked Immuno Sorbent Assay (ELISA). Appropriate techniques and assays are known in the art.
  • the binding affinity of the monoclonal antibody can, for example, be determined by the Scatchard analysis of Munson and Pollard, Anal. Biochem. 107:220 (1980).
  • the cells may be cloned by limiting dilution procedures and grown by-standard methods (Goding, 1986, supra). Suitable culture media for this purpose include, for example, Dulbecco's Modified Eagle's Medium and RPMI-1640 medium. Alternatively, the hybridoma cells may be grown in vivo as ascites in a mammal.
  • the monoclonal antibodies secreted by selected clones may be isolated or purified from the culture medium or ascites fluid by immunoglobulin purification procedures routinely used by those of skill in the art such as, for example, protein A-Sepharose, hydroxyl-apatite chromatography, gel electrophoresis, dialysis, or affinity chromatography.
  • the monoclonal antibodies may also be made by recombinant DNA methods, such as those described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,816,567.
  • DNA encoding the monoclonal antibodies of the invention can be isolated from the PAP-specific hybridoma cells and sequenced, e.g., by using oligonucleotide probes that are capable of binding specifically to genes encoding the heavy and light chains of murine antibodies.
  • the DNA may be inserted into an expression vector, which is then transfected into host cells such as simian COS cells, Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) cells, or myeloma cells that do not otherwise produce immunoglobulin protein, to obtain the synthesis of monoclonal antibodies in the recombinant host cells.
  • host cells such as simian COS cells, Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) cells, or myeloma cells that do not otherwise produce immunoglobulin protein, to obtain the synthesis of monoclonal antibodies in the recombinant host cells.
  • the DNA also may be modified, for example, by substituting the coding sequence for the murine heavy and light chain constant domains for the homologous human sequences (Morrison et al, Proc. Nat. Acad.
  • the non-immunoglobulin polypeptide can be substituted for the constant domains of an antibody of the invention, or can be substituted for the variable domains of one antigen- combining site of an antibody of the invention to create a chimeric bivalent antibody.
  • the antibodies may also be monovalent antibodies. Methods for preparing monovalent antibodies are well known in the art. For example, in vitro methods are suitable for preparing monovalent antibodies. Digestion of antibodies to produce fragments thereof, particularly, Fab fragments, can be accomplished using routine techniques known in the art.
  • Antibodies and antibody fragments characteristic of hybridomas of the invention can also be produced by recombinant means by extracting messenger RNA, constructing a cDNA library, and selecting clones which encode segments of the antibody molecule.
  • the following are exemplary references disclosing recombinant techniques for producing antibodies: Wall et al., Nucleic Acids Research, Vol. 5, pgs. 311.3 ⁇ 3128 (1978); Zakut et al., Nucleic Acids Research, Vol. 8, pgs. 3591-3601 (1980); Cabilly et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL, Vol. 81, pgs.
  • such techniques can be used to produce interspecific monoclonal antibodies, wherein the binding region of one species is combined with non-binding region of the antibody of another species to reduce immunogenicity, e.g. Liu et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., Vol. 84, pgs. 3439-3443 (1987), and patents 6,054,297 and 5,530,101.
  • recombinant ⁇ produced Fab and Fv fragments are expressed in bacterial host systems.
  • full-length antibodies are produced by mammalian cell culture techniques. More preferably, full-length antibodies are expressed in Chinese Hamster Ovary (CHO) cells or NSO cells.
  • Both polyclonal and monoclonal antibodies can be screened by ELISA.
  • the test is based on the tendency of macromolecules to adsorb nonspecifically to plastic. The irreversibiliry of this reaction, without loss of immunological activity, allows the formation of antigen-antibody complexes with a simple separation of such complexes from unbound material.
  • peptide conjugated to a carrier different from that used in immunization is adsorbed to the wells of a 96-well microliter plate. The adsorbed antigen is then allowed to react in the wells with dilutions of anti-peptide serum.
  • the invention includes immunogens derived from PAPs, and immunogens comprising conjugates between carriers and peptides of the invention.
  • immunogen refers to a substance which is capable of causing an immune response.
  • carrier refers to any substance which when chemically conjugated to a peptide of the invention permits a host organism immunized with the resulting conjugate to generate antibodies specific for the conjugated peptide.
  • Carriers include red blood cells, bacteriophages, proteins, or synthetic particles such as agarose beads.
  • carriers are proteins, such as serum albumin, gamma-globulin, keyhole limpet hemocyanin (KLH), tftyroglobulin, ovalbumin, or fibrinogen.
  • BDB bis- diazobenzidine
  • MBS maleimidobenzoyl-N-hydroxysuccinimide ester
  • a general rule for selecting an appropriate method for coupling a given peptide to a protein carrier can be stated as follows: the group involved in attachment should occur only once in the sequence, preferably at the appropriate end of the segment. For example, BDB should not be used if a tyrosine residue occurs in the main part of a sequence chosen for its potentially antigenic character.
  • centrally located lysines rule out the glutaraldehyde method, and the occurrences of aspartic and glutamic acids frequently exclude the carbodiimide approach.
  • suitable residues can be positioned at either end of chosen sequence segment as attachment sites, whether or not they occur in the " "native" protein sequence. Internal segments, unlike the amino-and-carboxy termini, will-differ significantly at the "unattached end” from the same sequence as it is found in the native protein where the polypeptide backbone is continuous. The problem can be remedied, to a degree, by acetylating the ⁇ - amino group and then attaching the peptide by way of its carboxy terminus.
  • the coupling efficiency to the carrier protein is conveniently measured by using a radioactively labeled peptide, prepared either by using a radioactive amino acid for one step of the synthesis or by labeling the completed peptide by the iodination of a tyrosine residue.
  • a radioactively labeled peptide prepared either by using a radioactive amino acid for one step of the synthesis or by labeling the completed peptide by the iodination of a tyrosine residue.
  • the presence of tyrosine in the peptide also allows one to set up a sensitive radioimmune assay, if desirable. Therefore, tyrosine can be introduced as a terminal residue if it is not part of the peptide sequence defined by the native polypeptide.
  • Preferred carriers are proteins, and preferred protein carriers include bovine serum albumin, myoglobulin, ovalbumin (OVA) 5 keyhole limpet hemocyanin (KLH), or the like.
  • Peptides can be linked to KLHLthrough cysteines by MBS as disclosed by Liu et al., Biochemistry, Vol. 18, pgs. 690-697 (1979).
  • MBS phosphate- buffered saline
  • pH 9.0 0.1 M sodium borate buffer
  • 1.0 M sodium acetate buffer pH for the dissolution of the peptide is chosen to optimize peptide solubility.
  • the content of free cysteine for soluble peptides is determined by Ellman's method, Ellman, Arch. Biochem. Biophys., Vol. 82, pg. 7077 (1959).
  • 4 mg KLH in 0.25 ml of 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer (pH 7.2) is reacted with 0.7 mg MBS (dissolved in dimethyl formamide) and stirred for 30 min at room temperature.
  • the MBS is added dropwise to ensure that the local concentration of formamide is not too high, as KLH is insoluble in >30% formamide.
  • the reaction product, KLH-MBS is then passed through Sephadex G-25 equilibrated with 50 mM sodium phosphate buffer (pH 6.0) to remove free MBS, KLH recovery from peak fractions of the column eluate (monitored by OD280) is estimated to be approximately 80%.
  • KLH-MBS is then reacted with 5 mg peptide dissolved in 1 ml of the chosen buffer.
  • the pH is adjusted to 7-7.5 and the reaction is stirred for 3 hr at room temperature. Coupling efficiency is monitored with radioactive peptide by dialysis of a sample of the conjugate against phosphate-buffered saline, and may range from 8% to 60%.
  • polyclonal or monoclonal antibodies are produced by standard techniques, e.g. as disclosed by Campbell, Monoclonal Antibody Technology (Elsevier, New York, 1984); Hurrell, ed. Monoclonal Hybridoma Antibodies: Techniques and Applications (CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, 1982); Schreier et al. Hybridoma Techniques (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, New York, 1980); U.S. Patent 4,562,003; or the like. In particular, U.S. Patent 4,562,003 is incorporated by reference. Humanized Antibodies
  • the anti-PAP antibodies of the invention may further comprise humanized antibodies or human antibodies.
  • humanized antibody refers to humanized forms of non-human (e.g., murine) antibodies that are chimeric antibodies, immunoglobulin chains or fragments thereof (such as Fv, Fab, Fab', F(ab'), or other antigen-binding partial sequences of antibodies) which contain some portion of the sequence derived from non-human antibody.
  • Humanized antibodies include human immunoglobulins in which residues from a complementary determining region (CDR) of the human immunoglobulin are replaced by residues from a CDR of a non-human species such as mouse, jat .orrabbit having the desired binding specificity, affinity and capacity.
  • CDR complementary determining region
  • the humanized antibody will comprise substantially all of at least one, and generally two, variable domains, in which all or substantially all of the CDR regions correspond to those of a non-human immunoglobulin and all or substantially all of the FR regions are those of a human immunoglobulin consensus sequence.
  • the humanized antibody optimally also will comprise at least a portion of an immunoglobulin constant region (Fc), typically that of a human immunoglobulin (Jones et al., Nature 321:522-525 (1986) and Presta, Curr. Op. Struct. Biol. 2:593-596 (1992)).
  • Fc immunoglobulin constant region
  • a humanized antibody has one or more amino acids introduced into it from a source which is non-human in order to more closely resemble a human antibody, while still retaining the original binding activity of the antibody.
  • Methods for humanization of antibodies are further detailed in Jones et al., Nature 321:522-525 (1986); Riechmann et al., Nature 332:323-327 (1988); and Verhoeyen et al., Science 239:1534-1536 (1988).
  • Such "humanized" antibodies are chimeric antibodies in that substantially less than an intact human variable domain has been substituted by the corresponding sequence from a non-human species.
  • Heteroconjugate antibodies which comprise two covalently joined antibodies, are also within the scope of the present invention.
  • Heteroconjugate antibodies may be prepared in vitro using known methods in synthetic protein chemistry, including those involving crosslinking agents.
  • immunotoxins may be prepared using a disulfide exchange reaction or by forming a thioether bond.
  • Bispecific antibodies have binding specificities for at least two different antigens. Such antibodies are monoclonal, and preferably human or humanized. One of the binding specificities of a bispecific antibody of the present invention is for a PAP, and the other one is preferably for a cell-surface protein or receptor or receptor submit. Methods for making bispecific antibodies are known in the art, and in general, the recombinant production of bispecific antibodies is based on the co-expression of two immunoglobulin heavy-chain/light- chain pairs in hybridoma cells, where the two heavy chains have different specificities, e.g. Milstein and Cuello, Nature 305:537-539 (1983). Given that the random assortment of immunoglobulin heavy and light chains results in production of potentially ten different antibody molecules by the hybridomas, purification of the correct molecule usually requires some sort of affinity purification, e.g. affinity chromatography.
  • PAP antibodies are preferably specific for the PAPs of the invention and as such, do not bind peptides derived from other proteins with high affinity.
  • the term "heavy chain variable region” means a polypeptide (1) which is from 110 to 125 amino acids in length, and (2) whose amino acid sequence corresponds to that of a heavy chain of an antibody of the invention, starting from the heavy chain's N-terminal amino acid.
  • the term "light chain variable region” means a polypeptide (1) which is from 95 to 115 amino acids in length, and (2) whose amino acid sequence corresponds to that of a light chain of an antibody of the invention, starting from the light chain's N-terminal amino acid.
  • the term "monoclonal antibody” refers to homogeneous populations of immunoglobulins which are capable of specifically binding to PAPs.
  • PAP antibodies may be used as functional modulators, most commonly as antagonists.
  • antibody modulators of the invention are derived from monoclonal antibodies specific for PAPs.
  • Monoclonal antibodies capable of blocking, or neutralizing, PAPs are generally selected by their ability to inhibit a PAP biological activity.
  • f antibody fragments are also well known, e.g. Fab fragments: Tijssen, Practice and Theory of Enzyme Immunoassays (Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1985); and Fv fragments: Hochman et al. Biochemistry, Vol. 12, pgs. 1130-1135 (1973), Sharon et al., Biochemistry, Vol. 15, pgs. 1591-1594 (1976) and Ehrlich et al., U.S. Patent 4,355,023; and antibody half molecules: Auditore- Hargreaves, U.S. Patent 4,470,925.
  • monoclonal antibodies, Fv fragments, Fab fragments, or other binding compositions derived from monoclonal antibodies of the invention have a high affinity to PAPs.
  • the affinity of monoclonal antibodies and related molecules to PAPs may be measured by conventional techniques including plasmon resonance, ELISA, or equilibrium dialysis. Affinity measurement by plasmon resonance techniques may be carried out, for example, using a BIAcore 2000 instrument (Biacore AB, Uppsala, Sweden) in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended protocol.
  • affinity is measured by ELISA, as described in U.S. patent 6,235,883, for example.
  • the dissociation constant between PAPs and monoclonal antibodies of the invention is less than 10 '5 molar. More preferably, such dissociation constant is less than 10 "8 molar; still more preferably, such dissociation constant is less than lO '9 molar; and most preferably, such dissociation constant is in the range of 10 "9 to 10 '11 molar.
  • the antibodies of the present invention are useful for detecting PAPs. Such detection methods are advantageously applied to diagnosis of PAP-related disorders.
  • the antibodies of the invention may be used in most assays involving antigen-antibody reactions.
  • the assays may be homogeneous or heterogeneous.
  • the sample can be a biological sample or fluid such as serum, urine, whole blood, lymphatic fluid, plasma, saliva, cells, tissue, and material secreted by cells or tissues cultured in vitro.
  • the sample can be pretreated if necessary to remove unwanted materials.
  • the immunological reaction usually involves the specific antibody, a labeled analyte, and the sample suspected of containing the antigen.
  • the signal arising from the label is modified, directly or indirectly, upon the binding of the antibody to the labeled analyte. Both immunological reaction and detection of the extent thereof are carried out in a homogeneous solution. Immunochemical labels which may be employed include free radicals, fluorescent dyes, enzymes, bacteriophages, coenzymes, and so forth.
  • the reagents are usually the sample, the specific antibody, and means for producing a detectable signal.
  • the specimen is generally placed on a support, such as a plate or a slide, and contacted with the antibody in a liquid phase.
  • the support is then separated from the liquid phaSe and either the support phase or the liquid phase is examined for a detectable signal employing means for producing such signal or signal producing system.
  • the signal is related to the presence of the antigen in the sample.
  • Means for producing a detectable signal includes the use of radioactive labels, fluorescent compounds, enzymes, and so forth.
  • Exemplary heterogeneous immunoassays are the radioimmunoassay, immunofluorescence methods, enzyme-linked immunoassays, and the like.
  • the antibodies maybe bound to a radioactive material or to a drug to form a radiopharmaceutical or pharmaceutical, respectively. (Carrasquillo, et al., Cancer Treatment Reports (1984) 68:317-328).
  • an assay employing an antibody of the present invention involves the use of a surface to which the monoclonal antibody of the invention is attached.
  • the underlying structure of the surface may take different forms, have different compositions and maybe a mixture of compositions or laminates or combinations thereof.
  • the surface may assume a variety of shapes and forms and may have varied dimensions, depending on the manner of use and measurement.
  • Illustrative surfaces may be pads, beads, discs, or strips which may be flat, concave or convex. Thickness is not critical, generally being from about 0.1 to 2 mm thick and of any convenient diameter or other dimensions.
  • the surface typically will be supported on a rod, tube, capillary, fiber, strip, disc, plate, cuvette and will typically be porous and polyfunctional or capable of being polyfunctionalized so as to permit covalent binding of an antibody and permit bonding of other compounds which form a part of a means for producing a detectable signal.
  • a wide variety of organic and inorganic polymers, both natural and synthetic, and combinations thereof, may be employed as the material for the solid surface.
  • Illustrative polymers include polyethylene, polypropylene, poly(4- methylbutene), polystyrene, polymethracrylate, poly(ethylene terephthalate), rayon, nylon, poly(vinyl butyrate), silicones, polyformaldehyde, cellulose, cellulose acetate, nitrocellulose, and latex.
  • Other surfaces include paper, glasses, ceramics, metals, metaloids, semiconductor materials, cements, silicates or the like.
  • substrates that form gels, gelatins, lipopolysaccharides, silicates, agarose and polyacrylamides or polymers which form several aqueous phases such as dextrans, polyalkylene glycols (alkylene of 2 to 3 carbon atoms) or surfactants such as phospholipids.
  • dextrans polyalkylene glycols (alkylene of 2 to 3 carbon atoms)
  • surfactants such as phospholipids.
  • the binding of the antibody to the surface may be accomplished by well known techniques, commonly available in the literature (see, for example, “Immobilized Enzymes,” Ichiro Chibata, Press, New York (1978) and Cuatrecasas, J. Bio. Chem., 245: 3059 (1970)).
  • the sample is mixed with aqueous medium and the medium is contacted with the surface having an antibody bound thereto.
  • Labels may be included in the aqueous medium, either concurrently or added subsequently so as to provide a detectable signal associated with the surface.
  • the means for producing the detectable signal can involve the incorporation of a labeled analyte or it may involve the use of a. second jnonoclonal antibody having a label conjugated thereto. Separation and washing steps will be carried out as needed.
  • the signal detected is related to the presence of PAP in the sample. It is within the scope of the present invention to include a calibration on the same support.
  • a particular embodiment of an assay in accordance with the present invention involves the use of a support such as a slide or a well of apetri dish.
  • the technique involves fixing the sample to be analyzed on the support with an appropriate fixing material and incubating the sample on the slide with a monoclonal antibody. After washing with an appropriate buffer such as, for example, phosphate buffered saline, the support is contacted with a labeled specific binding partner for the antibody. After incubation as desired, the slide is washed a second time with an aqueous buffer and the determination is made of the binding of the labeled monoclonal antibody to the antigen.
  • an appropriate buffer such as, for example, phosphate buffered saline
  • the slide may be covered with a fluorescent antibody mounting fluid on a cover slip and then examined with a fluorescent microscope to determine the extent of binding.
  • the label can be an enzyme conjugated to the monoclonal antibody and the extent of binding can be determined by examining the slide for the presence of enzyme activity, which may be indicated by the formation of a precipitate, color, etc.
  • a particular example of an assay utilizing the present antibodies is a double determinant ELISA assay.
  • a support such as, e.g., a glass or vinyl plate, is coated with an antibody specific for PAP by conventional techniques. The support is contacted with the sample suspected of containing PAP, usually in aqueous medium.
  • the support is separated from the medium, washed to remove unbound PAP with, for example, water or an aqueous buffered medium, and contacted with an antibody specific for PAP, again usually in aqueous medium.
  • the antibody is labeled with an enzyme directly or indirectly such as, e.g., horseradish peroxidase or alkaline phosphatase.
  • the support is separated from the medium, and washed as above. The enzyme activity of the support or the aqueous medium is determined. This enzyme activity is related to the amount of PAP in the sample.
  • kits for carrying out the methods disclosed above.
  • the kit comprises in packaged combination (a) a monoclonal antibody more specifically defined above and (b) a conjugate of a specific binding partner for the above monoclonal antibody and a label capable of producing a detectable signal.
  • the reagents may also include ancillary agents such as buffering agents and protein stabilizing agents, e.g., polysaccharides and the like.
  • the kit may further include, where necessary, other members of the signal producing system of which system the label is a member, agents for reducing background interference in a test, control reagents, apparatus for conducting a test, and the like.
  • the diagnostic kit comprises a conjugate of monoclonal antibody of the invention and a label capable of producing a detectable signal.
  • Ancillary agents as mentioned above may also be present.
  • an anti-PAP antibody e.g., monoclonal antibody
  • an anti-PAP antibody can facilitate the purification of natural PAPs from cells and of recombinantly produced PAP expressed in host cells.
  • an-anti-PAP antibody can be used to isolate PAP to aid in detection of low concentrations of PAP (e.g., in serum, cellular lysate or cell supernatant) or in order to evaluate the abundance and pattern of expression of the PAP.
  • Anti-PAP antibodies can be used diagnostically to monitor protein levels in tissue as part of a clinical testing procedure, e.g., to determine the efficacy of a given treatment regimen. Detection can be facilitated by coupling (i.e., physically linking) the antibody to a label group.
  • Detection, purification, and screening of the polypeptides of the invention may be accomplished using retentate chromatography (preferably, protein arrays or chips), as described by U.S. Patent 622 * 5027 and U.S. Patent Application 20010014461, disclosures of which are herein incorporated by reference in their entireties.
  • retentate chromatography describes methods in which polypeptides (and/ or other sample components) are retained on an adsorbent (e.g., array or chip) and subsequently detected.
  • Such methods involve (1) selectively adsorbing polypeptides from a sample to a substrate under a plurality of different adsorbent/eluant combinations ("selectivity conditions") and (2) detecting the retention of adsorbed polypeptides by desorption spectrometry (e.g., by mass spectrometry).
  • desorption spectrometry e.g., by mass spectrometry
  • polypeptides are eluted off of the adsorbent prior to detection.
  • the coupling of adsorption chromatography with detection by desorption spectrometry provides extraordinary sensitivity, the ability to rapidly analyze retained components with a variety of different selectivity conditions, and parallel processing of components adsorbed to different sites (i.e., "affinity sites” or “spots”) on the array under different elution conditions.
  • this invention provides a molecular discovery and diagnostic device that is characterized by the inclusion of both parallel and multiplex polypeptide processing capabilities.
  • Polypeptides of the invention and PAP-binding substances are preferably attached to a label group, and thus directly detected, enabling simultaneous transmission of two or more signals from the same "circuit" (i.e., addressable "chip” location) during a single unit operation.
  • any instrument, method, process, etc. can be utilized to determine the identity and abundance of proteins in a sample.
  • a preferred method of obtaining identity is by mass spectrometry, where protein molecules in a sample are ionized and then the resultant mass and charge of the protein ions are detected and determined.
  • mass spectrometry it is preferred that the protein be converted to a gas-ion phase.
  • Various methods of protein ionization are useful, including, e.g., fast ion bombardment (FAB), plasma desorption, laser desorption, thermal desorption, preferably, electrospray ionization (ESI) and matrix-assisted laser desorption/ionization (MALDI).
  • FAB fast ion bombardment
  • ESI electrospray ionization
  • MALDI matrix-assisted laser desorption/ionization
  • Many different mass analyzers are available for peptide and protein analysis, including, but not limited to, Time-of-Flight (TOF), ion trap (ITMS), Fourier transform ion cyclotron (FTMS), quadrupole ion trap, and sector (electric and/or magnetic) spectrometers. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,572,025 for an ion trap MS.
  • Mass analyzers can be used alone, or in combination with other mass analyzers in tandem mass spectrometers. In trie latter case, a first mass analyzer can be use to separate the protein ions (precursor ion) from each other and determine the molecular weights of the various protein constituents in the sample. A second mass analyzer can be used to analyze each separated constituents, e.g., by fragmenting the precursor ions into product ions by using, e.g. an inert gas. Any desired combination of mass analyzers can be used, including, e.g., triple quadrupoles, tandem time-of-flights, ion traps, and/or combinations thereof.
  • detectors can be used to detect the protein ions.
  • destructive detectors can be utilized, such as ion electron multipliers or cryogenic detectors (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,640,010).
  • non-destructive detectors can be used, such as ion traps which are used as ion current pick-up devices in quadrupole ion trap mass analyzers or FTMS.
  • sample preparation methods can be utilized including, dried droplet (Karasand Hillenkamp, Anal. Chem., 60:2299-2301, 1988), vacuum-drying (W ⁇ nberger et al., In Proceedings of the 41st ASMS Conference on Mass Spectrometry and Allied Topics, San Francisco, May 31-June 4, 1993, pp. 775a-b), crush crystals (Xiang et al., Rapid Comm. Mass Spectrom., 8:199-204,1994), slow crystal growing (Xiang et al., Org. Mass Spectrom, 28:1424-1429, 1993); active film (Mock et al., Rapid Comm.
  • samples are prepared as solid-state co-crystals or thin films by mixing them with an energy absorbing compound or colloid (the matrix) in the liquid phase, and ultimately drying the solution to the solid state upon the surface of an inert probe.
  • an energy absorbing compound or colloid the matrix
  • EAM energy absorbing molecule
  • the probe contents are allowed to dry to the solid state prior to introduction into the laser desorption/ionization time-of-flight mass spectrometer (LDIMS).
  • LIMS laser desorption/ionization time-of-flight mass spectrometer
  • Ion detection in TOF mass spectrometry is typically achieved with the use of electro- emissive detectors such as electron multipliers (EMP) or microchannel plates (MCP).
  • EMP electron multipliers
  • MCP microchannel plates
  • Both of these devices function by converting primary incident charged particles into a cascade of secondary, tertiary, quaternary, etc. electrons.
  • the probability of secondary electrons being generated by the impact of a single incident charged particle can be taken to be the ion-to- electron conversion efficiency of this charged particle (or more simply, the conversion efficiency).
  • the total electron yield for cascading events when compared to the total number of incident charged particles is typically described as the detector gain. Because generally the overall response time of MCPs is far superior to that of EMPs, MCPs are the preferred electro-emissive detector for enhancing mass/charge resolving power. However, EMPs function well for detecting ion populations of disbursed kinetic energies, where rapid response time and broad frequency bandwidth are not necessary.
  • LC-TMS liquid-chromatography tandem mass spectrometer
  • a protein eluted from a column according to the system described in Example 1 is analyzed using both MS and MS-MS analysis.
  • a small portion of intact proteins eluting from RP2 may be diverted to online detection using LC-ESI MS.
  • the proteins are aliquoted on a number of plates allowing digestion or not with trypsin, preparation for MALDI-MS as well as for ESI-MS, as well as preparation of the MALDI plates with different matrices.
  • the methods thus allow, in addition to information on intact mass, to conduct an analysis by both peptide mass fingerprinting and MS-MS techniques.
  • the methods described herein of separating and fractionating proteins provide individual proteins or fractions containing small numbers of distinct proteins. These proteins can be identified by mass spectral determination of the molecular masses of the protein and peptides resulting from the fragmentation thereof. Making use of available information in protein sequence databases, a comparison can be made between proteolytic peptide mass patterns generated in silico, and experimentally observed peptide masses. A "hit-list" can be compiled, ranking candidate proteins in the database, based on (among other criteria) the number of matches between the theoretical and experimental proteolytic fragments.
  • Several Web sites are accessible that provide software for protein identification on-line, based on peptide mapping and sequence database search strategies (e.g., http://www.expasy.ch).
  • Data collected from a mass spectrometer typically comprises the intensity and mass to charge ratio for each detected event.
  • Spectral data can be recorded in any suitable form, including, e.g., in graphical, numerical, or electronic formats, either in digital or analog form.
  • Spectra are preferably recorded in a storage medium, including, e.g., magnetic, such as floppy disk, tape, or hard disk; optical, such as CD-ROM or laser-disc; or, ROM-CHIPS.
  • the mass spectrum of a given sample typically provides information on protein intensity, mass to charge ratio, and molecular weight. In preferred embodiments of the invention, the molecular weights of proteins in the sample are used as a matching criterion to query a database.
  • the molecular weights are calculated conventionally, e.g., by subtracting the mass of the ionizing proton for singly-charged protonated molecular ions, by multiplying the measured mass/charge ratio by the number of charges for multiply-charged ions and subtracting the number of ionizing protons.
  • databases are useful in accordance with the present invention.
  • Useful databases include, databases containing genomic sequences, expressed gene sequences, and/or expressed protein sequences.
  • Preferred databases contain nucleotide sequence-derived molecular masses of proteins present in a known organism, organ, tissue, or cell-type.
  • ORF open reading frames
  • ORF open reading frames
  • Several publicly accessible databases are available, including, the SwissPROT/TrEMBL database (http://www.expasy.ch). ,
  • a mass spectrometer is equipped with commercial software that identifies peaks above a certain threshold level, calculates mass, charge, and intensity of detected ions. Correlating molecular weight with a given output peak can be accomplished directly from the spectral data, i.e., where the charge on an ion is one and the molecular weight is Iherefore equal to the numerator value minus the mass of the ionizing proton.
  • protein ions can be comp ⁇ exed with various counter-ions and adducts, such as N, C, and K'. In such a case, it would be expected that a given protein ion would exhibit multiple peaks, such as a triplet, representing different ionic states (or species) of the same protein.
  • post- translation processing may have to be considered.
  • processing events including, proteolytic processing, removal of N-terminal methionine, acetylation, methylation, glycosylation, phosphorylation, etc.
  • a database can be queried for a range of proteins matching the molecular mass of the unknown.
  • the range window can be determined by the accuracy of the instrument, the method by which the sample was prepared, etc. Based on the number of hits (where a hit is match) in the spectrum, the unknown protein or peptide is identified or classified.
  • Methods of identifying one or more PAP by mass spectrometry are useful for diagnosis and prognosis of PAP-related disorders.
  • such methods are used to detect one or more PAP present in human serum.
  • Exemplary techniques are described in U.S. Patent Applications 02/0060290, 02/0137106, 02/0138208, 02/0142343, 02/0155509, disclosures of which are incorporated by reference in their entireties.
  • nucleic acid molecules, proteins, protein homologues, and antibodies described herein can be used in one or more of the following methods: diagnostic assays, prognostic assays, monitoring clinical trials, screening assays, and pharmacogenetics as further described herein.
  • the invention provides diagnostic and prognostic assays for detecting PAP nucleic acids and proteins, as further described. Also provided are diagnostic and prognostic assays for detecting interactions between PAPs and PAP target molecules, particularly natural agonists and antagonists.
  • the present invention provides methods for identifying polypeptides that are differentially expressed between two or more samples.
  • “Differential expression” refers to differences in the quantity or quality of a polypeptide between samples. Such differences could result at any stage.ofprotein expression.from transcription through post-translational modification.
  • two samples are bound to affinity spots on different sets of adsorbents (e.g., chips) and recognition maps are compared to identify polypeptides that are differentially retained by the two sets of adsorbents. Differential retention includes quantitative retention as well as qualitative differences in the polypeptide.
  • differences in post-translational modification of a protein can result in differences in recognition maps detectable as differences in binding characteristics (e.g., glycosylated proteins bind differently to lectin adsorbents) or differences in mass (e.g., post-translational cleavage products).
  • an adsorbent can have an array of affinity spots selected for a combination of markers diagnostic for a disease or syndrome.
  • Differences in polypeptide levels between samples can be identified by exposing the samples to a variety of conditions for analysis by desorption spectrometry (e.g., mass spectrometry).
  • Unknown proteins can be identified by detecting physicochemical characteristics (e.g., molecular mass), and this information can be used to search databases for proteins having similar profiles.
  • Preferred methods of detecting a PAP utilize mass spectrometry techniques. Such methods provide information about the size and character of the particular PAP isoform that is present in a sample, e.g., a biological sample submitted for diagnosis or prognosis.
  • Mass spectrometry techniques are detailed in the section titled "Detection of PAPs by mass spectrometry”.
  • Example 1 outlines a preferred detection scheme, wherein a biological sample is separated by chromatography before characterization by mass spectrometry.
  • the invention provides a method of detecting a PAP in a biological sample comprising the steps of: fractionating a biological sample (e.g., plasma, serum, lymph, cerebrospinal fluid, cell lysate of a particular tissue) by at least one chromatographic step; subjecting a fraction to mass spectrometry; and comparing the characteristics of polypeptide species observed in mass spectrometry with known characteristics of PAP polypeptides.
  • a biological sample e.g., plasma, serum, lymph, cerebrospinal fluid, cell lysate of a particular tissue
  • the isolated nucleic acid molecules of the invention can be used, for example, to detect PAP mRNA (e.g., in a biological sample) or a genetic alteration in a PAP-encoding gene, and to modulate a PAP activity, as described further below.
  • the PAPs can be used to screen for naturally occurring PAP target molecules, and to screen for drugs or compounds which modulate PAP activity.
  • the anti- PAP antibodies of the invention can be used to detect and isolate PAPs, regulate the bioavailability of PAPs, and modulate PAP activity.
  • one embodiment of the present invention involves a method of use wherein a molecule of the present invention (e.g., a PAP, PAP nucleic acid, PAP modulator, or antibody) is used, for example, to diagnose and/or prognose a disorder in which any of the aforementioned PAP activities is indicated.
  • a molecule of the present invention e.g., a PAP, PAP nucleic acid, PAP modulator, or antibody
  • the present invention involves a method of use wherein a molecule of the present invention is used, for example, for the diagnosis and/or prognosis of subjects, preferably a human subject, in which any of the aforementioned activities is pathologically perturbed.
  • the invention encompasses a method of determining whether a PAP is expressed within a biological sample comprising: a) contacting said biological sample with: i) a polynucleotide that hybridizes under stringent conditions to a PAP nucleic acid; or ii) a detectable polypeptide (e.g. antibody) that selectively binds to a PAP; and b) detecting the presence or absence of hybridization between said polynucleotide and an RNA species within said sample, or the presence or absence of binding of said detectable polypeptide to a polypeptide within said sample. Detection of said hybridization or of said binding indicates that said PAP is expressed within said sample.
  • a detectable polypeptide e.g. antibody
  • the polynucleotide is a primer
  • said hybridization is detected by detecting the presence of an amplification product comprising said primer sequence, or the detectable polypeptide is an antibody.
  • detection involves the use of a probe/primer in a polymerase chain reaction (PCR) (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos.4,683,195 and 4,683,202, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties), such as anchor PCR or RACE PCR, or, alternatively, in a ligation chain reaction (LCR) (see, e.g., Landegren et al. (1988) Science 241:1077-1080; andNakazawa et al.
  • PCR polymerase chain reaction
  • LCR ligation chain reaction
  • Also envisioned is a method of determining whether a mammal, preferably human, has an elevated or reduced level of expression of a PAP comprising: a) providing a biological sample from said mammal; and b) comparing the amount of a PAP or of a PAP RNA species encoding a PAP within said biological sample with a level detected in or expected from a control sample.
  • An increased amount of said PAP or said PAP RNA species within said biological sample compared to said level detected in or expected from said control sample indicates that said mammal has an elevated level of PAP expression
  • a decreased amount of said PAP or said PAP RNA species within said biological sample compared to said level detected in or expected from said control sample indicates that said mammal has a reduced level of expression of a PAP.
  • the present invention also pertains to the field of predictive medicine in which diagnostic assays, prognostic assays, and monitoring clinical trials are used for prognostic purposes.
  • one aspect of the present invention relates to diagnostic assays for determining PAP and/or nucleic acid expression as well as PAP activity, in the context of a biological sample (e.g., blood, serum, cells, tissue) to thereby determine whether an individual is afflicted with a disease or disorder, or is at risk of developing a disorder, associated with aberrant PAP expression or activity.
  • the invention also provides for prognostic (or predictive) assays for determining whether an individual is at risk of developing a disorder associated with a PAP, nucleic acid expression or activity. For example, mutations in a PAP-encoding gene can be assayed in a biological sample. Such assays can be used for prognostic or predictive purpose to thereby prophylactically treat an individual prior to the onset of a disorder characterized by or associated with PAP expression or activity.
  • biological sample is intended to include tissues, cells and biological fluids isolated from an individual, as well as tissues, cells and fluids present within an individual. That is, the detection methods of the invention can be used to detect a PAP mRNA, protein, or genomic DNA in a biological sample in vitro as well as in vivo.
  • Preferred biological samples are biological fluids such as lymph, cerebrospinal fluid, blood, and especially blood serum.
  • in vitro techniques for detection of a PAP mRNA include Northern hybridizations and in situ hybridizations.
  • Ih vitro techniques for detection of a PAP include mass spectrometry, Enzyme Linked Immuno Sorbent Assays (ELISAs), Western blots, immunoprecipitations and immunofluorescence.
  • In vitro techniques for detection of a PAP-encoding genomic DNA include Southern hybridizations.
  • in vivo techniques for detection of a PAP include introducing into an individual a labeled anti- PAP antibody.
  • the subject methods can be characterized by generally comprising detecting, in a tissue sample of the individual (e.g. a human patient), the presence or absence of a genetic lesion characterized by at least one of (i) a mutation of a gene encoding one of the subject PAP or (ii) the mis-expression of a PAP-encoding gene.
  • such genetic lesions can be detected by ascertaining the existence of at least one of (i) a deletion of one or more nucleotides from the PAP-encoding gene, (ii) an addition of one or more nucleotides to the gene, (iii) a substitution of one or more nucleotides of the gene, (iv) a gross chromosomal rearrangement or amplification of the gene, (v) a gross alteration in the level of a messenger KNA transcript of the gene, (vi) aberrant modification of the gene, such as of the methylation pattern of the genomic DNA, (vii) the presence of a non-wild type splicing pattern of a messenger RNA transcript of the gene, and (viii) reduced level of expression, indicating lesion in regulatory element or reduced stability of a PAP-encoding transcript.
  • aberrant methylation patterns of a PAP nucleic acid can be detected by digesting genomic DNA from a patient sample with one or more restriction endonucleases that are sensitive to methylation and for which recognition sites exist in the PAP-encoding gene (including in the flanking and intronic sequences). See, for example, Buiting et al. (1994) Human MoI Genet 3:893-895. Digested DNA is separated by gel electrophoresis, and hybridized with probes derived from, for example, genomic or cDNA sequences. The methylation status of the PAP-encoding gene can be determined by comparison of the restriction pattern generated from the sample DNA with that for a standard of known methylation.
  • a diagnostic assay which detects the ability of a PAP to bind to a cell surface or extracellular protein. For instance, it will be desirable to detect PAP mutants which, while expressed at appreciable levels in the cell, are defective at binding a PAP target protein (having either diminished or enhanced binding affinity for the target). Such mutants may arise, for example, from mutations, e.g., point mutants, which may be impractical to detect by the diagnostic DNA sequencing techniques or by the immunoassays described above.
  • the present invention accordingly further contemplates diagnostic screening assays which generally comprise cloning one or more PAP-encoding gene from the sample tissue, and expressing the cloned genes under conditions which permit detection of an interaction between that recombinant gene product and a target protein.
  • diagnostic screening assays which generally comprise cloning one or more PAP-encoding gene from the sample tissue, and expressing the cloned genes under conditions which permit detection of an interaction between that recombinant gene product and a target protein.
  • diagnostic screening assays which generally comprise cloning one or more PAP-encoding gene from the sample tissue, and expressing the cloned genes under conditions which permit detection of an interaction between that recombinant gene product and a target protein.
  • a target protein can be provided as an immobilized protein (a "target"), such as by use of GST fusion proteins and glutathione treated microliter plates as described herein.
  • the methods further involve obtaining a control biological sample from a control subject, contacting the control sample with a compound or agent capable of detecting a PAP, iriRNA, or genomic DNA, such that the level of a PAP, mKNA, or genomic DNA is measured in the biological sample, and comparing the level of the PAP, mKNA or genomic DNA in the control sample to that of the test sample.
  • a compound or agent capable of detecting a PAP, iriRNA, or genomic DNA such that the level of a PAP, mKNA, or genomic DNA is measured in the biological sample, and comparing the level of the PAP, mKNA or genomic DNA in the control sample to that of the test sample.
  • the invention also encompasses kits for detecting the presence of a PAP, mKNA or genomic DNA in a biological sample.
  • the kit can comprise: a labeled compound or agent capable of detecting a PAP, mKNA or genomic DNA in a biological sample; means for determining the amount of a PAP in the sample; and means for comparing the amount of PAP in the sample with a standard.
  • the compound or agent can be packaged in a suitable container.
  • the kit can further comprise instructions for using the kit to detect PAP or nucleic acid.
  • the invention provides a method (also referred to herein as a "screening assay") for identifying candidate modulators (e.g., small molecules, peptides, antibodies, peptidomimetics or other drugs) which bind to PAPs, have a modulatory effect on, for example, PAP expression or preferably PAP biological activity.
  • candidate modulators e.g., small molecules, peptides, antibodies, peptidomimetics or other drugs
  • small molecules can be generated using combinatorial chemistry or can be obtained from a natural products library.
  • Assays may be cell based or non-cell based assays.
  • Drug screening assays may be binding assays or more preferentially functional assays, as further described.
  • the body fluid analyzed for the level of at least one PAP is preferably from a non-human mammal.
  • the non-human mammal is preferably one in which the induction of an anti- PAP- related disorders response by endogenous and/or exogenous agents is predictive of the induction of such a response in a human.
  • Rodents mice, rats, etc.
  • primates are particularly suitable for use in this aspect of the invention.
  • Agents that are found, using screening assays as further described herein, to modulate PAP activity by at least 5%, more preferably by at least 10%, still more preferably by at least 30%, still more preferably by at least 50%, still more preferably by at least 70%, even more preferably by at least 90 %, may be selected for further testing as a prophylactic and/or therapeutic anti-PAP-related disorders agent.
  • agents that are found, using screening assays as further described herein, to modulate PAP expression by at least 5%, more preferably by at least 10%, still more preferably by at least 30%, still more preferably by at least 50%, still more preferably by at least 70%, even more preferably by at least 90 %, may be selected for further testing as a prophylactic and/or therapeutic anti-PAP-related disorders agent.
  • Agents that are found to modulate PAP activity may be used, for example, to modulate treatment regimens for PAP-related disorders or to reduce the symptoms of PAP-related disorders alone or in combination with other appropriate agents or treatments.
  • Protein array methods are useful for screening and drug discovery. For example, one member of a receptor/ ligand pair is docked to an adsorbent, and its ability to bind the binding partner is determined in the presence of the test substance. Because of the rapidity with which adsorption can be tested, combinatorial libraries of test substances can be easily screened for their ability to modulate the interaction. In preferred screening methods, PAPs are docked to the adsorbent. Binding partners are preferably labeled, thus enabling detection of the interaction. Alternatively, in certain embodiments, a test substance is docked to the adsorbent. The polypeptides of the invention are exposed to the test substance and screened for binding.
  • an assay is a cell-based assay in which a cell which expresses a PAP or biologically active portion thereof is contacted with a test compound and the ability of the test compound to modulate PAP activity determined. Determining the ability of the test compound to modulate PAP activity can be accomplished by monitoring the bioactivity of the PAP or biologically active portion thereof.
  • the cell for example, can be of mammalian origin, insect origin, bacterial origin or a yeast cell.
  • the invention provides assays for screening candidate or test compounds which are target molecules of a PAP or biologically active portion thereof.
  • the invention provides assays for screening candidate or test compounds which bind to or modulate the activity of a PAP or biologically active portion thereof.
  • the test compounds of the present invention can be obtained using any of the numerous approaches in combinatorial library methods known in the art, including: biological libraries; spatially addressable parallel solid phase or solution phase libraries; synthetic library methods requiring deconvolution; the 'one-bead one-compound ⁇ library method; and synthetic library methods using affinity chromatography selection.
  • Determining the ability of the test compound to modulate PAP activity can also be accomplished, for example, by coupling the PAP or biologically active portion thereof with a label group such that binding of the PAP or biologically active portion thereof to its cognate target molecule can be determined by detecting the labeled PAP or biologically active portion thereof in a complex.
  • the extent of complex formation may be measured by itnmunoprecipitating the complex or by performing gel electrophoresis. It is also within the scope of this invention to determine the ability of a compound to interact with its cognate target molecule without the labeling of any of the interactants.
  • a micr ⁇ physiometer can be used to detect the interaction of a compound with its cognate target molecule without the labeling of either the compound or the target molecule. McConnell, H. M. et al. (1992) Science 257:1906-1912, the disclosure of which is incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • a microphysiometer such as a cytosensor is an analytical instrument that measures the rate at which a cell acidifies its environment using a Light-Addressable Potentiometric Sensor (LAPS). Changes in this acidification rate can be used as an indicator of the interaction between compound and receptor.
  • LAPS Light-Addressable Potentiometric Sensor
  • the assay comprises contacting a cell which is responsive to a PAP or biologically active portion thereof with a PAP or biologically active portion thereof, to form an assay mixture, contacting the assay mixture with a test compound, and determining the ability of the test compound to modulate the activity of the PAP or biologically active portion thereof. Determining the ability of the test compound to modulate the activity of the PAP or biologically active portion thereof comprises determining the ability of the test compound to modulate a biological activity of the PAP-responsive cell.
  • an assay is a cell-based assay comprising contacting a cell expressing a PAP target molecule (i.e. a molecule with which PAPs interact) with a test compound and determining the ability of the test compound to modulate the activity of the PAP target molecule. Determining the ability of the test compound to modulate the activity of a PAP target molecule can be accomplished, for example, by assessing the activity of a target molecule, or by assessing the ability of the PAP to bind to or interact with the PAP target molecule.
  • a PAP target molecule i.e. a molecule with which PAPs interact
  • Determining the ability of the PAP to bind to or interact with a PAP target molecule can be accomplished by one of the methods described above for directly or indirectly determining binding.
  • the assay includes contacting the PAP or biologically active portion thereof with a known compound which binds said PAP (e.g., a PAP antibody or target molecule) to form an assay mixture, contacting the PAP with a test compound before or after said known compound, and determining the ability of the test compound to interact with the PAP.
  • Determining the ability of the test compound to interact with a PAP comprises determining the ability of the test compound to preferentially bind to the PAP or biologically active portion-thereof as compared to the known compound.
  • Determining the ability of the PAP to bind to a PAP target molecule can also be accomplished using a technology such as real-time Biomolecular Interaction Analysis (BIA).
  • BIOA Biomolecular Interaction Analysis
  • BIOA is a technology for studying biospecific interactions in real time, without labeling any of the interactants (e.g., BIAcore). Changes in the optical phenomenon of surface plasmon resonance (SPR) can be used as an indication of real-time reactions between biological molecules.
  • the assay is a cell-free assay in which a PAP or biologically active portion thereof is contacted with a test compound and the ability of the test compound to modulate the activity of the PAP or biologically active portion thereof is determined.
  • determining the ability of the PAP to modulate or interact with a PAP target molecule can be accomplished by determining the activity of the target molecule.
  • the activity of the target molecule can be determined by contacting the target molecule with the PAP or a fragment thereof and measuring induction of a cellular second messenger of the target (e.g., cAMP, STAT3, Akt, intracellular Ca2+, diacylglycerol, IP3, etc.), detecting catalytic/enzymatic activity of the target for an appropriate substrate, detecting the induction of a reporter gene (comprising a target-responsive regulatory element operatively linked to a nucleic acid encoding a detectable marker, e.g., luciferase), or detecting a target-regulated cellular response, for example, signal transduction or protein:protein interactions.
  • a cellular second messenger of the target e.g., cAMP, STAT3, Akt, intracellular Ca2+, diacylglycerol, IP3, etc.
  • a reporter gene comprising a target-responsive regulatory element operatively linked to a nucleic acid encoding a detectable marker, e
  • the cell-free assays of the present invention are amenable to use of both soluble and/or membrane-bound forms of isolated proteins (e.g. PAPs or biologically active portions thereof or molecules to which PAPs targets bind).
  • isolated proteins e.g. PAPs or biologically active portions thereof or molecules to which PAPs targets bind.
  • a solubilizing agent such that the membrane-bound form of the isolated protein is maintained in solution.
  • non-ionic detergents such as n-
  • a PAP or its target molecule it may be desirable to immobilize either a PAP or its target molecule to facilitate separation of complexed from uncomplexed forms of one or both of the proteins, as well as to accommodate automation of the assay.
  • Binding of a test compound to a PAP, or interaction of a PAP with a target molecule in the presence and absence of a candidate compound can be accomplished in any vessel suitable for containing the reactants and by any immobilization protocol described herein.
  • the complexes can be dissociated from the matrix, and the level of PAP binding or activity determined using standard techniques.
  • a PAP or a PAP target molecule can be immobilized utilizing conjugation of biotin and streptavidin.
  • Biotinylated PAP or target molecules can be prepared from biotin-NHS (N-hydroxy-succinimide) using techniques well known in the art (e.g., biotinylation kit, Pierce Chemicals, Rockford, 111.), and immobilized in the wells of streptavidin-coated 96 well plates (Pierce Chemical).
  • antibodies reactive with PAP or target molecules but which do not interfere with binding of the PAP to its target molecule can be derivatized to the wells of the plate, and unbound target or PAP trapped in the wells by antibody conjugation.
  • Methods for detecting such complexes include immunodetection of complexes using antibodies reactive with the PAP or target molecule, as well as enzyme-linked assays which rely on detecting an enzymatic activity associated with the PAP or target molecule.
  • modulators of PAP expression are identified in a method wherein a cell is contacted with a candidate compound and the expression of PAP mRNA or protein in the cell is determined. The level of expression of PAP mRNA or protein in the presence of the candidate compound is compared to the level of expression of PAP mRNA or protein in the absence of the candidate compound. The candidate compound can then be identified as a modulator of PAP expression based on this comparison. For example, when expression of PAP mRNA or protein is greater (statistically significantly greater) in the presence of the candidate compound than in its absence, the candidate compound is identified as a stimulator of PAP mRNA or protein expression.
  • the candidate compound when expression of PAP mRNA or protein is less (statistically significantly less) in the presence of the candidate compound than in its absence, the candidate compound is identified as an inhibitor of PAP mRNA or protein expression.
  • the level of PAP mRNA or protein expressionin the cells can be determined by methods described herein for detecting PAP mRNA or protein.
  • the PAP can be used as "bait proteins" in a two-hybrid assay or three-hybrid assay (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,283,317; Zervos et al.
  • PAP-binding proteins proteins which bind to or interact with PAPs
  • PAP-binding proteins proteins which bind to or interact with PAPs
  • PAP-binding proteins proteins which bind to or interact with PAPs
  • PAP-binding proteins are also likely to be involved in the propagation of signals by the PAP or PAP targets as, for example, downstream elements of a PAP-mediated signaling pathway.
  • the two-hybrid system is based on the modular nature of most transcription factors, which consist of separable DNA-binding and activation domains.
  • the assay utilizes two different DNA constructs.
  • the gene that codes for a PAP or a fragment thereof is fused to a gene encoding the DNA binding domain of a known transcription factor (e.g., GAL-4).
  • a DNA sequence, from a library of DNA sequences, that encodes an unidentified protein (“prey" or "sample”) is fused to a gene that codes for the activation domain of the known transcription factor.
  • the DNA-binding and activation domains of the transcription factor are brought into close proximity. This proximity allows transcription of a reporter gene (e.g., LacZ) which is operably linked to a transcriptional regulatory site responsive to the transcription factor. Expression of the reporter gene can be detected and cell colonies containing the functional transcription factor can be isolated and used to obtain the cloned gene which encodes the protein which interacts with the PAP.
  • a reporter gene e.g., LacZ
  • Expression of the reporter gene can be detected and cell colonies containing the functional transcription factor can be isolated and used to obtain the cloned gene which encodes the protein which interacts with the PAP.
  • This invention further pertains to novel agents identified by the above-described screening assays and to processes for producing such agents by use of these assays. Accordingly, in one embodiment, the present invention includes a compound or agent obtainable by a method comprising the steps of any one of the aforementioned screening assays (e.g., cell-based assays or cell-free assays).
  • an agent identified as described herein in an appropriate animal model.
  • an agent identified as described herein e.g., a PAP modulating agent, or a PAP -binding partner
  • an agent identified as described herein can be used in an a'nimal model to determine the efficacy, toxicity, or side effects of treatment with such an agent.
  • an agent identified as described herein can be used in an animal model to determine the mechanism of action of such an agent.
  • this invention pertains to uses of novel agents identified by the above-described screening assays for treatments as described herein.
  • the present invention also pertains to uses of novel agents identified by the above- described screening assays for diagnoses, prognoses, prevention, and treatments as described herein.
  • the present invention includes a method of synthesizing or producing a drug or pharmaceutical composition by reference to the structure and/or properties of a compound obtainable by one of the above-described screening assays.
  • a drug or pharmaceutical composition can be synthesized based on the structure and/or properties of a compound obtained by a method in which a cell which expresses a PAP target molecule is contacted with a test compound and the ability of the test compound to bind to, or modulate the activity of, the PAP target molecule is determined.
  • the present invention includes a method of synthesizing or producing a drug or pharmaceutical composition based on the structure and/or properties of a compound obtainable by a method in which a PAP or biologically active portion thereof is contacted with a test compound and the ability of the test compound to bind to, or modulate, the activity of the PAP or biologically active portion thereof is determined.
  • polypeptides of the present invention When polypeptides of the present invention are expressed in soluble form, for example as a secreted product of transformed yeast or mammalian cells, they can be purified according to standard procedures of the art, including steps of ammonium sulfate precipitation, ion exchange chromatography, gel filtration, electrophoresis, affinity chromatography, according to, e.g., "Enzyme Purification and Related Techniques," Methods in Enzymology, 22:233-577 (1977), and Scopes, R., Protein Purification: Principles and Practice (Springer-Verlag, New York, 1982) provide guidance in such purifications.
  • polypeptides of the invention when expressed in insoluble form, for example as aggregates or inclusion bodies, they can be purified by appropriate techniques, including separating the inclusion bodies" from disrupted host cells by centrifugation, solubilizing the inclusion bodies with chaotropic and reducing agents, diluting the sol ⁇ bilized mixture, and lowering the concentration of chaotropic agent and reducing agent so that the polypeptide takes on a biologically active conformation.
  • the latter procedures are disclosed in the following references, which are incorporated by reference: Winkler et al, Biochemistry, 25: 4041-4045 (1986); Winkler et al, Biotechnology, 3: 992-998 (1985); Koths et al, U.S. patent 4,569,790; and European patent applications 86306917.5 and 86306353.3.
  • compositions suitable for administration can be incorporated into pharmaceutical compositions suitable for administration.
  • Such compositions typically comprise a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable carrier is intended to include any and all solvents, dispersion media, coatings, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and absorption delaying agents, and the like, compatible with pharmaceutical administration.
  • the use of such media and agents for pharmaceutically active substances is well known in the art. Except insofar as any conventional media or agent is incompatible with the active compound, use thereof in the compositions is contemplated. Supplementary active compounds can also be incorporated into the compositions.
  • a pharmaceutical composition of the invention is formulated to be compatible with its intended route of administration.
  • routes of administration include parenteral, e.g., intravenous, intradermal, subcutaneous, oral (e.g., inhalation), transdermal (topical), transmucosal, and rectal administration.
  • Solutions or suspensions used for parenteral, intradermal, or subcutaneous application can include the following components: a sterile diluent such as water for injection, saline solution, fixed oils, polyethylene glycols, glycerine, propylene glycol or other synthetic solvents; antibacterial agents such as benzyl alcohol or methyl parabens; antioxidants such as ascorbic acid or sodium bisulfite; chelating agents such as ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid; buffers such as acetates, citrates or phosphates and agents for the adjustment of tonicity such as sodium chloride or dextrose. pH can be adjusted with acids or bases, such as hydrochloric acid or sodium hydroxide.
  • the parenteral preparation can be enclosed in ampoules, disposable syringes or multiple dose vials made of glass or plastic.
  • compositions suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions (where water soluble) or dispersions and sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersion.
  • suitable carriers include physiological saline, bacteriostatic water, Cremophor EL® (BASF, Parsippany, NJ.) or phosphate buffered saline (PBS).
  • the composition must be sterile and should be fluid to the extent that easy syringability exists. It must be stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage and must be preserved against the contaminating action of microorganisms such as bacteria and fungi.
  • the carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (for example, glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof.
  • the proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion and by the use of surfactants.
  • Prevention of the action microorganisms can be achieved by various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, parabens, chlorobutanol, phenol, ascorbic acid, thimerosal, and the like.
  • isotonic agents for example, sugars, polyalcohols such as manitol, sorbitol, sodium chloride in the composition.
  • Prolonged absorption of the injectable compositions can be brought about by including in the composition an agent which delays absorption, for example, aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
  • sterile injectable solutions can be prepared by incorporating the active compound in the required amount in an appropriate solvent with one or a combination of ingredients enumerated above, as required, followed by filtered sterilization.
  • dispersions are prepared by incorporating the active compound into a sterile vehicle which contains a basic dispersion medium and other required ingredients from those enumerated above.
  • the preferred methods of preparation are vacuum drying and freeze-drying which yields a powder of the active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously sterile-filtered solution thereof.
  • Oral compositions generally include an inert diluent or an edible carrier. They can be enclosed in gelatin capsules or compressed into tablets.
  • the active compound can be incorporated with excipients and used in the form of tablets, troches, or capsules.
  • the compounds are delivered in the form of an aerosol spray from pressured container or dispenser which contains a suitable propellant, e.g., a gas such as carbon dioxide, or a nebulizer.
  • a suitable propellant e.g., a gas such as carbon dioxide, or a nebulizer.
  • Systemic administration can also be by transmucosal or transdermal means.
  • penetrants appropriate to the barrier to be permeated are used" in the formulation.
  • Such penetrants are generally known in the art, and include, for example, for transmucosal administration, detergents, bile salts, and fusidic acid derivatives.
  • Transmucosal administration can be accomplished through the use of nasal sprays or suppositories.
  • the active compounds are formulated into ointments, salves, gels, or creams as generally known in the art. Most preferably, active compound is delivered to a subject by intravenous injection.
  • the active compounds are prepared with carriers that will protect the compound against rapid elimination from the body, such as a controlled release formulation, including implants and microencapsulated delivery systems.
  • a controlled release formulation including implants and microencapsulated delivery systems.
  • Biodegradable, biocompatible polymers can be used, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, collagen, polyorthoesters, and polylactic acid. Methods for preparation of such formulations will be apparent to those skilled in the art. The materials can also be obtained commercially from Alza Corporation and Nova Pharmaceuticals, Inc.
  • Liposomal suspensions (including liposomes targeted to infected cells with monoclonal antibodies to viral antigens) can also be used as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. These can be prepared according to methods known to those skilled in the art, for example, as described in U.S.
  • the active compound may be coated on a microchip drug delivery device.
  • a microchip drug delivery device Such devices are useful for controlled delivery of proteinaceous compositions into the bloodstream, cerebrospinal fluid, lymph, or tissue of an individual without subjecting such compositions to digestion or subjecting the individual to injection. Methods of using microchip drug delivery devices are described in US Patents 6123861, 5797898 and US Patent application 20020119176A1, disclosures of which are hereby incorporated in their entireties.
  • Dosage unit form refers to physically discrete units suited as unitary dosages for the subject to be treated; each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active compound calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier.
  • the specification for the dosage unit forms of the invention are dictated by and directly dependent on the unique characteristics of the active compound and the particular therapeutic effect to be achieved, and the limitations inherent in the art of compounding such an active compound for the treatment of individuals.
  • Toxicity and therapeutic efficacy of such compounds can be determined by standard pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures or experimental animals, e.g., for determining the LD50 (the dose lethal to 50% of the population) and the ED50 (the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population).
  • the dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index and it can be expressed as the ratio LD50/ED50.
  • Compounds which exhibit large therapeutic indices are preferred. While compounds that exhibit toxic side effects may be used, care should be taken to design a delivery system that targets such compounds to the site of affected tissue in order to minimize potential damage to uninfected cells and, thereby, reduce side effects.
  • the data obtained from the cell culture assays and animal studies can be used in formulating a range of dosage for use in humans.
  • the dosage of such compounds lies preferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include the ED50 with little or no toxicity.
  • the dosage may vary within this range depending upon the dosage form employed and the route of administration utilized.
  • the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially from cell culture assays.
  • a dose may be formulated in animal models to achieve a given circulating concentration, subsequently used to more accurately determine useful doses in humans. Levels in plasma may be measured, for example, by high performance liquid chromatography.
  • compositions can be included in a container, pack, or dispenser together with instructions for administration.
  • the PAP modulators and PAP-related compositions of the invention can be used in the treatment or prevention of PAP-related disorders.
  • the invention relates to pharmaceutical compositions containing an antibody, antibody fragment, or peptide modulator of PAP, preferably containing a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
  • the carrier or diluent is preferably adapted for oral, intravenous, intramuscular or subcutaneous administration.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions may comprise or consist essentially of any of the PAP-related compositions, PAP modulators, anti-PAP antibodies, or anti-PAP antibody fragments described herein.
  • Example 1 Characterization of PAP levels in early and late pregnancy samples Sera from 2500 pregnant women were collected firstly during the first trimester and secondly during the third trimester of pregnancy.
  • ImI of serum from the early pregnancy stage from each of the 2500 women were pooled, as well as 1 ml of serum from the late pregnancy stage from each of the 2500 women. 500 ml of each of these 2 pools (early and late) were then submitted to the separation process described below.
  • Step 1 HSAJIgG depletion
  • Sepharose fast Flow column (Amersham, Uppsala, Sweden), 5cm ID, 15 cm length; and 100 ml Protein G Sepharose fast Flow column (Amersham, Uppsala, Sweden), 5 cm ID, 5 cm length.
  • Non-retained fraction (350 ml) was frozen until second step.4 runs were performed.
  • Step 2 Gel Filtration / 'Reverse Phase Capture step
  • the three-way valve controlling injection on PLRPS column was switched at a cut-off of 33 mAU (280 nm) to send gel filtration eluate into reverse phase capture column.
  • This cut-off value was established first by SDS-PAGE to provide an estimated range of OD values and then, by evaluating three cut-off values (high, median and low values of OD range).
  • the cut-off value was chosen to maximize the low molecular weight protein obtained, with a low molecular protein proportion of at least 85%.
  • Low molecular weight proteins and peptides were eluted from reverse phase capture PLRPS column by one column volume gradient of 0.1 % TFA, 80% CH3CNin water.
  • Eluate fractions (50 ml) were frozen until next step. 4 runs were performed. At the end of this step, all reverse phase eluates were defrost, pooled (200 ml) and shared in 2 polypropylene containers. Containers were kept at -20 0 C until use for next step.
  • Sample was injected on a 100 ml Source 15S column (Amersharn, Uppsala, Sweden), 35 mm ID, 100 mm length. Column was equilibrated and washed with buffer A. Flow rate was 10 ml/min.
  • each 12 cation exchange fractions was reduced with dithioerythritol (DTE, 30 mM, 3 hours at 37°C) and alkylated with iodoacetamid (120 mM, 0.5 hour 37°C in the dark). The latter reaction was stopped with the addition of DTE (30 mM) followed by acidification (TFA, 0.1%). The fractions were then injected on an Uptispher C8, 5 ⁇ m, 300 angstroms column (biterchim, France), 21 mm ED, 150 mm length. Injection was performed with a 10 ml/min flow rate.
  • AU aliquots are frozen and kept for further use except one per fraction which is dried with a Speed Vac (Savant, Fischer, Geneva) after addition of 500 ⁇ l 10% glycerol in water in each fraction, in order to prevent excess drying. Dried fractions were kept at -20 0 C until use for next step.
  • Speed Vac Speed Vac
  • Dried samples from step 4 were resuspended in 1 ml of solution A (0.03% TFA in water) and injected on a Vydac LCMS C4 column, 3 micrometers, 300 angstroms (Vydac, USA), 4.6 mm ID, 100 mm length. Flow rate was 0.8 ml/min. C4 column was equilibrated and washed with solution A and proteins and peptides were eluted with a biphasic gradient adapted to elution position of the sample in Reverse Phase HPLC Fractionation 1. Intact mass data were acquired using Electrospray Ion Trap Mass spectrometry.
  • 96-well plates (DWP) are recovered and subjected to two sequential concentration steps. Volumes are concentrated from 0.8 ml to about 50 microl per well by drying with a SpeedVac, and then resolubilized to ca. 200 microl and reconcentrated to about 50 microl per well, and stored at +4 C. Proteins are then digested by re-buffering, adding trypsin to the wells, sealing and incubating the plates at 37 C for 12 hours, followed by quenching.
  • Quenching is accomplished by bringing the pH to 2 with formic acid.
  • the concentration of trypsin to be added to the wells was adjusted based on the OD at 280 ran recorded for each particular fraction. This ensures an optimal use of trypsin and a complete digestion of the most concentrated fractions.
  • Automated spotting devices (Bruker MALDI sample prep. Robots) are used to deposit a volume from each well, pre-mixed with a HCCA matrix onto a MALDI plate together with sensitivity and mass calibration standards.
  • MALDI plates are analyzed using a Bruker Reflex DI MALDI MS device. Contents from each well of the 96 well plates are analyzed by LC-ESI-MS-MS on Bruker Esquire 3000 plus ESI Ion-Trap MS devices.
  • a PAP of the invention is synthesized.
  • Peptide fragment intermediates are first synthesized and then assembled into the desired polypeptide.
  • a PAP can initially be prepared in, e.g. 5 fragments, selected to have a Cys residue at the N-terminus of the fragment to be coupled.
  • Fragment 1 is initially coupled to fragment 2 to give a first product, then after preparative HPLC purification, the first product is coupled to fragment 3 to give a second product. After preparative HPLC purification, the second product is coupled to fragment 4 to give a third product. Finally, after preparative HPLC purification, the third product is coupled to fragment 5 to give the desired polypeptide, which is purified and refolded. Thioester formation
  • Fragments 2, 3, 4, and 5 are synthesized on a thioester generating resin, as described above.
  • the following resin is prepared: S-acetylthioglycolic acid pentafluorophenylester is coupled to a Leu-PAM resin under conditions essentially as described by Hackeng et al (1999).
  • the resulting resin is used as a starting resin for peptide chain elongation on a 0.2 mmpl scale after removal of the acetyl protecting group with a 30 min treatment with 10% mercaptoethanol, 10% piperidine in DMF.
  • N-terminal Cys residues of fragments 2 through 5 are protected by coupling a Boc- thioproline (Boc-SPr, i.e. Boc-L-thioproline) to the terminus of the respective chains instead of a Cys having conventional 1ST* or S ⁇ protection, e.g. Brik et al, J. Org. Chem., 65: 3829- 3835 (2000).
  • Boc-SPr Boc-L-thioproline
  • Solid-phase synthesis is performed on a custom-modified 433A peptide synthesizer from Applied Biosystems, using in situ neutralization/2-(lH-benzotriazol-l-yl)-l, 1,1,3,3- tetramethyluronium hexafiuoro-phosphate (HBTU) activation protocols for stepwise Boc chemistry chain elongation, as described by Schnolzer et al, Int. J. Peptide Protein Res., 40: 180-193 (1992).
  • HBTU 1,1,3,3- tetramethyluronium hexafiuoro-phosphate
  • Each synthetic cycle consists of N ⁇ -Boc -removal by a 1 to 2 min treatment with neat TFA, a 1-min DMF flow wash, a 10-min coupling time with 2.0 mmol of preactivated Boc-amino acid in the presence of excess DEEA and a second DMF flow wash.
  • N ⁇ -Boc-amino acids (2 mmol) are preactivated for 3rnin with 1.8mmol HBTU (0.5M in DMF) in the presence of excess DIEA (6mmol).
  • a dichloromethane flow wash is used before and after deprotection using TFA, to prevent possible high temperature (TFA/DMF)-cataIyzed pyrrolidone carboxylic acid formation.
  • Side-chain protected amino acids are Boc-Arg(p-toluenesulfonyl)-OH, Boc-Asn(xanthyl)- OH 5 Boc-Asp(0-cyclohexyl)-OH, Boc-Cys(4-methylbenzyl)-OH, Boc-Glu(O-cyclohexyl)- OH, Boc-His(dmitrophenylbenzyl)-OH, Boc-Lys(2-Cl-Z)-OH, Boc-Ser(benzyl)-OH, Boc- Thr(benzyl)-OH, Boc-Trp(cyclohexylcafbonyl)-OH and Boc-Tyr(2-Br-Z)-OH (Orpagen Pharma,
  • C- terminal Fragment 1 is synthesized on Boc-Leu-0-CH 2 -Pam resin (0.71mmol/g of loaded resin), while for Fragments 2 through 5 machine-assisted synthesis is started on the Boc-Xaa- S-CH 2 -CO-Leu-Pam resin.
  • This resin is obtained by the coupling of S-acetylthioglycolic acid pentafluorophenylester to a Leu-PAM resin under standard conditions. The resulting resin is used as a starting resin for peptide chain elongation on a 0.2 mmol scale after removal of the acetyl protecting group with a 30min treatment with 10% mercaptoethanol, 10% piperidine in DMF.
  • the peptide fragments are deprotected and cleaved from the resin by treatment with anhydrous hydrogen fluoride for lhr at 0 0 C with 5% p-cresol as a scavenger.
  • anhydrous hydrogen fluoride for lhr at 0 0 C with 5% p-cresol as a scavenger.
  • the imidazole side chain 2,4- dinitrophenyl (DNP) protecting groups remain on His residues because the DNP-removal procedure is incompatible with C-terminal thioester groups.
  • DNP is gradually removed by thiols during the ligation reaction, yielding unprotected His.
  • peptide fragments are precipitated with ice-cold diethylether, dissolved in aqueous acetonitrile and lyophilized.
  • the peptide fragments are purified by RP-HPLC with a Cl 8 column from Waters by using linear gradients of buffer B (acetonitile/0.1% trifluoroacetic acid) in buffer A (H 2 O/0.1% trifluoroacetic acid) and UV detection at 214nm.
  • Samples are analyzed by electrospray mass spectrometry (ESMS) using an Esquire instrument (Briicker, Bremen , Germany), or like instrument.
  • ESMS electrospray mass spectrometry
  • the ligation of unprotected fragments is performed as follows: the dry peptides are dissolved in equimolar amounts in 6M guanidine hydrochloride (GuHCl), 0.2M phosphate, pH 7.5 in order to get a final peptide concentration of 1-8 mM at a pH around 7, and 1% benzylmercaptan, 1% thiophenol is added. Usually, the reaction is carried out overnight and is monitored by HPLC and electrospray mass spectrometry. The ligation product is subsequently treated to remove protecting groups still present.
  • GuHCl 6M guanidine hydrochloride
  • Opening of the N-terminal thiazolidine ring further required the addition of solid methoxamine to a 0.5M final concentration at pH3.5 and a further incubation for 2h at 37°C.
  • a 10-fold excess of Tris(2-carboxyethyl)phosphine is added before preparative HPLC purification. Fractions containing the polypeptide chain are identified by ESMS, pooled and lyophilized.
  • the ligation of fragments 4 and 5 is performed at pH7.0 in 6 M GuHCl.
  • the concentration of each reactant is 8mM, and 1 % benzylmercaptan and 1 % thiophenol were added to create a reducing environment and to facilitate the ligation reaction.
  • An almost quantitative ligation reaction is observed after overnight stirring at 37°C.
  • CH 3 -O-NH 2 -HCl is added to the solution to get a 0.5M final concentration, and the pH adjusted to 3.5 in order to open the N-terminal thiazolidine ring.
  • After 2h incubation at 37 0 C 3 ESMS is used to confirm the completion of the reaction.
  • the reaction mixture is subsequently treated with a 10-fold excess of Tris(2-carboxyethylphosphine) over the peptide fragment and after 15min, the ligation product is purified using the preparative HPLC (e.g., C4, 20-60% CH 3 CN, 0.5% per min), lyophilized, and stored at -20 0 C.
  • the preparative HPLC e.g., C4, 20-60% CH 3 CN, 0.5% per min
  • Example 3 Preparation of PAP antibody compositions Substantially pure PAP or a portion thereof is obtained. The concentration of protein in the final preparation is adjusted, for example, by concentration on an Amicon filter device, to the level of a few micrograms per ml. Monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies to the protein are then prepared as described in the sections titled "Monoclonal antibodies” and "Polyclonal antibodies.” Briefly, to produce an anti-PAP monoclonal antibody, a mouse is repetitively inoculated with a few micrograms of the PAP or a portion thereof over a period of a few weeks. The mouse is then sacrificed, and the antibody producing cells of the spleen isolated.
  • the spleen cells are fused by means of polyethylene glycol with mouse myeloma cells, and the excess unfused cells destroyed by growth of the system on selective media comprising aminopterin (HAT media).
  • HAT media aminopterin
  • the successfully fused cells are diluted and aliquots of the dilution placed in wells of a microliter plate where growth of the culture is continued.
  • Antibody-producing clones are identified by detection of antibody in the supernatant fluid of the wells by immunoassay procedures, such as ELISA 3 as originally described by Engvall, E., Meth. Enzymol. 70: 419 (1980), the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • Selected positive clones can be expanded and their monoclonal antibody product harvested for use. Detailed procedures for monoclonal antibody production are described in Davis, L. et al. Basic Methods in Molecular Biology Elsevier, New York. Section 21 -2, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein
  • polyclonal antiserum containing antibodies to heterogeneous epitopes in the PAP or a portion thereof are prepared by immunizing a mouse with the PAP or a portion thereof, which can be unmodified or modified to enhance immunogeniciry.
  • Any suitable norihuman animal, preferably a non- human mammal, may be selected including rat, rabbit, goat, or horse.
  • Antibody preparations prepared according to either the monoclonal or the polyclonal protocol are useful in quantitative immunoassays which determine concentrations of PAP in biological samples; or they are also used semi-quantitatively or qualitatively to identify the presence of antigen in a biological sample.
  • the antibodies may also be used in therapeutic compositions for killing cells expressing the protein or reducing the levels of the protein in the body.

Abstract

The invention discloses secreted polypeptides involved in pregnancy. The invention also provides methods of using compositions including the polypeptides and polynucleotides encoding them in detection assays, and for drug development.

Description

SECRETED POLYPEPTIDE SPECIES DIFFERENTIALLY EXPRESSED DURING
PREGNANCY
FIELD OF THE INVENTION The invention relates to secreted polypeptide species involved in pregnancy, to isolated polynucleotides encoding such polypeptides, to polymorphic variants thereof, and to the use of said nucleic acids and polypeptides or compositions thereof in detection assays, and for drug development.
BACKGROUND
During pregnancy, dramatic changes occur at the molecular level in the body of the mother: many hormones, growth factors, immunomodulatory proteins are up and/or down- regulated to permit the proper development of the fetus. A significant number of these proteins circulate into the blood of the mother, and many of them have potential therapeutic applications in areas such as cancer (growth regulating proteins), graft transplant and immune diseases (immunomodulatory proteins), for example. Additional details on pregnancy-related proteins and their applications can for example be found in US patent 5,559,097 (Use of a Pregnancy Specific Protein as an Immunosuppressive), in Chiang et al., AmJ.Physiol (1990) 258, E98-102 (Growth-promoting properties of the internal milieu of pregnant and lactating rats), or in Morton et al., Immunol. Cell Biol. (2000) 78, 603-607 (Production of a recombinant form of early pregnancy factor that can prolong allogeneic skin graft survival time in rats).
The invention provides specific serum polypeptides whose concentrations are down- or up-regulated in the serum from women during the course of their pregnancies. By providing the actual polypeptide species, differences in mRNA processing and splicing, translation rate, mRNA stability, and posttranslational modifications such as proteolytic processing, phosphorylation, glycosylation, and amidation are revealed. The polypeptides of the invention are thus described as "Pregnancy-Associated Polypeptides" or PAPs. These polypeptide sequences are described as PAP 1-33 and comprise the tryptic sequences listed in Table 3. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
The present invention is directed to compositions related to secreted polypeptides whose concentration is specifically altered in the serum of pregnant women during the course of pregnancy. These polypeptide species are designated herein "Pregnancy-Associated Polypeptides", or PAPs. Such Pregnancy-Associated Polypeptides comprise an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of PAPs 1-33. Preferred PAPs comprise a polypeptide selected from the group consisting of PAPs 1, 6-17, and 30-31. Even more preferred PAPs comprise a polypeptide selected from the group consisting of PAPs 6-9, and 30-31. Compositions include PAP precursors, antibodies specific for PAPs, including monoclonal antibodies and other binding compositions derived therefrom. Further included are methods of making and using these compositions. Precursors of the invention include unmodified precursors, proteolytic precursors, and intermediates resulting from alternative proteolytic sites in the amino acid sequences of PAPs 1-33.
A preferred embodiment of the invention includes PAPs having a posttranslational modification, such as a phosphorylation, glycosylation, acetylation, amidation, or a C-, N- or O- linked carbohydrate group. Additionally preferred are PAPs with intra- or inter-molecular interactions, e.g., disulfide and hydrogen bonds that result in higher order structures. Also preferred are PAPs that result from differential mRNA processing or splicing. Preferably, the PAPs represent posttranslationally modified species, structural variants, or splice variants that are altered in serum from individuals with PAP-related disorder.
In another aspect, the invention includes PAPs comprising a sequence which is at least 75 percent identical to a sequence selected from the group consisting of PAPs 1-33. Preferably, the invention includes polypeptides comprising at least 80 percent, and more preferably at least 85 percent, and still more preferably at least 90 percent, identity with any one of the sequences selected from PAPs 1-33. Most preferably, the invention includes polypeptides comprising a sequence at least 95 percent identical to a sequence selected from the group consisting of PAPs 1-33.
In another aspect, the invention includes natural variants of PAPs having a frequency in a selected population of at least two percent. More preferably, such natural variant has a frequency in a selected population of at least five percent, and still more preferably, at least ten percent. Most preferably, such natural variant has a frequency in a selected population of at least twenty percent. The selected population may be any recognized population of study in the field of population genetics. Preferably, the selected population is Caucasian, Negroid, or Asian. Mote preferably, the selected population is French, German, English, Spanish, Swiss, Japanese, Chinese, Irish, Korean, Singaporean, Icelandic, North American, Israeli, Arab, Turkish, Greek, Italian, Polish, Pacific Islander, Finnish, Norwegian, Swedish, Estonian, Austrian, or Indian. More preferably, the selected population is Icelandic, Saami, Finnish, French of Caucasian ancestry, Swiss, Singaporean of Chinese ancestry, Korean, Japanese, Quebecian, North American Pima Indians, Pennsylvanian Amish and Amish Mennonite, Newfoundlander, or Polynesian.
A preferred aspect of the invention provides a composition comprising an isolated PAP, i.e., a PAP free from proteins or protein, isoforms having a significantly different isoelectric point or a significantly different apparent molecular weight from the PAP. The isoelectric point and molecular weight of a PAP may be indicated by affinity and size-based separation chromatography, 2-dimensional gel analysis, and mass spectrometry.
In a preferred aspect, the invention provides particular polypeptide species that comprise a sequence selected from the group consisting of the amino acid sequences listed in Table 3 (PAPs 1-33). Preferably, PAPs 1-33 comprise additional contiguous amino acids from the sequences of the corresponding polypeptide entries in public databases, as set forth in Table 1. Preferred species are polypeptides that i) comprise an amino acid sequence of any one of PAPs 1-33; ii) appear in serum from pregnant women, with an altered level during the course of pregnancy; and iii) comprise additional amino acids from the sequences of the corresponding polypeptide entries set forth in Table 1.
Ih an additional aspect, the invention includes modified PAPs. Such modifications include protecting/blocking groups, linkage to an antibody molecule or other cellular ligand, and detectable labels, such as an enzymatic, fluorescent, isotopic or affinity label to allow for detection and isolation of the protein. Chemical modifications may be carried out by known techniques, including but not limited to, specific chemical cleavage by cyanogen bromide, trypsin, chymotrypsin, papain, V8 protease, NaBH4, acetylation, formylation, oxidation, reduction, or metabolic synthesis in the presence of tunicamycin.
Also provided by the invention are chemically modified derivatives of the polypeptides of the invention which may provide additional advantages such as increased solubility, stability and circulating time of the polypeptide, or decreased immunogeniciry (e.g., water soluble polymers such as polyethylene glycol, ethylene glycol/propylene glycol copolymers, carboxymethylcellulose, dextran, polyvinyl alcohol). The PAPs are modified at random positions within the molecule, or at predetermined positions within the molecule and may include one, two, three or more attached chemical moieties.
In another embodiment, the invention provides a method of identifying a modulator of at least one PAP biological activity comprising the steps of: i) contacting a test modulator of a PAP biological activity with the polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of the amino acid sequences listed in Table 3 (PAPs 1-33); ii) detecting the level of said PAP biological activity; and iii) comparing the level of said PAP biological activity to that of a control sample lacking said test modulator. Where the difference in the level of PAP protein biological activity is a decrease, the test modulator is an inhibitor of at least one PAP biological activity. Where the difference in the level of PAP biological activity is an increase, the test substance is an activator of at least one PAP biological activity.
In another aspect, the invention includes polynucleotides encoding a PAP of the invention, polynucleotides encoding a polypeptide having an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of the amino acid sequences listed in Table 3 (PAPs 1-33), antisense oligonucleotides complementary to such sequences, oligonucleotides complementary to PAP gene sequences for diagnostic and analytical assays (e.g., PCR, hybridization-based techniques), and vectors for expressing PAPs.
In another aspect, the invention provides a vector comprising DNA encoding a PAP. The invention also includes host cells and transgenic nonhuman animals comprising such a vector. There is also provided a method of making a PAP or PAP precursor. One preferred method comprises the steps of (a) providing a host cell containing an expression vector as disclosed above; (b) culturing the host cell under conditions whereby the DNA segment is expressed; and (c) recovering the protein encoded by the DNA segment. Another preferred method comprises the steps of: (a) providing a host cell capable of expressing a PAP; (b) culturing said host cell under conditions that allow expression of said PAP; and (c) recovering said PAP. Within one embodiment the expression vector further comprises a secretory signal sequence operably linked to the DNA segment, the cell secretes the protein into a culture medium, and the protein is recovered from the medium. An especially preferred method of making a PAP includes chemical synthesis using standard.peptide. synthesis techniques, as described in the section titled "Chemical Manufacture of PAP Compositions" and in Example 2. In another aspect, the invention includes isolated antibodies specific for any of the polypeptides, peptide fragments, or peptides described above. Preferably, the antibodies of the invention are monoclonal antibodies. Further preferred are antibodies that bind to a PAP exclusively, that is, antibodies that do not recognize other polypeptides with high affinity. Anti-PAP antibodies have purification, diagnostic and prognostic applications. Preferred anti-PAP antibodies for purification and diagnosis are attached to a label group. Diagnostic methods include, but are not limited to, those that employ antibodies or antibody-derived compositions specific for a PAP antigen. Diagnostic methods for detecting PAPs in specific tissue samples and biological fluids (preferably serum), and for detecting levels of expression of PAPs in tissues, also form part of the invention. Compositions comprising one or more antibodies described above, together with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier are also within the scope of the invention, for example, for in vivo diagnosis and drug screening methods.
The invention further includes methods of using PAP-modulating compositions to prevent or treat disorders associated with aberrant expression or processing of PAPs 1-33 in an individual. A preferred embodiment of the invention is a method of preventing or treating a PAP-related disorder in an individual comprising the steps of: determining that an individual suffers from or is at risk of a PAP-related disorder and introducing a PAP- modulating composition to said individual.
Further aspects of the invention are also described in the specification and in the claims.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE Pi[VENTION The present invention described in detail below provides methods, compositions, and kits useful for screening PAP modulators; and for drug development. The invention also encompasses the administration of therapeutic compositions to a mammalian individual to treat or prevent PAP-related disorders. The mammalian individual may be a non-human mammal, but is preferably human, more preferably a human adult.
Definitions
As used herein, the term "nucleic acids" and "nucleic acid molecule" is intended to include DNA molecules (e.g., cDNA or genomic DNA) and RNA molecules (e.g., mENA) and analogs of the DNA or RNA generated using nucleotide analogs. The nucleic acid molecule can be single-stranded or double-stranded, but preferably is double-stranded DNA. Throughout the present specification, the expression "nucleotide sequence" may be employed to designate indifferently a polynucleotide or a nucleic acid. More precisely, the expression "nucleotide sequence" encompasses the nucleic material itself and is thus not restricted to the sequence information (i.e. the succession of letters chosen among the four base letters) that biochemically characterizes a specific DNA or RNA molecule. Also, used interchangeably herein are terms "nucleic acids", "oligonucleotides", and "polynucleotides".
An "isolated" nucleic acid molecule is one which is separated from other nucleic acid molecules which are present in the natural source of the nucleic acid. Preferably, an "isolated" nucleic acid is free of sequences which naturally flank the nucleic acid (i.e., sequences located at the 5' and 31 ends of the nucleic acid) in the genomic DNA of the organism from which the nucleic acid is derived. For example, in various embodiments, the isolated PAP nucleic acid molecule can contain less than about 5 kb, 4 kb, 3 kb, 2 kb, 1 kb, 0.5 kb or 0.1 kb of nucleotide sequences which naturally flank the nucleic acid molecule in genomic DNA of the cell from which the nucleic acid is derived. Moreover, an "isolated" nucleic acid molecule, such as a cDNA molecule, can be substantially free of other cellular material, or culture medium when produced by recombinant techniques, or substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals when chemically synthesized. Using all or a portion of the nucleic acid as a hybridization probe, PAP nucleic acid molecules can be isolated using standard hybridization and cloning techniques (e.g., as described in Sambrook, J., Fritsh, E. F., and Maniatis, T. Molecular Cloning. A Laboratory Manual.2nd, ed., Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N. Y., 1989). As used herein, the term "hybridizes to" is intended to describe conditions for moderate stringency or high stringency hybridization, preferably where the hybridization and washing conditions permit nucleotide sequences at least 60% homologous to each other to remain hybridized to each other. Preferably, the conditions are such that sequences at least about 70%, more preferably at least about 80%, even more preferably at least about 85%, 90%, 95% or 98% homologous to each other typically remain hybridizedio each other. Stringent conditions are known to those skilled in the art and can be found in Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, N.Y. (1989), 6.3.1-6.3.6. In a preferred, non-limiting example, stringent hybridization conditions for nucleic acid interactions are as follows: the hybridization step is realized at 65°C in the presence of 6 x SSC buffer, 5 x Denhardt's solution, 0,5% SDS and lOOμg/ml of salmon sperm DNA. The hybridization step is followed by four washing steps:
- two washings during 5 min, preferably at 65°C in a 2 x SSC and 0.1%SDS buffer; - one washing during 30 min, preferably at 65°C in a 2 x SSC and 0.1% SDS buffer,
- one washing during 10 min, preferably at 650C in a 0.1 x SSC and 0.1%SDS buffer, these hybridization conditions being suitable for a nucleic acid molecule of about 20 nucleotides in length. It will be appreciated that the hybridization conditions described above are to be adapted according to the length of the desired nucleic acid, following techniques well known to the one skilled in the art, for example be adapted according to the teachings disclosed in Hames B.D. and Higgins SJ. (1985) Nucleic Acid Hybridization: A Practical Approach. Hames and Higgins Ed., IRL Press, Oxford; and Current Protocols in Molecular Biology.
'Tercent homology" is used herein to refer to both nucleic acid sequences and amino acid sequences. Amino acid or nucleic acid "identity" is equivalent to amino acid or nucleic acid "homology". To determine the percent homology of two amino acid sequences or of two nucleic acids, the sequences are aligned for optimal comparison purposes (e.g., gaps can be introduced in the sequence of a first amino acid or nucleic acid sequence for optimal alignment with a second amino or nucleic acid sequence and non-homologous sequences can be disregarded for comparison purposes). The length of a reference sequence aligned for comparison purposes is at least 30%, preferably at least 40%, more preferably at least 50%, even more preferably at least 60%, and even more preferably at least 70%, 80%, 90% or 95% of the length of the reference sequence. The amino acid residues or nucleotides at corresponding amino acid positions or nucleotide positions are then compared.JWhen a position in the first sequence is occupied by the same amino acid residue or nucleotide as the corresponding position in the second sequence, then the molecules are homologous at that position. The percent homology between the two sequences is a function of the number of identical positions shared by the sequences (i.e., % homology=# of identical positions/total # of positions 100). The comparison of sequences and determination of percent homology between two sequences can be accomplished using a mathematical algorithm. A preferred, non-limiting example of a mathematical algorithm utilized for the comparison of sequences is the algorithm of Karlin and Altschul (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 87:2264-68, modified as in Karlin and Altschul (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 90:5873-77, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties. Such an algorithm is incorporated into the NBLAST and XBLAST programs (version 2.0) of Altschul, et al. (1990) J. MoI. Biol. 215:403-10. BLAST nucleotide searches can be performed with the NBLAST program, score=100, wordlength=12 to obtain nucleotide sequences homologous to the sequences of the invention. BLAST protein searches can be performed with the XBLAST program, score=50, wordlength=3 to obtain amino acid sequences homologous to the polypeptide sequences of the invention. To obtain gapped alignments for comparison purposes, Gapped BLAST can be utilized as described in Altschul et al., (1997) Nucleic Acids Research 25(17):3389-3402. When utilizing BLAST and Gapped BLAST programs, the default parameters of the respective programs (e.g., XBLAST and NBLAST) can be used. See http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties. Another preferred, non-limiting example of a mathematical algorithm utilized for the comparison of sequences is the algorithm of Myers and Miller, CABIOS (1989), the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties. Such an algorithm is incorporated into the ALIGN program (version 2.0) which is part of the GCG sequence alignment software package. When utilizing the ALIGN program for comparing amino acid sequences, a PAM120 weight residue table, a gap length penalty of 12, and a gap penalty of 4 can be used. The term "polypeptide" refers to a polymer of amino acids without regard to the length of the polymer, thus, peptides, oligopeptides, and proteins are included within the definition of polypeptide. This term also does not specify or exclude post-translational modifications of polypeptides, for example, polypeptides which include the covalent .attachment of glycosyl, acetyl, phosphate, amide, lipid, carboxyl, acyl, or carbohydrate groups are expressly encompassed by the term polypeptide. Also included within the definition are polypeptides which contain one or more analogs of an amino acid (including, for example, non-naturally occurring amino acids, amino acids which only occur naturally in an unrelated biological system, modified amino acids from mammalian systems etc.), polypeptides with substituted linkages, as well as other modifications known in the art, both naturally occurring and non-naturally occurring.
The term "protein" as used herein may be used synonymously with the term "polypeptide" or may refer to, in addition, a complex of two or more polypeptides which may be linked by bonds other than peptide bonds, for example, such polypeptides making up the protein may be linked by disulfide bonds. The term "protein" may also comprehend a family of polypeptides having identical amino acid sequences but different post-translational modifications, particularly as may be added when such proteins are expressed in eukaryotic hosts. An "isolated" or "purified" protein or biologically active portion thereof is substantially free of cellular material or other contaminating proteins from the cell or tissue source from which it is derived, or substantially free from chemical precursors or other chemicals when chemically synthesized. The language "substantially free of cellular material" includes preparations_of-a protein according to the invention in which the protein is separated from cellular components of the cells from which it is isolated or recombinantly produced. In one embodiment, the language "substantially free of cellular material" includes preparations of a protein according to the invention having less than about 30% (by dry weight) of protein other than the protein of the invention (also referred to herein as a "contaminating protein"), more preferably less than about 20% of protein other than the protein according to the invention, still more preferably less than about 10% of protein other than the protein according to the invention, and most preferably less than about 5% of protein other than the protein according to the invention. When the protein according to the invention or biologically active portion thereof is recombinantly produced, it is also preferably substantially free of culture medium, i.e., culture medium represents less than about 20%, more preferably less than about 10%, and most preferably less than about 5% of the volume of the protein preparation.
The language "substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals" includes preparations of a protein of the invention in which the protein is separated from chemical precursors or other chemicals which are involvedin the synthesis of the protein. In one embodiment, the language "substantially free of chemical precursors or other chemicals" includes preparations of a protein of the invention having less than about 30% (by dry weight) of chemical precursors or non-protein chemicals, more preferably less than about 20% chemical precursors or non-protein chemicals, still more preferably less than about 10% chemical precursors or non-protein chemicals, and most preferably less than about 5% chemical precursors or non-protein chemicals.
The term "recombinant polypeptide" is used herein to refer to polypeptides that have been artificially designed and which comprise at least two polypeptide sequences that are not found as contiguous polypeptide sequences in their initial natural environment, or to refer to polypeptides which have been expressed from a recombinant polynucleotide.
The term "Pregnancy-Associated Polypeptide" or "PAP" refers to a polypeptide comprising the sequence described by any one of the peptide sequences listed in Table 3. Each peptide listed in Table 3 corresponds to one of PAPs 1-33, as described in Table 3. Thus, the polypeptide sequences of PAPs 1-33 comprise the amino acid sequences of the corresponding peptide(s) listed in Table 3. Preferably PAPs 1-33 comprise additional contiguous amino acids from the sequences of the corresponding polypeptide entries in public databases as set forth in Table 1 Such polypeptide may be post-translationally modified as described herein. PAPs may also contain other structural or chemical modifications such as disulfide linkages or amino acid side chain interactions such as hydrogen and amide bonds that result in complex secondary or tertiary structures. PAPs also include mutant polypeptides, such as deletion, addition, swap, or truncation mutants, fusion polypeptides comprising such polypeptides, and polypeptide fragments of at least three, but preferably 8, 10, 12, 15, or 21 contiguous amino acids of the sequence of PAPs 1-33. Further included are PAP proteolytic precursors and intermediates of the sequence selected from the group consisting of PAPs 1-33. The invention embodies polypeptides encoded by the nucleic acid sequences of PAP genes or PAP mKNA species, preferably human PAP genes and mRNA species, including isolated PAPs consisting of, consisting essentially of, or comprising the sequence of PAPs 1-33. Preferred PAPs retain at least one biological activity of PAPs 1-33.
The term "biological activity", or "PAP biological activity", as used herein refers to any single function carried out by a PAP. These include but are not limited to: (1) having altered concentration levels in the bloodstream of women during the course of their pregnancy; (3) antigenicity, or the ability to bind an anti-PAP specific antibody; (4) immunogenicity, or the ability to generate an anti-PAP specific antibody; (5) forming intermolecular amino acid side chain interactions such as hydrogen, amide, or preferably disulfide links; (6) being posttranslationally modified, especially by specific proteolysis and arafdation; (7) interaction with a PAP target molecule; (8) promoting growth; (9) improving allogeneic-graft-survival; and (10) having immunomodulatory activities.
As used herein, a 'TAP modulator" is a molecule (e.g., polynucleotide, polypeptide, small molecule, or antibody) that is capable of modulating (i.e., increasing or decreasing) either the expression or the biological activity of the PAPs of the invention. A PAP modulator that enhances PAP expression or activity is described as a PAP activator or agonist. Conversely, a PAP modulator that represses PAP expression or activity is described as a PAP inhibitor or antagonist. Preferably, PAP modulators increase/ decrease the expression or activity by at least 5, 10, or 20%. PAP inhibitors include anti-PAP antibodies, fragments thereof, antisense polynucleotides, and molecules characterized by screening assays, as described herein. PAP agonists include polynucleotide expression vectors and molecules characterized by screening assays as described herein.
A "PAP-related disorder" or "PAP-related disease" describes a disorder or disease that can be characterized by an altered expression or activity of a Pregnancy-Associated Polypeptide. Examples of such disorders include cancer, immune and autoimmune diseases, as well as medical conditions such as those involving graft transplants. Preferably, the likelihood that an individual will develop or already has such a disorder is indicated by altered serum levels of at least one PAP.
Another aspect of the invention pertains to anti-PAP antibodies. The term "antibody" as used herein refers to immunoglobulin molecules and immunologically active portions of immunoglobulin molecules, i.e., molecules that contain an antigen-binding site which specifically binds (itnmunoreacts with) an antigen, such as a PAP, or a biologically active fragment or homologue thereof. Preferred antibodies bind to a PAP exclusively and do not recognize other polypeptides with high affinity. Examples of immunologically active portions of immunoglobulin molecules include F(ab) and F(ab")2 fragments which can be generated by treating the antibody with an enzyme such as pepsin. The invention provides polyclonal and monoclonal antibodies that bind a PAP, or a biologically active fragment or homologue thereof. The term "monoclonal antibody" or "monoclonal antibody composition", as used herein, refers to a population of antibody molecules that contain only one species of an antigen-binding site capable of immunoreacting with a particular epitope of a PAP. A monoclonal antibody composition thus typically displays a single binding affinity for a particular PAP with which it immunoreacts. Preferred PAP antibodies are attached to a label group.
As used herein, a "label group" is any compound that, when attached to a polynucleotide or polypeptide (including antibodies), allows for detection or purification of • said polynucleotide or polypeptide. Label groups may be detected or purified directly or indirectly by a secondary compound, including an antibody specific for said label group.
32 35 3 125
Useful label groups include radioisotopes (e.g., P, S, H5 T), fluorescent compounds (e.g., 5-bromodesoxyuridin, umbelliferone, fluorescein, fluorescein isothiocyanate, rhodamine, dichlorotriazinylamine fluorescein, dansyl chloride, phycoerythrin acetylaminofluorene, digoxigenin), luminescent compounds (e.g., luminol, GFP, luciferin, aequorin), enzymes or enzyme co-factor detectable labels (e.g., peroxidase, luciferase, alkaline phosphatase, galactosidase, or acetylcholinesterase), or compounds that are recognized by a secondary factor such as strepavidin, GST, or biotin. Preferably, a label group is attached to a polynucleotide or polypeptide in such a way as to not interfere with the biological activity of the polynucleotide or polypeptide.
Radioisotopes may be detected by direct-counting of radioemission, film exposure, or by scintillation counting, for example. Enzymatic labels may be detected by determination of conversion of an appropriate substrate to product, usually causing a fluorescent reaction. Fluorescent and luminescent compounds and reactions may be detected by, e.g., radioemission, fluorescent microscopy, fluorescent activated cell sorting, or a luminometer.
As used herein with respect to antibodies, an antibody is said to "selectively bind" or "specifically bind" to a target if the antibody recognizes and binds the target of interest but does not substantially recognize and bind other molecules in a sample, e.g., a biological sample, which includes the target of interest.
As used herein, the term "vector" refers to a nucleic acid molecule capable of transporting another nucleic acid to which it has been linked. One type of vector is a "plasmid", which refers to a circular double stranded DNA loop into which additional DNA segments can be ligated. Another type of vector is a viral vector, wherein additional DNA segments can be ligated into the viral genome. Certain vectors are capable of autonomous replication in a host cell into which they are introduced (e.g., bacterial vectors having a bacterial origin of replication and episomal mammalian vectors). Other vectors (e.g., non- episomal mammalian vectors) are integrated into the genome of a host cell upon introduction into the host cell, and thereby are replicated along with the host genome. Moreover, certain vectors are capable of directing the expression of genes to which they are operatively linked. Such vectors are referred to herein as "expression vectors". In general, expression vectors of utility in recombinant DNA techniques are often in the form of plasmids. In the present specification, "plasmid" and "vector" can be used interchangeably as the plasmid is the-most commonly used form of vector. However, the invention is intended to include such other forms of expression vectors, such as viral vectors (e.g., replication defective retroviruses, adenoviruses and adeno-associated viruses), which serve equivalent functions. As used herein, "effective amount" describes the amount of an agent, preferably a PAP or PAP modulator of the invention, sufficient to have a desired effect. For example, an anti-PAP-related disorders effective amount is the amount of an agent required to reduce a symptom of PAP-related disorders in an individual by at least 1, 2, 5, 10, 15, or preferably 25%. The term may also describe the amount of an agent required to ameliorate a PAP- related disorders-caused symptom in an individual. The effective amount for a particular patient may vary depending on such factors as the diagnostic method of the symptom being measured, the state of the condition being treated, the overall health of the patient, method of administration, and the severity of side-effects.
PAPs of the invention
The Pregnancy-Associated Polypeptides (PAPs) of the invention are described PAPs 1-33, and comprise an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of the peptide sequences listed in Table 3. PAPs 1-33 are secreted and circulate in blood serum, but appear at an increasing or a decreasing levels, as detailed in Table 1, in the serum of women during the course of their pregnancy. PAPs are useful for drug design and in therapeutic strategies for prevention and treatment of PAP-related disorders. Preferred PAPs comprise a polypeptide selected from the group consisting of PAP 18 and PAPs 23-29.
Further included PAPs are polypeptides comprising an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of the peptide sequences listed in Table 3. Preferably, PAPs 1-33 comprise additional contiguous amino acids from the sequences of the corresponding polypeptide entries set forth in Table 1. Such additional amino acids are fused in frame with the selected PAP sequence to form contiguous amino acid sequence.
The terms "Pregnancy-Associated Polypeptides" and "PAPs" are used herein to embrace any and all of the peptides, polypeptides and proteins of the present invention. Also forming part of the invention are polypeptides encoded by the polynucleotides of the invention, as well as fusion polypeptides comprising such polypeptides. The invention embodies PAPs from humans, including isolated or purified PAPs consisting of, or comprising an amino* acid sequence selected from the group consisting of the peptide sequences set forth in Table 3. Further included are unmodified precursors, proteolytic precursors and intermediates of the sequence selected from the group consisting of the peptide sequences set forth in Table 3. The present invention embodies isolated, purified, and recombinant polypeptides comprising a contiguous span of at least 3 amino acids, preferably at least 8 to 10 amino acids, with a PAP biological activity. In preferred embodiments the contiguous stretch of amino acids comprises the site of a mutation or functional mutation, including a deletion, addition, swap or truncation of the amino acids in the PAP sequence. The invention also concerns the polypeptide encoded by the PAP nucleotide sequences of the invention, or a complementary sequence thereof or a fragment thereof.
One aspect of the invention pertains to isolated PAPs, and biologically active portions thereof, as well-as-polypeptide fragments suitable for use as immunogens to raise anti-PAP antibodies. In one embodiment, native PAP peptides can be isolated from serum, cells or tissue sources by an appropriate purification scheme using standard protein purification techniques. In another embodiment, PAPs are produced by recombinant DNA techniques. Alternative to recombinant expression, a PAP can be synthesized chemically using peptide synthesis techniques, as described in the section titled "Chemical Manufacture of PAP compositions" and in Example 2.
Typically, biologically active portions comprise a domain or motif with at least one activity of a PAP. A biologically active PAP may, for example, comprise at least 1 , 2, 3, or 5 amino acid changes from the sequence selected from the group consisting of the peptide sequences listed in Table 3, or comprise at least 1%, 2%, 3%, 5%, 8%, 10% or 15% change in amino acids from said sequence.
Characterization of PAPs
The polypeptides of the invention, PAPs 1-33, are described in Tables 1 and 3. For each PAP, Table 1 provides: • an accession number in a public database, corresponding to the related polypeptide sequence;
• the Protein Type; and
• the amino acid positions defining the observed polypeptide with respect to the polypeptide in the public database. • the direction of variation of the protein: E>L indicates that the protein is more abundant during the first trimester of pregnancy than during the third trimester of pregnancy, L>E indicates that the protein is more abundant during the third trimester of pregnancy than during the first trimester of pregnancy, E indicates that the protein was only detected in the samples from the first trimester of pregnancy, and D indicates that the protein was only detected in the samples from the third trimester of pregnancy. For Protein Type, "Parent" denotes a polypeptide sequence whose length is described by the positions listed in the column Amino Acids, but with no other known distinctions from the sequence in the public database. "Fragment" denotes a particular, newly defined, fragment, spanning the positions described in the Amino Acids column..
Most of the accession numbers listed in Table 1 are references for the the SwissPROT/TrEMBL databases, both of which are publicly available, for example at: http://www.expasy.ch. PAP 10, however, is defined as the sequence identified in International PCT publication WO01/53312 by SEQ ID NO 2232. Finally, the accession number for PAP 18 represents a protein entry available from NCBI, at http ://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/
TcWe 1
Figure imgf000016_0001
Figure imgf000017_0001
The polypeptides of the invention, PAPs, are defined by the tryptic peptides listed in Table 3. These peptides were isolated from the serum of pregnant women and they display an altered concentration level during the course of pregnancy. They were characterized according to the-MicroProt® method, as described in Example 1.
The PAPs of the invention are all less than or around 2OkD in molecular weight, as the serum sample is first separated based on molecular weight. Higher molecular weight polypeptide species are separated and characterized by a different method. As described in Example 1, the serum sample is subjected to a number of chromatography separations. Details about these chromatography methods are given in Example 1.
The first separation is on a cation exchange chromatography column, which is eluted with increasing salt concentration. Twelve fractions are collected. The CEX column in Table 3 lists which fraction contained each tryptic peptide. Table 2 provides the NaCl concentration at which each fraction"was-eluted,-according to the protocol described in Step 3 of Example 1 herein. Separation by cation exchange provides an indication of the overall positive charge of a polypeptide species. Cation exchange is followed by a reverse phase HPLC separation. The RPl column in Table 3 lists in which of the 15 fractions each tryptic peptide eluted. Table 2 provides the elution conditions (%B), according to the protocol described in Step 4 of Example 1. Separation by reverse phase provides an indication of the overall hydrophobicity of a polypeptide species. The last column lists, after each tryptic sequence, within parentheses, the RP2 fraction number where that tryptic sequence was observed, for the corresponding proteome, in the corresponding CEX and RPl fractions (second reverse phase HPLC separation, see Example 1). Next to each RP2 fraction number, in the last column, Olav scores are indicated within brackets; these scores reflect, among other things, the strength of the experimental MS-MS signal over noise as detected by the MS-MS data identification software, and thus indicate the protein concentration in the sample.
Table 2
NaCI
CEX Fraction Concentration RP1 Fraction Number (mM) Number % B
1-3 75
4-6 100 1 12.5
7-8 175
9-10 225 2 25.96
11 275
12 1000 3 29.8
4 33.65
5 37.5
6 41.34
7 45.2
8 49.02
9 52.87
10 56.71
11 60.56
12 64.4
13 69
14 72.1
15 87.5 Where applicable, the ratio of protein level during the first trimester samples ("E") versus the protein level during the last trimester samples ("L") is calculated by two methods. The first method calculates the E / L ratio by the number of fractions from each sample containing the PAP. For example, for PAP 7, this calculation is 6 / 1 (see Table 3), indicating a 6-fold increase in PAP 7 during the first trimester of pregnancy when compared to the third trimester of pregnancy. Alternatively, and more accurately, the Olav scores obtained for each peptide in the mass spectrometry data analysis software are used to give a weighted ratio. For PAP 7, the calculation is 1775.4 / 347.4, resulting in 5.1. Thus, PAP 7 is present at a 4.1-fold higher level during theJirst-trimester of pregnancy when compared to the third trimester of pregnancy..
PAPs 1-5 were detected only during the first trimester of pregnancy. The MicroProt® process is able to detect very low abundance proteins with a serum concentration in the range of a few hundreds of pM. Thus, these polypeptides are present at vanishingly low levels, if at all, during third trimester of pregnancy. Conversely, PAP 29 was detected only during the third trimester of pregnancy. The MicroProt® process is able to detect very low abundance proteins with a serum concentration in the range of a few hundreds of pM. Thus, this polypeptide is present at vanishingly low levels, if at all, during first trimester of pregnancy.
Table 3
Figure imgf000019_0001
Figure imgf000020_0001
Figure imgf000021_0001
Figure imgf000022_0001
Figure imgf000023_0001
Figure imgf000024_0001
Figure imgf000025_0001
Figure imgf000026_0001
Figure imgf000027_0001
Figure imgf000028_0001
Table 3
PAP # Stage CEX RP1 Sequences (RP2 [Score])
LLGNVLVCVLAR (14 [26.1068]), FFESFGDLSSPDAVMGNPK (15 [32.3172]), KVLGAFSDGLAHLDNLK (15 [33.2932]), LLGNVLVCVLAR (15 [41.3177]), LLWYPWTQR (15 [21.7194]), VLGAFSDGLAHLDNLK (15 [71.8941]), VNVDAVGGEΞALGR (15 [80.7476]), LLGNVLVCVLAR (16 [51.4632]), VLGAFSDGLAHLDNLK (16 [62.5473]), EFTPQMQAAYQK (17 [31.8138]), KVLGAFSDGLAHLDNLK (17 [34.09]), LLGNVLVCVLAR (17 [102.7141]), VLGAFSDGLAHLDNLK (17 [137.8279]), VNVDAVGGEALGR (17 [84.8157]), EFTPQMQAAYQK (18 [43.4201]), FFESFGDLSSPDAVMGNPK (18 [85.2251]), GTFSQLSELHCDK (18 [42.7969]), KVLGAFSDGLAHLDNLK (18 [24.7142]), LHVDPENFR (18 [51.8135]), LLGNVLVCVLAR (18 [98.2339]), LLWYPWTQR (18 [75.0032]), TAVNALWGK (18 [36.2467]), VLGAFSDGLAHLDNLK (18 [258.1476]), EFTPQMQAAYQK (19 [45.4452]), FFESFGDLSSPDAVMGNPK (19 [118.4629]), GAFSDGLAHLDNLK (19 [86.6542]), GTFSQLSELHCDK (19 [115.464]), GTFSQLSELHCDKLHVDPENFR (19 [59.9492]), KVLGAFSDGLAHLDNLK (19 [210.2208]), LHVDPENFR (19 [17.0954]), LLGNVLVCVLAR (19 [132.878]), LLWYPWTQR (19 [35.0167]), TAVNALWGK (19 [55.3568]), VHLTPEEK (19 [134.8275]), VKAHGKKVLGAFSDGLAHLDNLK (19 [37.5523]),
PAP 16 VLGAFSDGLAHLDNLK (19 [268.9135]), VNVDAVGGEALGR (19 [87.6927]), WAGVANALAHK (19 [68.6771]), EFTPQMQAAYQK (20 [31.2968]), FFESFGDLSSPDAVMGNPK (20 [198.4139]), GAFSDGLAHLDNLK (20 [120.7702]), GTFSQLSELHCDK (20 [114.6803]), GTFSQLSELHCDKLHVDPENFR (20 [59.8995]), KVLGAFSDGLAHLDNLK (20 [76.1654]), LHVDPENFR (20 [25.3495]), LLGNVLVCVLAR (20 [174.0128]), LLWYPWTQR (20 [66.5586]), TAVNALWGK (20 [58.2381]), VHLTPEEK (20 [156.8604]), VLGAFSDGLAHLDNLK (20 [238.1596]), VNVDAVGGEALGR (20 [82.8688]), WAGVANALAHK (20 [95.1003]), EFTPQMQAAYQK (21 [25.3233]), FFESFGDLSSPDAVMGNPK (21 [245.7357]), GAFSDGLAHLDNLK (21 [66.2391]), GTFSQLSELHCDK (21 [45.3217]), GTFSQLSELHCDKLHVDPENFR (21 [101.983]), KVLGAFSDGLAHLDNLK (21 [234.0741]), LLGNVLVCVLAR (21 [175.4055]), LLWYPWTQR (21 [109.8618]), TAVNALWGK (21 [62.6331]), VHLTPEEK (21 [85.6369]), VLGAFSDGLAHLDNLK (21 [283.5731]), VNVDAVGGEALGR (21 [82.09]), WAGVANALAHK (21 [57.6048]), EFTPQMQAAYQK (22 [76.1656]), FFESFGDLSSPDAVMGNPK (22 [219.9515]), GAFSDGLAHLDNLK (22 [69.4109]), GTFSQLSELHCDK (22 [97.039]), GTFSQLSELHCDKLHVDPENFR (22 [20.078]), KVLGAFSDGLAHLDNLK (22 M 65.37531), ***
Figure imgf000030_0001
Figure imgf000031_0001
Figure imgf000032_0001
Figure imgf000033_0001
Figure imgf000034_0001
Figure imgf000035_0001
Figure imgf000036_0001
Figure imgf000037_0001
Figure imgf000038_0001
Figure imgf000039_0001
Figure imgf000040_0001
Figure imgf000041_0001
Figure imgf000042_0001
Figure imgf000043_0001
Figure imgf000044_0001
Figure imgf000045_0001
Figure imgf000046_0001
Figure imgf000047_0001
Figure imgf000048_0001
Figure imgf000049_0001
Figure imgf000050_0001
Figure imgf000051_0001
Figure imgf000052_0001
PAP nucleic acids
One aspect of the invention pertains to purified or isolated nucleic acid molecules that encode PAPs or biologically active portions thereof as further described herein, as well as nucleic acid fragments thereof. Said nucleic acids may be used for example in therapeutic (DNA vaccine) and diagnostic methods and in drug screening assays as further described herein.
An object of the invention is a purified, isolated, or recombinant nucleic acid coding for a PAP, complementary sequences thereto, and fragments thereof. The invention also pertains to a purified or isolated nucleic acid comprising a polynucleotide having at least 95% nucleotide identity with a polynucleotide coding for a PAP, advantageously 99 % nucleotide identity, preferably 99.5% nucleotide identity and most preferably 99.8% nucleotide identity with a polynucleotide coding for a PAP, or a sequence complementary thereto or a biologically active fragment thereof. Another object of the invention relates to purified, isolated or recombinant nucleic acids comprising a polynucleotide that hybridizes, under the stringent hybridization conditions defined herein, with a polynucleotide coding for a PAP, or a sequence complementary thereto or a variant thereof or a biologically active fragment thereof. In another preferred aspect, the invention pertains to purified or isolated nucleic acid molecules that encode a portion or variant of a PAP, wherein the portion or variant displays a PAP biological activity. Preferably said portion or variant is a portion or variant of a naturally occurring PAP or precursor thereof. Another object of the invention is a purified, isolated, or recombinant nucleic acid encoding a PAP comprising, consisting essentially of, or consisting of the amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of the peptide sequences listed in Table 3, wherein the isolated nucleic acid molecule encodes one or more motifs such as a target binding site, or a disulfide bonding site. The nucleotide sequence determined from tihe cloning of the PAP-encoding gene allows for the generation of probes and primers designed for use in identifying and/or cloning other PAPs (e.g. sharing the novel functional domains), as well as PAP homologues from other species.
A nucleic acid fragment encoding a "biologically active portion of a PAP" can be prepared by isolating a portion of a nucleotide sequence coding for a PAP, which encodes a polypeptide having a PAP biological activity, expressing the encoded portion of the PAP (e.g., by recombinant expression in vitro or in vivo) and assessing the activity of the encoded portion of the PAP.
The invention further encompasses nucleic acid molecules that differ from the PAP nucleotide sequences of the invention due to degeneracy of the genetic code and encode the same PAPs of the invention.
Ih addition to the PAP nucleotide sequences described above, it will be appreciated by those skilled in the art that DNA sequence polymorphisms that lead to changes in the amino acid sequences of the PAPs may exist within a population (e.g., the human population). Such genetic polymorphism may exist among individuals within a population due to natural allelic variation. Such natural allelic variations can typically result in 1,-5% variance in the nucleotide sequence of a PAP-encoding gene or nucleic acid sequence.
Nucleic acid molecules corresponding to natural allelic variants and homologues of the PAP nucleic acids of the invention can be isolated based on their homology to the PAP nucleicacids-disclosed herein-using thexDNAs disclosed herein, or a portion thereof, as a hybridization probe according to standard hybridization techniques under stringent hybridization conditions. It will be appreciated that the invention comprises polypeptides having an amino acid sequence encoded by any of the polynucleotides of the invention.
Uses of PAP nucleic acids Polynucleotide sequences (or the complements thereof) encoding PAPs have various applications, including uses as hybridization probes, in chromosome and gene mapping, and in the generation of antisense RNA and DNA. In addition, PAP-encoding nucleic acids are useful as targets for pharmaceutical intervention, e.g. for the development of DNA vaccines, and for the preparation of PAPs by recombinant techniques, as described herein. The polynucleotides described herein, including sequence variants thereof, can be used in diagnostic assays. Accordingly, diagnostic methods based on detecting the presence of such polynucleotides in body fluids or tissue samples are a feature of the present invention. Examples of nucleic acid based diagnostic assays in accordance with the present invention include, but are not limited to, hybridization assays, e.g., in situ hybridization, and PCR- based assays. Polynucleotides, including extended length polynucleotides, sequence variants and fragments thereof, as described herein, may be used to generate hybridization probes or PCR primers for use in such assays. Such probes and primers will be capable of detecting polynucleotide sequences, including genomic sequences that are similar, or complementary to, the PAP polynucleotides described herein. The invention includes primer pairs for carrying out a PCR to amplify a segment of a polynucleotide of the invention. Each primer of a pair is an oligonucleotide having a length of between 15 and 30 nucleotides such that i) one primer of the pair forms a perfectly matched duplex with one strand of a polynucleotide of the invention and the other primer of the pair form a perfectly match duplex with the complementary strand of the same polynucleotide, and ii) the primers of a pair form such perfectly matched duplexes at sites on the polynucleotide that separated by a distance of between 10 and 2500 nucleotides. Preferably, the annealing temperature of each primer of a pair to its respective complementary sequence is substantially the same.
Hybridization probes derived from polynucleotides of the invention can be used, for example, in performing in situ hybridization on tissue samples, such as fixed or frozen tissue sections prepared on microscopic slides or suspended cells. Briefly, a labeled DNA or RNA probe is allowed to bind its DNA or RNA target sample in the tissue section on a prepared microscopic, under controlled conditions. Generally, dsDNA probes consisting of the DNA of interest cloned into a plasmid or bacteriophage DNA vector are used for this purpose, although ssDNA or ssRNA probes may also be used. Probes are generally oligonucleotides between about 15 and 40 nucleotides in length. Alternatively, the probes can be polynucleotide probes generated by PCR random priming primer extension or in vitro transcription of RNA from plasmids (riboprobes). These latter probes are typically several hundred base pairs in length. The probes can be labeled by any of a number of label groups and the particular detection method will correspond to the type of label utilized on the probe (e.g., autoradiography, X-ray detection, fluorescent or visual microscopic analysis, as appropriate). The reaction can be further amplified in situ using immunocytochemical techniques directed against the label of the detector molecule used, such as an antibody directed to a fluorescein moiety present on a fluorescently labeled probe. Specific labeling and in situ detection methods can be found, for example, in Howard, G. C, Ed., Methods in Nonradioactive Detection, Appleton & Lange, Norwalk, Conn., (1993), herein incorporated by reference. Hybridization probes and PCR primers may also be selected from the genomic sequences corresponding to the full-length proteins identified in accordance with the present invention, including promoter, enhancer elements and introns of the gene encoding the naturally occurring polypeptide. Nucleotide sequences encoding a PAP can also be used to construct hybridization probes for mapping the gene encoding that PAP and for the genetic analysis of individuals. Individuals carrying variations of, or mutations in the gene encoding a PAP of the present invention may be detected at the DNA level by a variety of techniques. Nucleic acids used for diagnosis may be obtained from a patient's cells, including, for example, tissue biopsy and autopsy material. Genomic DNA may be used directly for detection or may be amplified enzyrnatically by using PCR (Saiki, et al. Nature 324:163-166 (1986)) prior to analysis. RNA or cDNA may also be used for the same purpose. As an example, PCR primers complementary to the nucleic acid of the present invention can be used to identify and analyze mutations in the gene of the present invention. Deletions and insertions can be detected by a change in size of the amplified product in comparison to the normal genotype. Point mutations can be identified by hybridizing amplified DNA to radiolabeled RNA of the invention or alternatively, radiolabeled antisenseJDNA.sequences of the invention. Sequence changes at specific locations may also be revealed by- nuclease protection assays, such as RNase and Sl protection or the chemical cleavage method (e.g. Cotton, et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL USA 85:4397-4401 (1985)), or by differences in melting temperatures. "Molecular beacons" (Kostrikis L. G. et al., Science 279:1228-1229 (1998)), hairpin-shaped, single-stranded synthetic oligonucleotides containing probe sequences which are complementary to the nucleic acid of the present invention, may also be used to detect point mutations or other sequence changes as well as monitor expression levels of PAPs.
Oligonucleotide and Antisense Compounds
Oligonucleotides of the invention, including PCR primers and antisense compounds, are synthesized by conventional means on a commercially available automated DNA synthesizer, e.g. an Applied Biosystems (Foster City, CA) model 380B, 392 or 394 DNA/RNA synthesizer, or like instrument. Preferably, phosphoramidite chemistry is employed, e.g. as disclosed in the following references: Beaucage and Iyer, Tetrahedron, 48: 2223-2311 (1992); Molko et al, U.S. patent 4,980,460; Koster et al, U.S. patent 4,725,677; Caruthers et al, U.S. patents 4,415,732; 4,458,066; and 4,973,679; and the like. For therapeutic use, nuclease resistant backbones are preferred. Many types of modified oligonucleotides are available that confer nuclease resistance, e.g. phosphorothioate, phosphorodithioate, phosphoramidate, or the like, described in many references, e.g. phosphorothioates: Stec et al, U.S. patent 5,151,510; Hirschbein, U.S. patent 5,166,387; Bergot, U.S. patent 5,183,885; phosphoramidates: Froehler et al, International application PCT/US90/03138; and for a review of additional applicable chemistries: Uhlmann and Peyman (cited above). The length of the antisense oligonucleotides has to be sufficiently large to ensure that specific binding will take place only at the desired target polynucleotide and not at other fortuitous sites. The upper range of the length is determined by several factors, including the inconvenience and expense of synthesizing and purifying oligomers greater than about 30-40 nucleotides in length, the greater tolerance of longer oligonucleotides for mismatches than shorter oligonucleotides, and the like. Preferably, the antisense oligonucleotides of the invention have lengths in the range of about 15 to 40 ' nucleotides. More preferably, the oligonucleotide moieties have lengths in the range of about 18 to 25 nucleotides.
Primers and probes
Primers and probes of the invention can be prepared by any suitable method, including, for example, cloning and restriction of appropriate sequences and direct chemical synthesis by a method such as the phosphodiester method of Narang SA et al (Methods Enzymol 1979;68:90-98), the phosphodiester method of Brown EL et al (Methods Enzymol 1979;68: 109-151), the diethylphosphoramidite method of Beaucage et al (Tetrahedron Lett 1981, 22: 1859-1862) and the solid support method described in EP 0707 592, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties. Detection probes are generally nucleic acid sequences or uncharged nucleic acid analogs such as, for example peptide nucleic acids which are disclosed in International Patent Application WO 92/20702, morpholino analogs which are described in U.S. Patents Numbered 5,185,444; 5,034,506 and 5,142,047. If desired, the probe maybe rendered "non- extendable" in that additional dNTPs cannot be added to the probe, in and of themselves analogs usually are non-extendable and nucleic acid probes can be rendered non-extendable by modifying the 31 end of the probe such that the hydroxyl group is no longer capable of participating in elongation. For example, the 3' end of the probe can be functionalized with the capture or detection label to thereby consume or otherwise block the hydroxyl group. Any of the polynucleotides of the present invention can be labeled, if desired, by incorporating any label group known in the art to be detectable by spectroscopic, photochemical, biochemical, immunochemical, or chemical means. Additional examples include non-radioactive labeling of nucleic acid fragments as described in Urdea et al. (Nucleic Acids Research. 11:4937-4957, 1988) or Sanchez-Pescador et al. (J. Clin. Microbiol. 26(10):1934-1938, 1988). In addition, the probes according to the present invention may have structural characteristics such that they allow the signal amplification, such structural characteristics being, for example, branched DNA probes as those described by Urdea et al (Nucleic Acids Symp. Ser.24:197-200, 1991) or in the European patent No. EP 0225807 (Chiron).
A label can also be used to capture the primer, so as to facilitate the immobilization of either the primer or a primer extension product, such as amplified DNA, on a solid support. A capture label is attached to the primers or probes and can be a specific binding member which forms a binding pair with the solid's phase reagent's specific binding member (e.g. biotin and streptavidin). Therefore depending upon the type of label carried by a polynucleotide or a probe, it may be employed to capture or to detect the target DNA. Further, it will be understood that the polynucleotides, primers or probes provided.herein, may, themselves, serve as the capture label. For example, in the case where a solid phase reagent's binding member is a nucleic acid sequence, it may be selected such that it binds a complementary portion of a primer or probe to thereby immobilize the primer or probe to the solid phase. In cases where a polynucleotide probe itself serves as the binding member, those skilled in the art will recognize that the probe will contain a sequence or "tail" that is not complementary to the target. In the case where a polynucleotide primer itself serves as the capture label, at least a portion of the primer will be free to hybridize with a nucleic acid on a solid phase. DNA labeling techniques are well known to the skilled technician.
The probes of the present invention are useful for a number of purposes. They can be notably used in Southern hybridization to genomic DNA. The probes can also be used to detect PCR amplification products. They may also be used to detect mismatches in PAP- encoding genes or iriRNA using other techniques. Any of the nucleic acids, polynucleotides, primers and probes of the present invention can be conveniently immobilized on a solid support. Solid supports are known to those skilled in the art and include the walls of wells of a reaction tray, test tubes, polystyrene beads, magnetic beads, nitrocellulose strips, membranes, microparticles such as latex particles, sheep (or other animal) red blood cells, duracytes and others. The solid support is not critical and can be selected by one skilled in the art. Thus, latex particles, microparticles, magnetic or non-magnetic beads, membranes, plastic tubes, walls of microliter wells, glass or silicon chips, sheep (or other suitable animal's) red blood cells and duracytes are all suitable examples. Suitable methods for immobilizing nucleic acids on solid phases include ionic, hydrophobic, covalent interactions and the like. A solid support, as used herein, refers to any material which is insoluble, or can be made insoluble by a subsequent reaction. The solid support can be chosen for its intrinsic ability to attract and immobilize the capture reagent. Alternatively, the solid phase can retain an additional receptor which has the ability to attract and immobilize the capture reagent. The additional receptor can include a charged substance that is oppositely charged with respect to the capture reagent itself or to a charged substance conjugated to the capture reagent. As yet another alternative, the receptor molecule can be any specific binding member attached to the solid support and which has the ability to immobilize the capture reagent through a specific binding reaction. The receptor molecule enables the indirect binding of the capture reagent to a solid support material before the performance of the assay or during the performance of the assay. The solid phase thus can be a plastic, derivatized plastic, magnetic or non-magnetic metal, glass or silicon surface of a test tube, microtiter well, sheet, bead, microparticle, chip, sheep (or other suitable animal's) red blood cells, duracytes and other configurations known to those of ordinary skill in the art. The nucleic acids, polynucleotides, primers and probes of the invention can be attached to or immobilized on a solid support individually or in groups of at least 2, 5, 8, 10, 12, 15, 20, or 25 distinct polynucleotides of the invention to a single solid support. Ih addition, polynucleotides other than those of the invention may be attached to the same solid support as one or more polynucleotides of the invention. Any polynucleotide provided herein may be attached in overlapping areas or at random locations on a solid support. Alternatively the polynucleotides of the invention may be attached in an ordered array wherein each polynucleotide is attached to a distinct region of the solid support which does not overlap with the attachment site of any other polynucleotide. Preferably, such an ordered array of polynucleotides is designed to be "addressable" where the distinct locations are recorded and can be accessed as part of an assay procedure.
Addressable polynucleotide arrays typically comprise a plurality of different oligonucleotide probes that are coupled to a surface of a substrate in different known locations. The knowledge of the precise location of each polynucleotides location makes these "addressable" arrays particularly useful in hybridization assays. Any addressable array technology known in the art can be employed with the polynucleotides of the invention. One particular embodiment of these polynucleotide arrays is known as the Genechips, and has been generally described in US Patent 5,143,854; PCT publications WO 90/15070 and 92/10092, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
Methods for obtaining variant nucleic acids and polypeptides
In addition to naturally-occurring allelic variants of the PAP sequences that may exist in the population, the skilled artisan will appreciate that changes can be introduced by mutation into the nucleotide sequences coding for PAPs, thereby leading to changes in the amino acid sequence of the encoded PAPs, with or without altering the functional ability of the PAPs.
Several types of variants are contemplated including 1) one in which one or more of the amino acid residues are substituted with a conserved or non-conserved amino acid residue and such substituted amino acid residue may or may not be one encoded by the genetic code, or 2) one in which one or more of the amino acid residues includes a substituent group, or 3) one in which the mutated PAP is fused with another compound,_such as a compound .to increase the half-life of the polypeptide (for example, polyethylene glycol), or 4) one in which the additional amino acids are fused to the PAP, such as a leader, a signal or anchor sequence, a sequence which is employed for purification of the PAP, or sequence from a precursor protein. Such variants are deemed to be within the scope of those skilled in the art.
For example, nucleotide substitutions leading to amino acid substitutions can be made in the sequences that do not substantially change the biological activity of the protein. An amino acid residue-can be altered from the wild-type sequence encoding a PAP, or a biologically active fragment or homologue thereof without altering the biological activity. In general, amino acid residues that are shared among the PAPs of the present invention are predicted to be less amenable to alteration.
Ih another aspect, Hie invention pertains to nucleic acid molecules.encod.ng PAPs that contain changes in amino acid residues that result in increased biological activity, or a modified biological activity. In another aspect, the invention pertains to nucleic acid molecules encoding PAPs that contain changes in amino acid residues that are essential for a PAP biological activity. Such PAPs differ in amino acid sequence from PAPs 1-33 and display reduced activity, or essentially lack one or more PAP biological activities. Mutations, substitutions, additions, or deletions can be introduced into any of PAPs
1-33, by standard techniques, such as site-directed mutagenesis and PCR-mediated mutagenesis. For example, conservative amino acid substitutions may be made at one or more predicted non-essential amino acid residues. A "conservative amino acid substitution" is one in which the amino acid residue is replaced with an amino acid residue having a similar side chain. Families of amino acid residues having similar side chains have been defined in the art. These families include amino acids with basic side chains (e.g., lysine, arginine, histidine), acidic side chains (e.g., aspartic acid, glutamic acid), uncharged polar side chains (e.g., glycine, asparagine, glutamine, serine, threonine, tyrosine, cysteine), nonpolar side chains (e.g., alanine, valine, leucine, isoleucine, proline, phenylalanine, methionine, tryptophan), beta-branched side chains (e.g., threonine, valine, isoleucine) and aromatic side chains (e.g., tyrosine, phenylalanine, tryptophan, histidine). Thus, a predicted nonessential amino acid residue in a PAP, or a biologically active fragment or homologue thereof may be replaced with another amino acid residue from the same side chain family. Alternatively, in another embodiment, mutations can be introduced randomly along all or part of a PAP coding sequence, such as by saturation mutagenesis, and the resultant mutants can be screened for PAP biological activity to identify mutants that retain activity. Following mutagenesis of the nucleotide encoding one of PAPs 1-33, the encoded protein can be expressed recombinantly and the activity of the protein can be determined in any suitable assay, for example, as provided herein.
The invention also provides PAP chimeric or fusion proteins. As used herein, a PAP "chimeric protein" or "fusion protein" comprises a PAP of the invention or fragment thereof, operatively linked or fused in frame to a non-PAP polypeptide sequence. Ih a preferred embodiment, a PAP fusion protein comprises at least one biologically active portion of a PAP. In another preferred embodiment, a PAP fusion protein comprises at least two biologically active portions of a PAP. For example, in one embodiment, the fusion protein is a GST-PAP fusion protein in which PAP domain sequences are fused to the C-terminus of the GST sequences. Such fusion proteins can facilitate the purification of recombinant PAPs. In another embodiment, the fusion protein is a PAP containing a heterologous signal sequence at its N-terminus, for example, to allow for a desired cellular localization in a certain host cell. Ih yet another embodiment, the fusion is a PAP biologically active fragment and an immunoglobulin molecule. Such fusion proteins are useful, for example, to increase the valency of PAP binding sites. For example, a bivalent PAP binding site may be formed by fusing biologically active PAP fragments to an IgG Fc protein.
PAP fusion proteins of the invention can be used as immunogens to produce anti- PAP antibodies in a subject, to purify PAP or PAP ligands and in screening assays to identify PAP modulators. Furthermore, isolated fragments of PAPs can also be obtained by screening peptides recombinantly produced from the corresponding fragment of the nucleic acid encoding such peptides. In addition, fragments can be chemically synthesized using techniques known in the art such as conventional Merrifield solid phase f-Moc or t-Boc chemistry. For example, a PAP of the present invention may be arbitrarily divided into fragments of desired length with no overlap of the fragments, or preferably divided into overlapping fragments of a desired length. The fragments can be produced (recombinantly or by chemical synthesis) and tested to identify those peptidyl fragments with a PAP biological activity, for example, by microinjection assays or in vitro protein binding assays. In an illustrative embodiment, peptidyl portions of a PAP, such as a PAP target binding region, can be tested for PAP activity by expression-asihioredoxin fusion proteins, each of which contains a discrete fragment of the PAP (see, for example, U.S. Patents 5, 270,181 and 5,292,646; and PCT publication WO94/02502, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference). In addition, libraries of fragments of a PAP coding sequence can be used to generate a variegated population of PAP fragments for screening and subsequent selection of variants of a PAP. In one embodiment, a library of coding sequence fragments can be generated by treating a double stranded PCR fragment of PAP coding sequence with a nuclease under conditions wherein nicking occurs only about once per molecule, denaturing the double stranded DNA, renaturing the DNA to form double stranded DNA which can include sense/antisense pairs from different nicked products, removing single stranded portions from reformed duplexes by treatment with Sl nuclease, and ligating the resulting fragment library into an expression vector. By this method, an expression library can be derived which encodes N-terminal, C-terminal and internal fragments of various sizes of the PAP. Modified PAPs can be used for such purposes as enhancing therapeutic or prophylactic efficacy, or stability (e.g., ex vivo shelf life and resistance to proteolytic degradation in vivo). Such modified peptides, when designed to retain at least one activity of the naturally occurring form of the protein, are considered functional equivalents of the PAP described in more detail herein. Such modified peptide can be produced, for instance, by amino acid substitution, deletion, or addition.
Whether a change in the amino acid sequence of a peptide results in a functional PAP homolog can be readily determined by assessing at least one PAP biological activity of the variant peptide. Peptides in which more than one replacement has taken place can readily be tested in the same manner.
This invention further contemplates a method of generating sets of combinatorial mutants of the presently disclosed PAPs, as well as truncation and fragmentation mutants, and is especially useful for identifying potential variant sequences which are functional in binding to a PAP target protein but differ from a wild-type form of the protein by, for example, efficacy, potency and/or intracellular half-life. One purpose for screening such combinatorial libraries is, for example, to isolate novel PAP homologs with altered biological activity, when compared with the wild-type protein, or alternatively, possessing novel activities all together. For example, mutagenesis can give rise to PAP homologs which have intracellular half-lives dramatically different than the corresponding wild-type protein. The altered protein can be rendered either more stable or less stable to proteolytic degradation, or cellular processes which result in destruction of, or otherwise inactivation of, a PAP. Such PAP homologs, and the genes which encode them, can be utilized to alter the envelope of expression for a particular recombinant PAP by modulating the half-life of the recombinant protein. For instance, a short half-life can give rise to more transient biological effects associated with a particular recombinant PAP and, when part of an inducible expression system, can allow tighter control of recombinant protein levels within a cell and in circulating plasma. As above, such proteins, and particularly their recombinant nucleic acid constructs, can be used in gene therapy protocols.
In an illustrative embodiment of this method, the amino acid sequences for a population of PAP homologs or other related proteins are aligned, preferably to promote the highest homology possible. Such a population of variants can include, for example, PAP homologs from one or more species, or PAP homologs from the same species but which differ due to mutation. Amino acids which appear at each position of the aligned sequences are selected to create a degenerate set of combinatorial sequences. There are many ways by which the library of potential PAP homologs can be generated from a degenerate oligonucleotide sequence. Chemical synthesis of a degenerate gene sequence can be carried out in an automatic DNA synthesizer, and the synthetic genes then be ligated into an appropriate gene for expression. The purpose of a degenerate set of genes is to provide, in one mixture, all of the sequences encoding the desired set of potential PAP sequences. The synthesis of degenerate oligonucleotides is well known in the art (see for example. Narang, SA (1983) Tetrahedron 393; Itakura et al. (1981) Recombinant DNA, Proc 3rd Cleveland Sympos. Macromolecules, ed. AG Walton, Amsterdam: Elsevier pp.273-289; Itakura et al. (1984) Annu. Rev. Biochem. 53:323; Itakura et al. (1984) Science 198:1056; Ike et al. (1983) Nucleic Acid Res. 11:477). Such techniques have been employed in the directed evolution of other proteins (see, for example, Scott et al. (1990) Science 249:386-390; Roberts et al. (1992) PNAS 89:2429-2433; Devlin et al. (1990) Science 249: 404-406; Cwirla et al. (1990) PNAS 87: 6378-6382; as well as U.S. Patents Nos: 5, 223,409, 5,198,346, and 5,096,815). The disclosures of the above references are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
Alternatively, other forms of mutagenesis can be utilized to generate a combinatorial library, particularly where no other naturally occurring homologs have yet been sequenced. For example, PAP homologs can be generated and isolated from a library by screening using, for example, alanine scanning mutagenesis and the like (Ruf et al. (1994) Biochemistry 33:1565-1572; Wang et al. (1994) J Biol. Chem. 269:3095-3099; Balint et al. (1993) Gene 137:109-118; Grodberg et al. (1993) Eur. J Biochem. 218:597-601; Nagashima et al. (1993) J Biol. Chem.268:2888-2892; Lowman et al. (1991) Biochemistry 30:10832-10838; and Cuimingham et al. (1989) Science 244:1081-1085), by linker scanning mutagenesis (Gustin et al. (1993) Virology 193:653-660; Brown et al. (1992) MoI. Cell Biol. 12:26442652; McKnight et al. (1982) Science 232:316); by saturation mutagenesis (Meyers et al. (1986) Science 232:613); by PCR mutagenesis (Leung et al. (1989) Method Cell MoI Biol 1 : 1-19); or by random mutagenesis (Miller et al. (1992) A Short Course in Bacterial Genetics, CSHL Press, Cold Spring Harbor, NY; and Greener et al. (1994) Strategies in MoI Biol 7:32-34, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties).
A further method exploits automatic protein design to generate protein libraries for screening and optimization of the sequence of a protein of the invention. See, for example, U.S. Patent 6403312, disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. Briefly, a primary library is generated using computational processing based on the sequence and structural characteristics of the PAP. Generally speaking, the goal of the computational processing is to determine a set of optimized protein sequences that result in the lowest energy conformation of any possible sequence. However, a plurality of sequences that are not the global minimum may have low energies and be useful. Thus, a primary library comprising a rank ordered list of sequences, generally in terms of theoretical quantitative stability, is generated. These sequences may be used to synthesize or express peptides displaying an extended half-life or stabilized interactions with PAP binding compounds and proteins. A wide range of techniques are known in the art for screening gene products of combinatorial libraries made by point mutations, as well as for screening cDNA libraries for gene products having a certain property. Such techniques will be generally adaptable for rapid screening of the gene libraries generated by the combinatorial mutagenesis of PAPs. The most widely used techniques for screening large gene libraries typically comprises cloning the gene library into replicable expression vectors, transforming appropriate cells with the resulting library of vectors, and expressing the combinatorial genes under conditions in which detection of a desired activity facilitates relatively easy isolation of the vector encoding the gene whose product was detected.
Each of the illustrative assays described below are amenable to high throughput analysis as necessary to screen large numbers of degenerate PAP sequences created by combinatorial mutagenesis techniques. Li one screening assay, the candidate gene products are displayed on the surface of a cell or viral particle, and the ability of particular cells or viral particles to bind a PAP target molecule (for example a modified peptide substrate) via this gene product is detected in a "panning assay". For instance, the gene library can be cloned into the gene for a surface membrane protein of a bacterial cell, and the resulting fusion protein detected by panning (Ladner et al., WO 88/06630; Fuchs et al. (1991) BioTechnology 9:1370-1371, and Goward et al. (1992) TIBS 18:136 140). In a similar fashion, fluorescently labeled PAP target can be used to score for potentially functional PAP homologs. Cells can be visually inspected and separated under a fluorescence microscope, or, where the morphology of the cell permits, separated by a fluorescence- activated cell sorter. Ih an alternate embodiment, the gene library is expressed as a fusion protein on the surface of a viral particle. For instance, in the filamentous phage system, foreign peptide sequences can be expressed on the surface of infectious phage, thereby conferring two significant benefits. First, since these phages can be applied to affinity matrices at very high concentrations, a large number of phage can be screened at one time. Second, since each infectious phage displays the combinatorial gene product on its surface, if a particular phage is recovered from an affinity matrix in low yield, the phage can be amplified by another round of infection. The group of almost identical E. coli filamentous phages M13, fd, and fl are most often used in phage display libraries, as either of the phage gill or gVlH coat proteins can be used to generate fusion proteins without disrupting the ultimate packaging of the viral particle (Ladner et al. PCT publication WO 90/02909; Garrard et al., PCT publication WO 92/09690; Marks et al. (1992) J Biol. Chem. 267:16007-16010; Griffiths et al. (1993) EMBO J 12:725-734; Clackson et al. (1991) Nature 352:624-628; and Barbas et al. (1992) PNAS 89:44574461, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties). In an illustrative embodiment, the recombinant phage antibody system (RPAS, Pharmacia Catalog number 27-9400-01) can be easily modified for use in expressing PAP combinatorial libraries, and the PAP phage library can be panned on immobilized PAP target molecule (glutathione immobilized PAP target-GST fusion proteins or immobilized DNA). Successive rounds of phage amplification and panning can greatly enrich for PAP homologs which retain an ability to bind a PAP target and which can subsequently be screened further for biological activities in automated assays, in order to distinguish between agonists and antagonists. The invention also provides for identification and reduction to functional minimal size of the PAP functional domains, to generate mimetics, e.g. peptide or non-peptide agents, which are able to disrupt binding of a polypeptide of the present invention with a PAP target molecule. Thus, such mutagenic techniques as described above are also useful to map the determinants of PAPs participating in protein-protein interactions involved in, for example, binding to a PAP target protein. To illustrate, the critical residues of a PAP involved in molecular recognition of the PAP target can be determined and used to generate PAP target- 13P-derived peptidornimetics that competitively inhibit binding of the PAP to the PAP target. For instance, non hydrolysable peptide analogs of such residues can be generated using retro- inverse peptides (e.g., see U.S. Patents 5,116,947 and 5,219,089; and Pallai et al. (1983) Iht J Pept Protein Res 21 :84-92), benzodiazepine (e.g., see Freidinger et al. in Peptides: Chemistry and Biology, G.R. Marshall ed., ESCOM Publisher: Leiden, Netherlands, 1988), azepine (e.g., see Huffman et al. in Peptides. Chemistry and Biology, G.R. Marshall ed., ESCOM Publisher: Leiden, Netherlands, 1988), substituted gamma lactam rings (Garvey et al. in Peptides: Chemistry and Biology, G.R. Marshall ed., ESCOM Publisher: Leiden, Netherlands, 1988), keto-methylene pseudopeptides (Ewenson et al. (1986) J Med Chem 29:295; and Ewenson et al. in Peptides: Structure and Function (Proceedings of the 9th American Peptide Symposium) Pierce Chemical Co. Rockland, IL, 1985), P-turn dipeptide cores (Nagai et al. (1985) Tetrahedron Left 26:647; and Sato et al. (1986) J Chem Soc Perkin Trans 1: 123 1), and P-aminoalcohols (Gordon et al. (1985) Biochem Biophys Res Commun 126:419; and Dann et al. (1986) Biochem Biophys Res Commun 134:71, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties).
Chemical Manufacture of PAP Compositions
Peptides of the invention are synthesized by standard techniques (e.g. Stewart and Young, Solid Phase Peptide Synthesis, 2nd Ed., Pierce Chemical Company, Rockford, IL, 1984). Preferably, a commercial peptide synthesizer is used, e.g. Applied Biosystems, Inc. (Foster City, CA) model 430A, and polypeptides of the invention may be assembled from multiple, separately synthesized and purified, peptide in a convergent synthesis approach, e.g. Kent et al, U.S. patent 6,184,344 and Dawson and Kent, Annu. Rev. Biochem., 69: 923-960 (2000). Peptides of the invention may be assembled by solid phase synthesis on a cross- linked polystyrene support starting from the carboxyl terminal residue and adding amino acids in a stepwise fashion until the entire peptide has been formed. The following references are guides to the chemistry employed-during synthesis: Schnolzer et al, Int. J.
Peptide Protein Res., 40: 180-193 (1992); Merrifϊeld, J. Amer. Chem. Soc, Vol. 85, pg.2149 (1963); Kent et al., pg 185, in Peptides 1984, Ragnarsson, Ed. (Almquist and Weksell, Stockholm, 1984); Kent et al., pg. 217 in Peptide Chemistry 84, Izumiya, Ed. (Protein Research Foundation, B.H. Osaka, 1985); Merrifield, Science, Vol. 232, pgs. 341-347
(1986); Kent, Ann. Rev. Biochem, Vol. 57, pgs. 957-989 (1988), and references cited in these latter two references.
Preferably, chemical synthesis of polypeptides of the invention is carried out by the assembly of peptide fragments by native chemical ligation, as described by Dawson et al, Science, 266: 776-779 (1994) and Kent el al, U.S. patent 6,184,344. Briefly, in the approach a first peptide fragment is provided with an N-terminal cysteine having an unoxidized sulfhydryl side chain, and a second peptide fragment is provided with a C-terminal thioester. The unoxidized sulfhydryl side chain of the N-terminal cysteine is then condensed with the C-terminal thioester to produce an intermediate peptide fragment which links the first and second peptide fragments with a β-aminothioester bond. The β-aminothioester bond of the intermediate peptide fragment then undergoes an intramolecular rearrangement to produce the peptide fragment product which links the first and second peptide fragments with an amide bond. Preferably, the N-terminal cysteine of the internal fragments is protected from undesired cyclization and/or concatenation reactions by a cyclic thiazolidine protecting group as described below. Preferably, such cyclic thiazolidine protecting group is a thioprolinyl group.
Peptide fragments having a C-terminal thioester may be produced as described in the following references, which are incorporated by reference: Kent et al, U.S. patent 6, 184,344; Tarn et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL, 92: 12485-12489 (1995); Blake, Int. J. Peptide Protein Res., 17: 273 (1981); Canne et al, Tetrahedron Letters, 36: 1217-1220 (1995); Hackeng et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 94: 7845-7850 (1997); or Hackeng et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 96: 10068- 10073 (1999). Preferably, the method described by Hackeng et al (1999) is employed. Briefly, peptide fragments are synthesized on a solid phase support (described below) typically on a 0.25 mmol scale by using the in situ neutralization/HBTU activation procedure for Boc chemistry disclosed by Schnolzer et al, Int. J. Peptide Protein Res., 40: 180-193 (1992), which reference is incorporated herein by reference. (HBTU is 2-(lH-benzotriazol-l- yl)-l,l,3,3-tetramethyluronium hexafluorophosphate and Boc is tert-butoxycarbonyl). Each synthetic cycle consists of N"-Boc removal by a "l- to 2- minute treatment with neat TFA, a 1- minute DMF flow wash, a 10- to 20-minute coupling time with 1.0 mmol of preactivated Boc-amino acid in the presence of DIEA, and a second DMF flow wash. (TFA is trifluoroacetic acid, DMF is N,N-dimethylformamide, and DIEA is N5N- diisopropylethylamine). N^Boc-amino acids (1.1 mmol) are preactivated for 3 minutes with 1.0 mmol of HBTU (0.5 M in DMF) in the presence of excess DIEA (3 mmol). After each coupling step, yields are determined by measuring residual free amine with a conventional quantitative ninhydrin assay, e.g. as disclosed in Sarin et al, Anal. Biochem., 117: 147-157 (1981). After coupling of GIn residues, a DCM flow wash is used before and after deprotection by using TFA, to prevent possible high-temperature (TFA/DMF)-catalyzed pyrrolidone formation. After chain assembly is completed, the peptide fragments are deprotected and cleaved from the resin by treatment with anhydrous HF for 1 hour at O0C with 4% jp-cresol as a scavenger. The imidazole side-chain 2,4-dinitrophenyl (dnp) protecting groups remain on the His residues because the dnp-removal procedure is incompatible with C-terminal thioester groups. However, dnp is gradually removed by thiols during the ligation reaction. After cleavage, peptide fragments are precipitated with ice-cold diethylether, dissolved in aqueous acetonitrile, and lyophilized.
Thioester peptide fragments described above are preferably synthesized on a trityl- associated mercaptopropionic acid-leucine (TAMPAL) resin, made as disclosed by Hackeng et al (1999), or comparable protocol. Briefly, N"-Boc-Leu (4 mmol) is activated with 3.6 mmol of HBTU in the presence of 6 mmol of DIEA and coupled for 16 minutes to 2 mmol of p-methylbenzhydrylamine (MBHA) resin, or the equivalent. Next, 3 mmol of S-trityl mercaptopropionic acid is activated with 2.7 mmol of HBTU in the presence of 6 mmol of DBEA and coupled for 16 minutes to Leu-MBHA resin. The resulting TAMPAL resin can be used as a starting resin for polypeptide-chain assembly after removal of the trityl protecting group with two 1-minute treatments with 3.5% triisopropylsilane and 2.5% H2O in TFA. The thioester bond can be formed with any desired amino acid by using standard in situ- neutralization peptide coupling protocols for 1 hour, as disclosed in Schnolzer et al (cited above). Treatment of the final peptide fragment with anhydrous HF yields the C-terminal activated mercaptopropionic acid-leucine (MPAL) thioester peptide fragments.
Preferably, thiazolidine-protected thioester peptide fragment intermediates are used in native chemical ligation under conditions as described by Hackeng et al (1999), or like conditions. Briefly, 0.1 M phosphate buffer (pH 8.5) containing 6 M guanidine, 4% (vol/vol) benzylmercaptan, and 4% (vol/vol) thiophenol is added to dry peptides to be ligated, to give a final peptide concentration of 1-3 mM at about pH 7, lowered because of the addition of thiols and TFA from the lyophilized peptide. Preferably, the ligation reaction is performed in a heating block at 370C and is periodically vortexed to equilibrate the thiol additives. The reaction may be monitored for degree of completion by MALDI-MS or HPLC and electrospray ionization MS.
After a native chemical ligation reaction is completed or stopped, the N-terminal thiazolidine ring of the product is opened by treatment with a cysteine deprotecting agent, such as 0-methylhydroxylamine (0.5 M) at pH 3.5-4.5 for 2 hours at 37° C5 after which a 10- fold excess of Tris-(2-carboxyethyl)-phosphine is added to the reaction mixture to completely reduce any oxidizing reaction constituents prior to purification of the product by conventional preparative HPLC. Preferably, fractions containing the ligation product are identified by electrospray MS, are pooled, and lyophilized. After the synthesis is completed and the final product purified, the final polypeptide product may be refolded by conventional techniques, e.g. Creighton, Meth. EnzymoL, 107: 305-329 (1984); White, Meth. Enzymol., 11: 481-484 (1967); Wetlaufer, Meth. EnzymoL, 107: 301-304 (1984); and the like. Preferably, a final product is refolded by air oxidation by the following, or like: The reduced lyophilized product is dissolved (at about 0.1 mg/mL) in I M guanidine hydrochloride (or like chaotropic agent) with 100 mM Tris, 10 mM methionine, at pH 8.6. After gentle overnight stirring, the re-folded product is isolated by reverse phase HPLC with conventional protocols.
Recombinant Expression Vectors and Host Cells The polynucleotide sequences described herein can be used in recombinant DNA molecules that direct the expression of the corresponding polypeptides in appropriate host cells. Because of the degeneracy in the genetic code, other DNA sequences may encode the equivalent amino acid sequence, and may be used to clone and express the PAPs. Codons preferred by a particular host cell may be selected and substituted into the naturally occurring nucleotide sequences, to increase the rate and/or efficiency of expression. The nucleic acid (e.g., cDNA or genomic DNA) encoding the desired PAP may be inserted into a replicable vector for cloning (amplification of the DNA), or for expression. The polypeptide can be expressed recombinantly in any of a number of expression systems according to methods known in the art (Ausύbel, et al." 3 editors, Current Protocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1990). Appropriate host cells include yeast, bacteria, archebacteria, fungi, and insect and animal cells, including mammalian cells, for example primary cells, including stem cells, including, but not limited to bone marrow stem cells. More specifically, these include, but are not limited to, microorganisms such as bacteria transformed with recombinant bacteriophage, plasmid or cosmid DNA expression vectors, and yeast transformed with yeast expression vectors. Also included, are insect cells infected with a recombinant insect virus (such as baculovirus), and mammalian expression systems. The nucleic acid sequence to be expressed may be inserted into the vector by a variety of procedures. In general, DNA is inserted into an appropriate restriction endonuclease site using techniques known in the art. Vector components generally include, but are not limited to, one or more of a signal sequence, an origin of replication, one or more marker genes, an enhancer element, a promoter, and a transcription termination sequence. Construction of suitable vectors containing one or more of these components employs standard ligation techniques which are known to the skilled artisan.
The PAPs of the present invention are produced by culturing a host cell transformed with an expression vector containing a nucleic acid encoding a PAP, under the appropriate conditions to induce or cause expression of the protein. The conditions appropriate for PAP expression will vary with the choice of the expression vector and the host cell, as ascertained by one skilled in the art. For example, the use of constitutive promoters in the expression vector may require routine optimization of host cell growth and proliferation, while the use of an inducible promoter requires the appropriate growth conditions for induction. In addition, in some embodiments, the timing of the harvest is important. For example, the baculoviral systems used in insect cell expression are lytic viruses, and thus harvest time selection can be crucial for product yield.
A host cell strain may be chosen for its ability to modulate the expression of the inserted sequences or to process the expressed protein in the desired fashion. Such modifications of the protein include, but are not limited to, glycosyl, acetyl, phosphate, amide, lipid, carboxyl, acyl, or carbohydrate groups. Post-translational processing, which cleaves a "prepro" form of the protein, may also be important for correct insertion, folding and/or function. By way of example, host cells such as CHO, HeLa, BHK, MDCK, 293, W138, etc. have specific cellular machinery and characteristic mechanisms for such post- translational activities and may be chosen to ensure the correct modification and processing of the introduced, foreign protein. Of particular interest are Drosophila melaήogaster cells, Saccharomyces cerevisiae and other yeasts, E. coli, Bacillussubtilis, SF9 cells,. C129 cells, 293 cells, Neurospora, BHK, CHO, COS, and HeLa cells, fibroblasts, Schwanoma cell lines, immortalized mammalian myeloid and lymphoid cell lines, Jurkat cells, human cells and other primary cells. The nucleic acid encoding a PAP must be "operably linked" by placing it into a functional relationship with another nucleic acid sequence. For example, DNA for a presequence or secretory leader is operably linked to DNA for a polypeptide if it is expressed as a preprotein that participates in the secretion of the polypeptide; a promoter or enhancer is operably linked to a coding sequence if it affects the transcription of the sequence; or a ribosome binding site is operably linked to a coding sequence if it is positioned so as to facilitate translation. Generally, "operably linked" DNA sequences are contiguous, and, in the case of a secretory leader or other polypeptide sequence, contiguous and in reading phase. However, enhancers do not have to be contiguous. Linking is accomplished by ligation at convenient restriction sites. If such sites do not exist, the synthetic oligonucleotide adaptors or linkers are used in accordance with conventional practice. Promoter sequences encode either constitutive or inducible promoters. The promoters may be either naturally occurring promoters or hybrid promoters. Hybrid promoters, which combine elements of more than one promoter, are also known in the art, and are useful in the present invention. The expression vector may comprise additional elements, for example, the expression vector may have two replication systems, thus allowing it to be maintained in two organisms, for example in mammalian or insect cells for expression and in a procaryotic host for cloning and amplification. Both expression and cloning vectors contain a nucleic acid sequence that enables the vector to replicate in one or more selected host cells. Such sequences are well known for a variety of bacteria, yeast, and viruses. The origin of replication from the plasmid pBR322 is suitable for most Gram-negative bacteria, the 2: plasmid origin is suitable for yeast, and various viral origins (SV40, polyoma, adenovirus, VSV or BPV) are useful for cloning vectors in mammalian cells. Further, for integrating expression vectors, the expression vector contains at least one sequence homologous to the host cell genome, and preferably, two homologous sequences which flank the expression construct. The integrating vector may be directed to a specific locus in the host cell by selecting the appropriate homologous sequence for inclusion in the vector. Constructs for integrating vectors are well known in the art. In an additional embodiment, a heterologous expression control element may be operably linked with the endogenous gene in the host cell by homologous recombination (described in US Patents 6410266 and 6361972, disclosures of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties). This technique allows one to regulate expression to a desired level with a chosen control element while ensuring proper processing and modification of PAP endogenously expressed by the host cell. Useful heterologous expression control elements include but are not limited to CMV immediate early promoter, the HSV thymidine kinase promoter, the early and late SV40 promoters, the promoters of retroviral LTRs, such as those of the Rous Sarcoma Virus (RSV), and metallothionein promoters. Preferably, the expression vector contains a selectable marker gene to allow the selection of transformed host cells. Selection genes are well known in the art and will vary with the host cell used. Expression and cloning vectors will typically contain a selection gene, also termed a selectable marker. Typical selection genes encode proteins that (a) confer resistance to antibiotics or other toxins, e.g., ampicillin, neomycin, methotrexate, or tetracycline, (b) complement auxotrophic deficiencies, or (c) supply critical nutrients not available for from complex media, e.g., the gene encoding D-alanine racemase for Bacilli.
Host cells transformed with a nucleotide sequence encoding a PAP may be cultured under conditions suitable for the expression and recovery of the encoded protein from cell culture. The protein produced by a recombinant cell may be secreted, membrane-bound, or contained intracellularly depending on the sequence and/or the vector used. As will be understood by those of skill in the art, expression vectors containing polynucleotides encoding the PAP can be designed with signal sequences which direct secretion of the PAP through a prokaryotic or eukaryotic cell membrane. The desired PAP may be produced recombinantly not only directly, but also as a fusion polypeptide with a heterologous polypeptide, which may be a signal sequence or other polypeptide having a specific cleavage site at the N-terminus of the mature protein or polypeptide. In general, the signal sequence may be a component of the vector, or it may be a part of the PAP-encoding DNA that is inserted into the vector. The signal sequence may be a prokaryotic signal sequence selected, for example, from the group of the alkaline phosphatase, penicillinase, lpp, or heat-stable enterotoxin II leaders. For yeast secretion the signal sequence may be, e.g., the yeast invertase leader, alpha factor leader (including Saccharomyces and Kluyveromyces a-factor leaders, the latter described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,010,182), or acid phosphatase leader, the C. albicans glucoamylase leader (EP 362,179 published Apr. 4, 1990), or the signal described in WO*90113646 published Nov. 15, 1990. In mammalian cell expression, mammalian signal sequences may be used to direct secretion of the protein, such as signal sequences from secreted polypeptides of the same or related species, as well as viral secretory leaders. According to the expression system selected, the coding sequence is inserted into an appropriate vector, which in turn may require the presence of certain characteristic "control elements" or "regulatory sequences." Appropriate constructs are known generally in the art (Ausubel, et al., 1990) and, in many cases, are available from commercial suppliers such as Iavitrogen (San Diego, Calif.), Stratagene (La Jolla, Calif.), Gibco BRL (Rockville, Md.) or Clontech (Palo Alto, Calif.).
Expression in Bacterial Systems
Transformation of bacterial cells may be achieved using an inducible promoter such as the hybrid lacZ promoter of the "BLUESCRIPT" Phagemid (Stratagene) or "pSPORTl" (Gibco BRL). In addition, a number of expression vectors may be selected for use in bacterial cells to produce cleavable fusion proteins that can be easily detected and/or purified, including, but not limited to "BLUESCRIPT" (a-galactosidase; Stratagene) or pGEX (glutathione S-transferase; Promega, Madison, Wis.). A suitable bacterial promoter is any nucleic acid sequence capable of binding bacterial RNA polymerase and initiating the downstream (3') transcription of the coding sequence of the PAP gene into mRNA. A bacterial promoter has a transcription initiation τegion which is usually placed proximal to the 5' end of the coding sequence. This transcription initiation region typically includes an RNA polymerase binding site and a transcription initiation site. Sequences encoding metabolic pathway enzymes provide particularly useful promoter sequences. Examples include promoter sequences derived from sugar metabolizing enzymes, such as galactose, lactose and maltose, and sequences derived from biosynthetic enzymes such as tryptophan. Promoters from bacteriophage may also be used and are known in the art. In addition, synthetic promoters and hybrid promoters are also useful; for example, the tat promoter is a hybrid of the trp and lac promoter sequences. Furthermore, a bacterial promoter can include naturally occurring promoters of non-bacterial origin that have the ability to bind bacterial RNA polymerase and initiate transcription. An efficient ribosome-binding site is also desirable. The expression vector may also include a signal peptide sequence that provides for secretion of the PAP in bacteria. The signal sequence typically encodes a signal peptide comprised of hydrophobic amino acids which direct the secretion of the protein from the cell, as is well known in the art. The protein is either secreted into the growth media (gram- positive bacteria) or into the periplasmic space, .located between the inner and outer membrane of the cell (gram-negative bacteria). The bacterial expression vector may also include a selectable marker gene to allow for the selection of bacterial strains that have been transformed. Suitable selection genes include drug resistance genes such as ampicillin, chloramphenicol, erythromycin, kanamycin, neomycin and tetracycline. Selectable markers also include biosynthetic genes, such as those in the histidine, tryptophan and leucine biosynthetic pathways. When large quantities of PAPs are needed, e.g., for the induction of antibodies, vectors which direct high level expression of fusion proteins that are readily purified may be desirable. Such vectors include, but are not limited to, multifunctional E. coli cloning and expression vectors such as BLUESCRIPT (Stratagene), in which the PAP coding sequence may be ligated into the vector in-frame with sequences for the amino-terminal Met and the subsequent 7 residues of beta-galactosidase so that a hybrid protein is produced; PIN vectors (Van Heeke & Schuster JBiol Chem 264:5503-5509 1989)); PET vectors (Novagen, Madison Wis.); and the like. Expression vectors for bacteria include the various components set forth above, and are well known in the art. Examples include vectors for Bacillus subtilis, E. coli, Streptococcus cremoris, and Streptococcus lividans, among others. Bacterial expression vectors are transformed into bacterial host cells using techniques well known in the art, such as calcium chloride mediated transfection, electroporation, and others.
Expression in Yeast
Yeast expression systems are well known in the art, and include expression vectors for Saccharomyces cerevisiae, Candida albicans and C. mάltosa, Hansenula polymorpha, Kluyveromyces fragilis and K. lactis, Pichia guillermondii and Ppastoris, Schizosaccharomycespom.be, and Yarrowia lipolytica. Examples of suitable promoters for use in yeast hosts include the promoters for 3-phosphoglycerate kinase (Hitzeman et al., J. Biol. Chem. 255:2073 (1980)) or other glycolytic enzymes (Hess et al., J. Adv. Enzyme Reg. 7:149 (1968); Holland, Biochemistry 17:4900 (1978)), such as enolase, glyceraldehyde-3- phosphate dehydrogenase, hexoMnase, pyruvate.decarboxylase, phosphofructokinase, glucose- 6-phosphate isomerase, 3-phosphoglycerate mutase, pyruvate kinase, triosephosphate isomerase, phosphoglucose isomerase, alpha factor, the ADH2IGAPDH promoter, glucokinase alcohol oxidase, and PGH. See, for example, Ausubel, et al., 1990; Grant et al., Methods in En∑ymology 153:516-544, (1987). Other yeast promoters, which are inducible have the additional advantage of transcription controlled by growth conditions, include the promoter regions for alcohol dehydrogenase 2, isocytochrome C, acid phosphatase, degradative enzymes associated with nitrogen metabolism, metallothionein, glyceraldehyde-3-phosphate dehydrogenase, and enzymes responsible for maltose and galactose utilization. Suitable vectors and promoters for use in yeast expression are further described in EP 73,657. Yeast selectable markers include ADE2. HIS4. LEU2. TRPl. and ALG7, which confers resistance to tunicamycin; the neomycin phosphotransferase gene, which confers resistance to G418; and the CUPl gene, which allows yeast to grow in the presence of copper ions. Yeast expression vectors can be constructed for intracellular production or secretion of a PAP from the DNA encoding the PAP of interest. For example, a selected signal peptide and the appropriate constitutive or inducible promoter maybe inserted into suitable restriction sites in the selected plasmid for direct intracellular expression of the PAP. For secretion of the PAP, DNA encoding the PAP can be cloned into the selected plasmid, together with DNA encoding the promoter, the yeast alpha-factor secretory signal/leader sequence, and linker sequences (as needed), for expression of the PAP. Yeast cells, can then be transformed with the expression plasmids described above, and cultured in an appropriate fermentation media. The protein produced by such transformed yeast can then be concentrated by precipitation with 10% trichloroacetic acid and analyzed following separation by SDS-PAGE and staining of the gels with Coomassie Blue stain. The recombinant PAP can subsequently be isolated and purified from the fermentation medium by techniques known to those of skill in the art.
Expression in Mammalian Systems
The PAP may be expressed in mammalian cells. Mammalian expression systems are known in the art, and include retroviral vector mediated expression systems. Mammalian host cells may be transformed with any of a number of different viral-based expression systems, such as adenovirus, where the coding region can be ligated into an adenovirus transcription/translation complex consisting of the late promoter and tripartite leader sequence. Insertion in a nonessential El or E3 region of the viral genome results in a viable virus capable of expression of the polypeptide of interest in infected host cells. A preferred expression vector system is a retroviral vector system such as is generally described in PCT/US97/01019 and PCT/US97/101048. Suitable mammalian expression vectors contain a mammalian promoter which is any DNA sequence capable of binding mammalian KNA polymerase and initiating the downstream (3 ') transcription of a coding sequence for PAP into mRNA. A promoter will have a transcription initiating region, which is usually placed proximal to the 5' end of the coding sequence, and a TATA box, using a located 25-30 base pairs upstream of the transcription initiation site. The TATA box is thought to direct RNA polymerase II to begin RNA synthesis at the correct site. A mammalian promoter will also contain an upstream promoter element (enhancer element), typically located within 100 to 200 base pairs upstream of the TATA box. An upstream promoter element determines the rate at which transcription is initiated and can act in either orientation. Of particular use as mammalian promoters are the promoters from mammalian viral genes, since the viral genes are often highly expressed and have a broad host range. Examples include promoters obtained from the genomes of viruses such as polyoma virus, fowlpox virus (UK 2,211, 504 published JuI. 5,1989), adenovirus (such as Adenovirus 2), bovine papilloma virus, avian sarcoma virus, cytomegalovirus, a retrovirus, hepatitis-B virus and Simian Virus 40 (SV40), from heterologous mammalian promoters, e.g., the actin promoter or an immunoglobulin promoter, and from heat-shock promoters, provided such promoters are compatible with the host cell systems. Transcription of DNA encoding a PAP by higher eukaryotes may be increased by inserting an enhancer sequence into the vector. Enhancers are cis-acting elements of DNA, usually about from 10 to 300 bp, that act on a promoter to increase its transcription. Many enhancer sequences are now known from mammalian genes (globin, elastase, albumin, a-fetoprotein, and insulin). Typically, however, one will use an enhancer from a eukaryotic cell virus. Examples include the SV40 enhancer, the cytomegalovirus early promoter enhancer, the polyoma enhancer on the late side of the replication origin, and adenovirus enhancers. The enhancer is preferably located at a site 5' from the promoter. In general, the transcription termination and polyadenylation sequences recognized by mammalian cells are regulatory regions located 3' to the translation stop codon and thus, together with the promoter elements, flank the coding sequence. The 3' terminus of the mature mRNA is formed by site-specific post-translational cleavage and polyadenylation. Examples of transcription terminator and polyadenylation signals include those derived from SV40. Long term, high-yield production of recombinant proteins can be effected in a stable expression system. Expression vectors which contain viral origins of replication or endogenous expression elements and a selectable marker gene may be used for this purpose. Appropriate vectors containing selectable markers for use in mammalian cells are readily available commercially and are known to persons skilled in the art. Examples of such "selectable markers include, but are not limited to herpes simplex virus thymidine kinase and adenine phosphoribosyltransferase for use in tk- or hprt-cells, respectively. The methods of introducing exogenous nucleic acid into mammalian hosts, as well as other hosts, is well known in the art, and will vary with the host cell used. Techniques include dextran-mediated transfection, calcium phosphate precipitation, polybrene mediated transfection, protoplast fusion, electroporation, viral infection, encapsulation of the polynucleotide(s) in liposomes, and direct microinjection of the DNA into nuclei.
PAPs can be purified from culture supernatants of mammalian cells transiently transfected or stably transformed by an expression vector carrying a PAP-encoding sequence. Preferably, PAP is purified from culture supernatants of COS 7 cells transiently transfected by the pcD expression vector. Transfection of COS 7 cells with pcD proceeds as follows:
One day prior to transfection, approximately 10^ COS 7 monkey cells are seeded onto individual 100 mm plates in Dulbecco's modified Eagle medium (DME) containing 10% fetal calf serum and 2 mM glutamine. To perform the transfection, the medium is aspirated from each plate and replaced with 4 ml of DME containing 50 mM Tris.HCl pH 7.4, 400 mg/ml
DEAE-Dextran and 50 μg of plasmid DNA. The plates are incubated for four hours at 37°C, then the DNA-containing medium is removed, and the plates are washed twice with 5 ml of serum-free DME. DME is added back to the plates which are then incubated for an additional 3 hrs at 37°C. The plates are washed once with DME, after which DME containing 4% fetal calf serum, 2 mM glutamine, penicillin (100 U/L) and streptomycin (100 μg/L) at standard concentrations is added. The cells are then incubated for 72 hrs at 37°C, after which the growth medium is collected for purification of PAP. Plasmid DNA for the transfections is obtained by growing pcD(SRα), or like expression vector, containing the PAP-encoding cDNA insert in E. coli MC1061 (described by Casadaban and Cohen, J. MoI. Biol., Vol. 138, pgs. 179-207 (1980)), or like organism. The plasmid DNA is isolated from the cultures by standard techniques, e.g. Sambrook et al., Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, Second Edition (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, New York, 1989) or Ausubel et al (1990, cited above).
Expression in Insect Cells
PAPs may also be produced in insect cells. Expression vectors for the transformation of insect cells, and in particular, baculovirus-based expression vectors, are well known in the art. In one such system, the PAP-encoding DNA is fused upstream of an epitope tag contained within a baculovirus expression vector. Autographa californica nuclear polyhedrosis virus (AcNPV) is used as a vector to express foreign geaesΛtrSpodcptera frugiperda Sf9 cells or in Trichoplusia larvae. The PAP-encoding sequence is cloned into a nonessential region of the virus, such as the polyhedrin gene, and placed under control of the polyhedrin promoter. Successful insertion of a PAP-encoding sequence will render the polyhedrin gene inactive and produce recombinant virus lacking coat protein coat. The recombinant viruses are then used to infect S.frugiperda cells or Trichoplusia larvae in which the PAP is expressed (Smith et al., J. WoL 46:584 (1994); Engelhard E K et al., Proc. Nat. Acad. ScL 91:3224-3227 (1994)). Suitable epitope tags for fusion to the PAP-encoding DNA include poly-his tags and immunoglobulin tags (like Fc regions of IgG). A variety of plasmids may be employed, including commercially available plasmids such as pVL1393 (Novagen). Briefly, the PAP-encoding DNA or the desired portion of the PAP-encoding DNA is amplified by PCR with primers complementary to the 5 ' and 3 ' regions. The 5' primer may incorporate flanking restriction sites. The PCR product is then digested with the selected restriction enzymes and subcloned into an expression vector. Recombinant baculovirus is generated by co-transfecting the above plasmid and BaculoGoldTM virus DNA (Pharmingen) into Spodopterafrugiperda ("Sf9") cells (ATCC CRL 1711) using lipofectin (commercially available from GIBCO-BRL), or other methods known to those of skill in the art. Virus is produced by day 4-5 of culture in Sf9 cells at 280C, and used for further amplifications. Procedures are performed as further described in O'Reilley et al., BACULOVIRUSEXPRESSION VECTORS: A LABORATORY MANUAL, Oxford University Press (1994). Extracts may be prepared from recombinant virus-infected Sf9 cells as described in Rupert et al., Nature 362:175-179 (1993). Alternatively, expressed epitope- tagged PAP can be purified by affinity chromatography, or for example, purification of an IgG tagged (or Fc tagged) PAP can be performed using chromatography techniques, including Protein A or protein G column chromatography.
Evaluation of Gene Expression
Gene expression may be evaluated in a sample directly, for example, by standard techniques known to those of skill in the art, e.g., Northern blotting to determine the transcription of mRNA, dot blotting (DNA or RNA), or in situ hybridization, using an appropriately labeled probe, based on the sequences provided herein. Alternatively, antibodies may be used in assays for detection of polypeptides, nucleic acids, such as specific duplexes, including DNA duplexes, RNA duplexes, and DNA-RNA hybrid duplexes or DNA-protein duplexes. Such antibodies may.beJabeled and the.assay carried out where the duplex is bound to a surface, so that upon the formation of duplex on the surface, the presence of antibody bound to the duplex can be detected. Gene expression, alternatively, maybe measured by immunohistochemical staining of cells or tissue sections and assay of cell culture or body fluids, to directly evaluate the expression of a PAP polypeptide or polynucleotide. Antibodies useful for such immunological assays may be either monoclonal or polyclonal, and may be prepared against a native sequence PAP. Protein levels may also be detected by mass spectrometry. A further method of protein detection is with protein chips.
Purification of Expressed Protein
Expressed PAP may be purified or isolated after expression, using any of a variety of methods known to those skilled in the art. The appropriate technique will vary depending upon what other components are present in the sample. Contaminant components that are removed by isolation or purification are materials that would typically interfere with diagnostic or therapeutic uses for the polypeptide, and may include enzymes, hormones, and other solutes. The purification step(s) selected will depend, for example, on the nature of the production process used and the particular PAP produced. As PAPs are secreted, they may be recovered from culture medium. Alternatively, the PAP may be recovered from host cell lysates. If membrane-bound, it can be released from the membrane using a suitable detergent solution (e.g. Triton-X 100) or by enzymatic cleavage. Alternatively, cells employed in expression of PAP can be disrupted by various physical or chemical means, such as freeze- thaw cycling, sonication, mechanical disruption, or by use of cell lysing agents. Exemplary purification methods include, but are not limited to, ion-exchange column chromatography; chromatography using silica gel or a cation-exchange resin such as DEAE; gel filtration using, for example, Sephadex G-75; protein A Sepharose columns to remove contaminants such as IgG; chromatography using metal chelating columns to bind epitope-tagged forms of the PAP; ethanol precipitation; reverse phase HPLC; chromatofocusing; SDS-PAGE; and ammonium sulfate precipitation. Ordinarily, an isolated PAP will be prepared by at least one purification step. For example, the PAP may be purified using a standard anti-PAP antibody column. Ultrafiltration and dialysis techniques, in conjunction with protein concentration, are also useful (see, for example, Scopes, R., PROTEIN PURIFICATION, Springer-Verlag, New York, N. Y., 1982). The degree of purification necessary will vary depending on the use of tfie PAP. In some instances no purification will be necessary. Once expressed and purified as needed, the PAPs and nucleic acids of the present invention are useful in a number of applications, as detailed herein. Transgenic animals
The host cells of the invention can also be used to produce nonhuman transgenic animals. For example, in one embodiment, a host cell of the invention is a fertilized oocyte or an embryonic stem cell into which PAP-coding sequences have been introduced. Such host cells can then be used to create non-human transgenic animals in which exogenous PAP sequences have been introduced into their genome or homologous recombinant animals in which endogenous PAP sequences have been altered. Such animals are useful for studying the function and/or activity of a PAP or fragment thereof and for identifying and/or evaluating modulators of PAP biological activity. As used herein, a "transgenic animal" is a non-human animal, preferably a mammal, more preferably a rodent such as a rat or mouse, in which one or more of the cells of the animal include a transgene. Other examples of transgenic animals include non-human primates, sheep, dogs, cows, goats, chickens, amphibians, etc. A transgene is exogenous DNA which is integrated into the genome of a cell from which a transgenic animal develops and which remains in the genome of the mature animal, thereby directing the expression of an encoded gene product in one or more cell types or tissues of the transgenic animal. As used herein, a "homologous recombinant animal" is a non-human animal, preferably a mammal, more preferably a mouse, in which an endogenous gene has been altered by homologous recombination between the endogenous gene and an exogenous DNA molecule introduced into a cell of the animal, e.g., an embryonic cell of the animal, prior to development of the animal.
A transgenic animal of the invention can be created by introducing a PAP-encoding nucleic acid into the male pronuclei of a fertilized oocyte, e.g., by microinjection or retroviral infection, and allowing the oocyte to develop in a pseudopregnant female foster animal. The PAP cDNA sequence or a fragment thereof can be introduced as a transgene into the genome of a non-human animal. Alternatively, a nonhuman homologue of a human PAP-encoding gene, such as from mouse or rat, can be used as a transgene. Bitronic sequences and polyadenylation signals can also be included in the transgene to increase the efficiency of expression of the transgene. A tissue-specific regulatory sequence(s) can be operably linked to a PAP transgene to direct expression of a PAP to particular cells. Methods for generating transgenic animals via embryo manipulation and microinjection, particularly animals such as mice, have become conventional in the art and are described, for example, in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,736,866 and 4,870,009, both by Leder et al., U.S. Pat. No.4,873, 191 by Wagner et al. and in Hogan, B ., Manipulating the Mouse Embryo, (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N. Y., 1986, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). Similar methods are used for production of other transgenic animals. A transgenic founder animal can be identified based upon the presence of a PAP transgene in its genome and/or expression of PAP mRNA in tissues or cells of the animals. A transgenic founder animal can then be used to breed additional animals carrying the transgene. Moreover, transgenic animals carrying a transgene encoding a PAP can further be bred to other transgenic animals carrying other transgenes.
To create an animal in which a desired nucleic acid has been introduced into the genome via homologous recombination, a vector is prepared which contains at least a portion of a PAP-encoding sequence into which a deletion, addition or substitution has been introduced to thereby alter, e.g., functionally disrupt, the PAP-encoding sequence. The PAP- encoding sequence can be a human gene, but more preferably, is a non-human homologue of a human PAP-εncoding sequence (e.g., a cDNA isolated by stringent hybridization with a nucleotide sequence coding for a PAP). For example, a mouse PAP-encoding sequence can be used to construct a homologous recombination vector suitable for altering an endogenous gene in the mouse genome. In a preferred embodiment, the vector is designed such that, upon homologous recombination, the endogenous PAP-encoding sequence is functionally disrupted (i.e., no longer encodes a functional protein; also referred to as a "knock out" vector). Alternatively, the vector can be designed such that, upon homologous recombination, the endogenous PAP-encoding sequence is mutated or otherwise altered but still encodes functional protein (e.g., the upstream regulatory region can be altered to thereby alter the expression of the endogenous PAP-encoding sequence). Ih the homologous recombination vector, the altered portion of the PAP-encoding sequence is flanked at its 5' and 31 ends by additional nucleic acid sequence of the PAP gene to allow for homologous recombination to occur between the exogenous sequence carried by the vector and an endogenous gene in an embryonic stem cell. The additional flanking nucleic acid sequence is of sufficient length for successful homologous recombination with the endogenous gene. Typically, several kilobases of flanking DNA (both at the 51 and 3' ends) are included in the vector (see e.g., Thomas, K. R. and CapeccKi, M. R. (1987) Cell 51:503, the disclosure of which is incorporated .herein by reference in_its entirety, for a description of homologous recombination vectors). The vector is introduced into an embryonic stem cell line (e.g., by electroporation) and cells in which the introduced PAP-encoding sequence has homologously recombined with the endogenous gene are selected (see e.g., Li, E. et al. (1992) Cell 69:915, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). The selected cells are then injected into a blastocyst of an animal (e.g., a mouse) to form aggregation chimeras (see e.g., Bradley, A. in Teratocarcinomas and Embryonic Stem Cells. A Practical Approach, E. J. Robertson, ed. (JKL, Oxford, 1987) pp. 113-152, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). A chimeric embryo can then be implanted into a suitable pseudopregnant female foster animal and the embryo brought to term. Progeny harboring the homologously recombined DNA in their germ cells can be used to breed animals in which all cells of the animal contain the homologously recombined DNA by germline transmission of the transgene. Methods for constructing homologous recombination vectors and homologous recombinant animals are described further in Bradley, A. (1991) Current Opinion in
Biotechnology 2:823-829 and in PCT International Publication Nos.: WO 90/11354 by Le Mouellec et al.; WO 91/01140 by Smithies et al.; WO 92/0968 by Zijlstra et al.; and WO 93/04169 by Berns et al., the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties. In another embodiment, transgenic non-human animals can be produced which contain selected systems which allow for regulated expression of the transgene. One example of such a system is the cre/loxP recombinase system of bacteriophage Pl. For a description of the cre/loxP recombinase system, see, e.g., Lakso et al. (1992) PNAS 89:6232-6236, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirely. Another example of a recombinase system is the FLP recombinase system of Saccharomyces cerevisiae (O'Gorman et al. (1991) Science 251:1351-1355, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety). If a cre/loxP recombinase system is used to regulate expression of the transgene, animals containing transgenes encoding both the Cre recombinase and a selected protein are required. Such animals can be provided through the construction of "double" transgenic animals, e.g., by mating two transgenic animals, one containing a transgene encoding a selected protein and the other containing a transgene encoding a recombinase.
Assessing PAP activity It will be appreciated that the invention further provides methods of testing the activity of or obtaining functional fragments and variants of PAPs and PAP sequences. Such methods involve providing a variant or modified PAP-encoding nucleic acid and assessing whether the encoded polypeptide displays a PAP biological activity. Encompassed is thus a method of assessing the function of a PAP comprising: (a) providing a PAP, or a biologically active fragment or homologue thereof; and (b) testing said PAP, or a biologically active fragment or homologue thereof for a PAP biological activity under conditions suitable for PAP activity. Cell free, cell-based and in vivo assays may be used to test PAP activity. For example, said assay may comprise expressing a PAP nucleic acid in a host cell, and observing PAP activity in said cell and other affected cells. In another example, a PAP, or a biologically active fragment or homologue thereof is contacted with a cell, and a PAP biological activity is observed.
PAP biological activitiesjnclude: (1) having altered concentration levels in the bloodstream of women during the course of their pregnancy; (3) antigenicity, or the ability to bind an anti-PAP specific antibody; (4) immunogeniciry, or the ability to generate an anti- PAP specific antibody; (5) forming intermolecular amino acid side chain interactions such as hydrogen, amide, or preferably disulfide links; (6) being posttranslationally modified, especially by specific proteolysis and amidation; (7) interaction with a PAP target molecule; (8) promoting growth; (9) improving allogeneic graft survival; and (10) having immunomodulatory activities.
PAP biological activity can be assayed by any suitable method known in the art. Antigenicity and immunogenicity may be detected, for example, as described in the sections titled "Anti PAP antibodies" and "Uses of PAP antibodies". Circulation in blood serum may be detected as described in "Diagnostic and Prognostic Uses". Determining the ability of the PAP to bind to or interact with a PAP target molecule can be accomplished by a method for directly or indirectly determining binding, as is common to the art. Such methods are further described in the section titled "Drug Screening Assays."
Determining the ability of the PAP to bind to.or interact with a PAP target molecule can be accomplished by a method for directly or indirectly determining binding, as is common to the art. Such methods can be cell-based (e.g., such that binding to a membrane- bound PAP is detected) or cell free. Interaction of a test compound with a PAP can be detected, for example, by coupling the PAP or biologically active portion thereof with a label group such that binding of the PAP or biologically active portion thereof to its cognate target molecule can be determined by detecting the labeled PAP or biologically-active portion thereof in a complex. For example, the extent of complex formation may be measured by immunoprecipitating the complex or by performing gel electrophoresis. Determining the ability of the PAP to bind to a PAP target molecule may also be accomplished using a technology such as real-time Biomolecular Interaction Analysis (BIA). Sjolander, S. and Urbaniczky, C. (1991) Anal. Chem. 63:2338-2345 and Szabo et al. (1995) Curr. Opin. Struct. Biol. 5:699-705, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties. As used herein, "BIA" is a technology for studying biospecific interactions in real time, without labeling any of the interactants (e.g., BIAcore). Changes in the optical phenomenon of surface plasmon resonance (SPR) can be used as an indication of real-time reactions between biological molecules.
Intermolecular and intramolecular interactions may be detected by sequence-based structural predictions. Such predictions are generally based on X-ray.crystallography or NMR structural data for a polypeptide with similar sequence. Detection of intramolecular interactions may also be accomplished using SDS-PAGE. For the example of disulfide bonds, links formed between different portions of a given protein result in a more compacted protein, and thus, a reduced apparent molecular weight. Disulfide bonds may be disrupted by a reducing agent, for example, dithiothreitol (DTT). A protein sample that has been treated with a reducing agent may thus be compared to an untreated control by SDS-PAGE to detect a change in apparent molecular weight. Such methods are common to the art.
Amidation may be detected by comparing the molecular weight of a sample peptide to that of an amidated form of the same peptide. The amidated form may be prepared according to common methods, for example, as disclosed in US Patent 4708934. Molecular weights are easily compared according to any method common to the art such as SDS-PAGE, gel chromatography, or mass spectrometry. Proteolysis may also be detected by comparing the molecular weight of a sample peptide to that of a peptide of known molecular weight. Preferably, the molecular weight of a test peptide is obtained by mass spectrometry and compared to a database comprising molecular weights of peptides with posttranslational modifications. Exemplary databases include Genpept, SWISSPROT, EMBL, and the Protein Sequence Database. Such techniques are detailed further herein.
Anti-PAP Antibodies
The present invention provides antibodies and binding compositions specific for PAPs. Such antibodies and binding compositions include polyclonal antibodies, monoclonal antibodies, Fab and single chain Fv fragments thereof, bispecific antibodies, heteroconjugates, and humanized antibodies. Such antibodies and binding- compositions may be produced in a variety of ways, including hybridoma cultures, recombinant expression in bacteria or mammalian cell cultures, and recombinant expression in transgenic animals. There is abundant guidance in the literature for selecting a particular production methodology, e.g. Chadd and Chamow, Curr. Opin. Biotechnol., 12: 188-194 (2001).
The choice of manufacturing metibodology depends on several factors including the antibody structure desired, the importance of carbohydrate moieties on the antibodies, ease of culturing and purification, and cost. Many different antibody structures may be generated using standard expression technology, including full-length antibodies, antibody fragments, such as Fab and Fv fragments, as well as chimeric antibodies comprising components from different species. Antibody fragments of small size, such as Fab and Fv fragments, having no effector functions and limited pharmokinetic activity may be generated in a bacterial expression system. Single chain Fv fragments are highly selective for in vivo tumors, show good tumor penetration and low immunogenicity, and are cleared rapidly from the blood, e.g. Freyre et al, J. Biotechnol., 76: 157-163 (2000). Thus, such molecules are desirable for radioimmunodetection and in situ radiotherapy. Whenever pharmacokinetic activity in the form of increased half-life is required for therapeutic purposes, then full-length antibodies are preferable. For example, the immunoglobulin G (IgG) molecule may be one of four subclasses: γl , γ2, γ3, or γ4. If a full-length antibody with effector function is required, then IgG subclasses γl or γ3 are preferred, and IgG subclass γl is most preferred. The γl and γ3 subclasses exhibit potent effector function, complement activation, and promote antibody- dependent cell-mediated cytotoxicity through interaction with specific Fc receptors, e.g. Raju et al, Glycobiology, 10: 477-486 (2000); Lund et al, J. Immunol., 147: 2657-2662 (1991).
Polyclonal Antibodies
The anti-PAP antibodies of the present invention may be polyclonal antibodies. Such polyclonal antibodies can be produced in a mammal, for example, following one or more injections of an immunizing agent, and preferably, an adjuvant. Typically, the immunizing agent and/or adjuvant will be injected into the mammal by a series of subcutaneous or intraperitoneal injections. The immunizing agent may include PAPs or a fusion protein thereof. It may be useful to conjugate the antigen to a protein known to be immunogenic in the mammal being-immunized. Examples of such immunogenic proteins include, but are not limited to, keyhole limpet hemocyanin (KLH), methylated bovine serum albumin (mBSA), bovine serum albumin (BSA), Hepatitis B surface antigen, serum albumin, bovine thyroglobulin, and soybean trypsin inhibitor. Adjuvants include, for example, Freund's complete adjuvant and MPL-TDM adjuvant (monophosphoryl Lipid A, synthetic trehalose dicoryno-mycolate). The immunization protocol may be determined by one skilled in the art based on standard protocols or by routine experimentation.
Alternatively, a crude protein preparation which has been enriched for a PAP or a portion thereof can be used to generate antibodies. Such proteins, fragments or preparations are introduced into the non-human mammal in the presence of an appropriate adjuvant. If the serum contains polyclonal antibodies to undesired epitopes, the polyclonal antibodies are purified by immunoaffinity chromatography.
Effective polyclonal antibody production is affected by many factors related both to the antigen and the host species. Also, host animals vary in response to site of inoculations and dose, with both inadequate and excessive doses of antigen resulting in low titer antisera. Small doses (ng level) of antigen administered at multiple intradermal sites appear to be most reliable. Techniques for producing and processing polyclonal antisera are known in the art, see for example, Mayer and Walker (1987), the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. An effective immunization protocol for rabbits can be found in
Vaitukaitis, J. et al. J. Clin. Endocrinol. Metab. 33:988-991(1971), the disclosure of which is incorporated by reference in its entirely. Booster injections can be given at regular intervals, and antiserum harvested when antibody titer thereof, as determined semi-quantitatively, for example, by double immunodiffusion in agar against known concentrations of the antigen, begins to fall. See, for example, Ouchterlony, O. et al., Chap. 19 in: Handbook of
Experimental Immunology D. Wier (ed) Blackwell (1973). Plateau concentration of antibody is usually in the range of 0.1 to 0.2 mg/ml of serum. Affinity of the antisera for the antigen is determined by preparing competitive binding curves, as described, for example, by Fisher, D., Chap.42 in: Manual of Clinical Immunology, 2d Ed. (Rose and Friedman, Eds.) Amer. Soc. For Microbiol., Washington, D. C. (1980).
Monoclonal Antibodies
Alternatively, the anti-PAP antibodies may be monoclonal antibodies. Monoclonal antibodies may be produced by hybridomas, wherein a mouse, hamster, or other appropriate host animal, is immunized with an immunizing agent to elicit lymphocytes that produce or are capable of producing antibodies that will specifically bind to the immunizing agent, e.g. Kohler and Milstein, Nature 256:495 (1975). The immunizing agent will typically include the PAP or a fusion protein thereof and optionally a carrier. Alternatively, the lymphocytes may be immunized in vitro. Generally, spleen cells or lymph node cells are used if non-human mammalian sources are desired, or peripheral blood lymphocytes ("PBLs") are used if cells of human origin are desired. The lymphocytes are fused with an immortalized cell line using a suitable fusing agent, such as polyethylene glycol, to produce a hybridoma cell, e.g. Goding, MONOCLONAL ANTIBODIES: PRINCIPLES AND PRACΗCE, Academic Press, pp. 59-103 (1986); Liddell and Cryer, A Practical Guide to Monoclonal Antibodies (John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1991); Malik and Lillenoj, Editors, Antibody Techniques (Academic Press, New York, 1994). In general, immortalized cell lines are transformed mammalian cells, for example, myeloma cells of rat, mouse, bovine or human origin. The hybridoma cells are cultured in a suitable culture medium that preferably contains one or more substances that inhibit the growth or survival of unfused, immortalized cells. For example, if the parental cells lack the enzyme hypoxanthine guanine phosphoribosyl transferase (HGPRT), the culture medium for the hybridomas typically will include hypoxanthine, aminopterin, and thymidine (HAT)5 substances which prevent the growth of HGPRT-deficient cells. Preferred immortalized cell lines are those that fuse efficiently, support stable high level production of antibody, and are sensitive to a medium such as HAT medium. More preferred immortalized cell lines are murine or human myeloma lines, which can be obtained, for example, from the American Type Culture Collection (ATCC), Rockville, MD. Human myeloma and mouse-human heteromyeloma cell lines also have been described for the production of human monoclonal antibodies, e.g. Kozbor, J. Immunol. 133:3001 (1984); Brodeur et al., Monoclonal Antibody Production Techniques and Applications, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, pp. 51-63 (1987).
The culture medium (supernatant) in which the hybridoma cells are cultured can be assayed for the presence of monoclonal antibodies directed against a PAP. Preferably, the binding specificity of monoclonal antibodies present in the hybridoma supernatant is determined by immunoprecipitation or by an in vitro binding assay, such as radio¬ immunoassay (RlA) or Enzyme-Linked Immuno Sorbent Assay (ELISA). Appropriate techniques and assays are known in the art. The binding affinity of the monoclonal antibody can, for example, be determined by the Scatchard analysis of Munson and Pollard, Anal. Biochem. 107:220 (1980). After the desired antibody-producing hybridoma cells are identified, the cells may be cloned by limiting dilution procedures and grown by-standard methods (Goding, 1986, supra). Suitable culture media for this purpose include, for example, Dulbecco's Modified Eagle's Medium and RPMI-1640 medium. Alternatively, the hybridoma cells may be grown in vivo as ascites in a mammal. The monoclonal antibodies secreted by selected clones may be isolated or purified from the culture medium or ascites fluid by immunoglobulin purification procedures routinely used by those of skill in the art such as, for example, protein A-Sepharose, hydroxyl-apatite chromatography, gel electrophoresis, dialysis, or affinity chromatography.
The monoclonal antibodies may also be made by recombinant DNA methods, such as those described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,816,567. DNA encoding the monoclonal antibodies of the invention can be isolated from the PAP-specific hybridoma cells and sequenced, e.g., by using oligonucleotide probes that are capable of binding specifically to genes encoding the heavy and light chains of murine antibodies. Once isolated, the DNA may be inserted into an expression vector, which is then transfected into host cells such as simian COS cells, Chinese hamster ovary (CHO) cells, or myeloma cells that do not otherwise produce immunoglobulin protein, to obtain the synthesis of monoclonal antibodies in the recombinant host cells. The DNA also may be modified, for example, by substituting the coding sequence for the murine heavy and light chain constant domains for the homologous human sequences (Morrison et al, Proc. Nat. Acad. ScL 81:6851-6855 (1984); Neuberger et al., Nature 312:604-608 (1984); Takeda et al., Nature 314:452-454 (1985)), or by covalently joining to the immunoglobulin coding sequence all or part of the coding sequence for a non-immunoglobulin polypeptide. The non-immunoglobulin polypeptide can be substituted for the constant domains of an antibody of the invention, or can be substituted for the variable domains of one antigen- combining site of an antibody of the invention to create a chimeric bivalent antibody. The antibodies may also be monovalent antibodies. Methods for preparing monovalent antibodies are well known in the art. For example, in vitro methods are suitable for preparing monovalent antibodies. Digestion of antibodies to produce fragments thereof, particularly, Fab fragments, can be accomplished using routine techniques known in the art.
Antibodies and antibody fragments characteristic of hybridomas of the invention can also be produced by recombinant means by extracting messenger RNA, constructing a cDNA library, and selecting clones which encode segments of the antibody molecule. The following are exemplary references disclosing recombinant techniques for producing antibodies: Wall et al., Nucleic Acids Research, Vol. 5, pgs. 311.3τ3128 (1978); Zakut et al., Nucleic Acids Research, Vol. 8, pgs. 3591-3601 (1980); Cabilly et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. ScL, Vol. 81, pgs. 3273-3277 (1984); Boss et al., Nucleic Acids Research, Vol. 12, pgs. 3791- 3806 (1984); Amster et al., Nucleic Acids Research, Vol. 8, pgs. 2055-2065 (1980); Moore et al., U.S. Patent 4,642,334; Skerra et al, Science, Vol. 240, pgs. 1038-1041(1988); Huse et al, Science, Vol. 246, pgs. 1275-1281 (1989); and U.S. patents 6,054,297; 5,530,101; 4,816,567; 5,750,105; and 5,648,237; which patents are incorporated by reference. Ih particular, such techniques can be used to produce interspecific monoclonal antibodies, wherein the binding region of one species is combined with non-binding region of the antibody of another species to reduce immunogenicity, e.g. Liu et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., Vol. 84, pgs. 3439-3443 (1987), and patents 6,054,297 and 5,530,101. Preferably, recombinant^ produced Fab and Fv fragments are expressed in bacterial host systems. Preferably, full-length antibodies are produced by mammalian cell culture techniques. More preferably, full-length antibodies are expressed in Chinese Hamster Ovary (CHO) cells or NSO cells.
Both polyclonal and monoclonal antibodies can be screened by ELISA. As in other solid phase immunoassays, the test is based on the tendency of macromolecules to adsorb nonspecifically to plastic. The irreversibiliry of this reaction, without loss of immunological activity, allows the formation of antigen-antibody complexes with a simple separation of such complexes from unbound material. To titrate anti-peptide serum, peptide conjugated to a carrier different from that used in immunization is adsorbed to the wells of a 96-well microliter plate. The adsorbed antigen is then allowed to react in the wells with dilutions of anti-peptide serum. Unbound antibody is washed away, and the remaining antigen-antibody complexes are allowed to react with an antibody specific for the IgG of the immunized animal. This second antibody is conjugated to an enzyme such as alkaline phosphatase. A visible colored reaction produced when the enzyme substrate is added indicates which wells have bound antipeptide antibodies. The use of spectrophotometer readings allows better quantification of the amount of peptide-specific antibody bound. High-titer antisera yield a linear titration curve between 10~3 and 10"^ dilutions.
PAP peptide carriers
The invention includes immunogens derived from PAPs, and immunogens comprising conjugates between carriers and peptides of the invention. The term immunogen as used herein refers to a substance which is capable of causing an immune response. The term carrier as used herein refers to any substance which when chemically conjugated to a peptide of the invention permits a host organism immunized with the resulting conjugate to generate antibodies specific for the conjugated peptide. Carriers include red blood cells, bacteriophages, proteins, or synthetic particles such as agarose beads. Preferably, carriers are proteins, such as serum albumin, gamma-globulin, keyhole limpet hemocyanin (KLH), tftyroglobulin, ovalbumin, or fibrinogen.
The general technique of linking synthetic peptides to a carrier is described in several references, e.g. Walter and Doolittle, "Antibodies Against Synthetic Peptides," in Setlow et al., eds., Genetic Engineering, Vol. 5, pgs. 61-91 (Plenum Press, N.Y., 1983); Green et al. Cell, Vol. 28, pgs. 477-487 (1982); Lerner et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., Vol. 78, pgs. 3403- 3407 (1981); Shimizu et al., U.S. Patent 4,474,754; and Ganfield et al., U.S. Patent 4,311,639. Accordingly, these references are incorporated by reference. Also, techniques employed to link haptens to carriers are essentially the same as the above-referenced techniques, e.g. chapter 20 in Tijssen, Practice and Theory of Enzyme Immunoassays
(Elsevier, New York, 1985). The four most commonly used schemes for attaching a peptide to a carrier are (1) glutaraldehyde for amino coupling, e.g. as disclosed by Kagan and Glick, in Jaffe and Behrman, eds. Methods of Hormone Radioimmunoassay, pgs. 328-329 (Academic Press, N. Y., 1979), and Walter et al. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., Vol. 77, pgs. 5197- 5200 (1980); (2) water-soluble carbodirmides for carboxyl to amino coupling, e.g. as disclosed by Hoare et al., J. Biol. Chem., Vol. 242, pgs. 2447-2453 (1967); (3) bis- diazobenzidine (BDB) for tyrosine to tyrosine sidechain coupling, e.g. as disclosed by Bassiri et al., pgs. 46-47, in Jaffe and Behrman, eds. (cited above), and Walter et al. (cited above); and (4) maleimidobenzoyl-N-hydroxysuccinimide ester (MBS) for coupling cysteine (or other sulfhydryls) to amino groups, e.g. as disclosed by Kitagawa et al., J. Biochem. (Tokyo), Vol. 79, pgs. 233-239 (1976), and Lerner et al. (cited above). A general rule for selecting an appropriate method for coupling a given peptide to a protein carrier can be stated as follows: the group involved in attachment should occur only once in the sequence, preferably at the appropriate end of the segment. For example, BDB should not be used if a tyrosine residue occurs in the main part of a sequence chosen for its potentially antigenic character.
Similarly, centrally located lysines rule out the glutaraldehyde method, and the occurrences of aspartic and glutamic acids frequently exclude the carbodiimide approach. On the other hand, suitable residues can be positioned at either end of chosen sequence segment as attachment sites, whether or not they occur in the" "native" protein sequence. Internal segments, unlike the amino-and-carboxy termini, will-differ significantly at the "unattached end" from the same sequence as it is found in the native protein where the polypeptide backbone is continuous. The problem can be remedied, to a degree, by acetylating the α- amino group and then attaching the peptide by way of its carboxy terminus. The coupling efficiency to the carrier protein is conveniently measured by using a radioactively labeled peptide, prepared either by using a radioactive amino acid for one step of the synthesis or by labeling the completed peptide by the iodination of a tyrosine residue. The presence of tyrosine in the peptide also allows one to set up a sensitive radioimmune assay, if desirable. Therefore, tyrosine can be introduced as a terminal residue if it is not part of the peptide sequence defined by the native polypeptide.
Preferred carriers are proteins, and preferred protein carriers include bovine serum albumin, myoglobulin, ovalbumin (OVA)5 keyhole limpet hemocyanin (KLH), or the like. Peptides can be linked to KLHLthrough cysteines by MBS as disclosed by Liu et al., Biochemistry, Vol. 18, pgs. 690-697 (1979). The peptides are dissolved in phosphate- buffered saline (pH 7.5), 0.1 M sodium borate buffer (pH 9.0) or 1.0 M sodium acetate buffer (pH 4.0). The pH for the dissolution of the peptide is chosen to optimize peptide solubility. The content of free cysteine for soluble peptides is determined by Ellman's method, Ellman, Arch. Biochem. Biophys., Vol. 82, pg. 7077 (1959). For each peptide, 4 mg KLH in 0.25 ml of 10 mM sodium phosphate buffer (pH 7.2) is reacted with 0.7 mg MBS (dissolved in dimethyl formamide) and stirred for 30 min at room temperature. The MBS is added dropwise to ensure that the local concentration of formamide is not too high, as KLH is insoluble in >30% formamide. The reaction product, KLH-MBS, is then passed through Sephadex G-25 equilibrated with 50 mM sodium phosphate buffer (pH 6.0) to remove free MBS, KLH recovery from peak fractions of the column eluate (monitored by OD280) is estimated to be approximately 80%. KLH-MBS is then reacted with 5 mg peptide dissolved in 1 ml of the chosen buffer. The pH is adjusted to 7-7.5 and the reaction is stirred for 3 hr at room temperature. Coupling efficiency is monitored with radioactive peptide by dialysis of a sample of the conjugate against phosphate-buffered saline, and may range from 8% to 60%. Once the peptide-carrier conjugate is available, polyclonal or monoclonal antibodies " are produced by standard techniques, e.g. as disclosed by Campbell, Monoclonal Antibody Technology (Elsevier, New York, 1984); Hurrell, ed. Monoclonal Hybridoma Antibodies: Techniques and Applications (CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, 1982); Schreier et al. Hybridoma Techniques (Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, New York, 1980); U.S. Patent 4,562,003; or the like. In particular, U.S. Patent 4,562,003 is incorporated by reference. Humanized Antibodies
The anti-PAP antibodies of the invention may further comprise humanized antibodies or human antibodies. The term "humanized antibody" refers to humanized forms of non- human (e.g., murine) antibodies that are chimeric antibodies, immunoglobulin chains or fragments thereof (such as Fv, Fab, Fab', F(ab'), or other antigen-binding partial sequences of antibodies) which contain some portion of the sequence derived from non-human antibody. Humanized antibodies include human immunoglobulins in which residues from a complementary determining region (CDR) of the human immunoglobulin are replaced by residues from a CDR of a non-human species such as mouse, jat .orrabbit having the desired binding specificity, affinity and capacity. In general, the humanized antibody will comprise substantially all of at least one, and generally two, variable domains, in which all or substantially all of the CDR regions correspond to those of a non-human immunoglobulin and all or substantially all of the FR regions are those of a human immunoglobulin consensus sequence. The humanized antibody optimally also will comprise at least a portion of an immunoglobulin constant region (Fc), typically that of a human immunoglobulin (Jones et al., Nature 321:522-525 (1986) and Presta, Curr. Op. Struct. Biol. 2:593-596 (1992)). Methods for humanizing non-human antibodies are well known in the art. Generally, a humanized antibody has one or more amino acids introduced into it from a source which is non-human in order to more closely resemble a human antibody, while still retaining the original binding activity of the antibody. Methods for humanization of antibodies are further detailed in Jones et al., Nature 321:522-525 (1986); Riechmann et al., Nature 332:323-327 (1988); and Verhoeyen et al., Science 239:1534-1536 (1988). Such "humanized" antibodies are chimeric antibodies in that substantially less than an intact human variable domain has been substituted by the corresponding sequence from a non-human species.
Heteroconjugate Antibodies
Heteroconjugate antibodies which comprise two covalently joined antibodies, are also within the scope of the present invention. Heteroconjugate antibodies may be prepared in vitro using known methods in synthetic protein chemistry, including those involving crosslinking agents. For example, immunotoxins may be prepared using a disulfide exchange reaction or by forming a thioether bond. Bispecific Antibodies
Bispecific antibodies have binding specificities for at least two different antigens. Such antibodies are monoclonal, and preferably human or humanized. One of the binding specificities of a bispecific antibody of the present invention is for a PAP, and the other one is preferably for a cell-surface protein or receptor or receptor submit. Methods for making bispecific antibodies are known in the art, and in general, the recombinant production of bispecific antibodies is based on the co-expression of two immunoglobulin heavy-chain/light- chain pairs in hybridoma cells, where the two heavy chains have different specificities, e.g. Milstein and Cuello, Nature 305:537-539 (1983). Given that the random assortment of immunoglobulin heavy and light chains results in production of potentially ten different antibody molecules by the hybridomas, purification of the correct molecule usually requires some sort of affinity purification, e.g. affinity chromatography.
Uses of PAP antibodies PAP antibodies are preferably specific for the PAPs of the invention and as such, do not bind peptides derived from other proteins with high affinity. As used herein, the term "heavy chain variable region" means a polypeptide (1) which is from 110 to 125 amino acids in length, and (2) whose amino acid sequence corresponds to that of a heavy chain of an antibody of the invention, starting from the heavy chain's N-terminal amino acid. Likewise, the term "light chain variable region" means a polypeptide (1) which is from 95 to 115 amino acids in length, and (2) whose amino acid sequence corresponds to that of a light chain of an antibody of the invention, starting from the light chain's N-terminal amino acid. As used herein the term "monoclonal antibody" refers to homogeneous populations of immunoglobulins which are capable of specifically binding to PAPs. PAP antibodies may be used as functional modulators, most commonly as antagonists. Preferably, antibody modulators of the invention are derived from monoclonal antibodies specific for PAPs. Monoclonal antibodies capable of blocking, or neutralizing, PAPs are generally selected by their ability to inhibit a PAP biological activity.
The use o"f antibody fragments is also well known, e.g. Fab fragments: Tijssen, Practice and Theory of Enzyme Immunoassays (Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1985); and Fv fragments: Hochman et al. Biochemistry, Vol. 12, pgs. 1130-1135 (1973), Sharon et al., Biochemistry, Vol. 15, pgs. 1591-1594 (1976) and Ehrlich et al., U.S. Patent 4,355,023; and antibody half molecules: Auditore- Hargreaves, U.S. Patent 4,470,925. Preferably, monoclonal antibodies, Fv fragments, Fab fragments, or other binding compositions derived from monoclonal antibodies of the invention have a high affinity to PAPs. The affinity of monoclonal antibodies and related molecules to PAPs may be measured by conventional techniques including plasmon resonance, ELISA, or equilibrium dialysis. Affinity measurement by plasmon resonance techniques may be carried out, for example, using a BIAcore 2000 instrument (Biacore AB, Uppsala, Sweden) in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended protocol. Preferably, affinity is measured by ELISA, as described in U.S. patent 6,235,883, for example. Preferably, the dissociation constant between PAPs and monoclonal antibodies of the invention is less than 10'5 molar. More preferably, such dissociation constant is less than 10"8 molar; still more preferably, such dissociation constant is less than lO'9 molar; and most preferably, such dissociation constant is in the range of 10"9 to 10'11 molar.
In addition, the antibodies of the present invention are useful for detecting PAPs. Such detection methods are advantageously applied to diagnosis of PAP-related disorders. The antibodies of the invention may be used in most assays involving antigen-antibody reactions. The assays may be homogeneous or heterogeneous. In a homogeneous assay approach, the sample can be a biological sample or fluid such as serum, urine, whole blood, lymphatic fluid, plasma, saliva, cells, tissue, and material secreted by cells or tissues cultured in vitro. The sample can be pretreated if necessary to remove unwanted materials. The immunological reaction usually involves the specific antibody, a labeled analyte, and the sample suspected of containing the antigen. The signal arising from the label is modified, directly or indirectly, upon the binding of the antibody to the labeled analyte. Both immunological reaction and detection of the extent thereof are carried out in a homogeneous solution. Immunochemical labels which may be employed include free radicals, fluorescent dyes, enzymes, bacteriophages, coenzymes, and so forth.
Ih a heterogeneous assay approach, the reagents are usually the sample, the specific antibody, and means for producing a detectable signal. The specimen is generally placed on a support, such as a plate or a slide, and contacted with the antibody in a liquid phase. The support is then separated from the liquid phaSe and either the support phase or the liquid phase is examined for a detectable signal employing means for producing such signal or signal producing system. The signal is related to the presence of the antigen in the sample. Means for producing a detectable signal includes the use of radioactive labels, fluorescent compounds, enzymes, and so forth. Exemplary heterogeneous immunoassays are the radioimmunoassay, immunofluorescence methods, enzyme-linked immunoassays, and the like.
For a more detailed discussion of the above immunoassay techniques, see "Enzyme- Lnmunoassay," by Edward T. Maggio, CRC Press, Inc., Boca Raton, FIa., 1980. See also, for example, U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,690,834; 3,791,932; 3,817,837; 3,850,578; 3,853,987; 3,867,517; 3,901,654; 3,935,074; 3,984,533; 3,966,345; and 4,098,876, which listing is not intended to be exhaustive. Methods for conjugating labels to antibodies and antibody fragments are well known in the art. Such methods may be found in U.S. Pat. Nos.4,220,450; 4,235,869; 3,935,974; and 3,966,345-Another example of a technique in which the antibodies of the invention may be employed is immunoperoxidase labeling. (Sternberger,
Bnmunocytochemistry (1979) pp. 104-169). Alternatively, the antibodies maybe bound to a radioactive material or to a drug to form a radiopharmaceutical or pharmaceutical, respectively. (Carrasquillo, et al., Cancer Treatment Reports (1984) 68:317-328).
One embodiment of an assay employing an antibody of the present invention involves the use of a surface to which the monoclonal antibody of the invention is attached. The underlying structure of the surface may take different forms, have different compositions and maybe a mixture of compositions or laminates or combinations thereof. The surface may assume a variety of shapes and forms and may have varied dimensions, depending on the manner of use and measurement. Illustrative surfaces may be pads, beads, discs, or strips which may be flat, concave or convex. Thickness is not critical, generally being from about 0.1 to 2 mm thick and of any convenient diameter or other dimensions. The surface typically will be supported on a rod, tube, capillary, fiber, strip, disc, plate, cuvette and will typically be porous and polyfunctional or capable of being polyfunctionalized so as to permit covalent binding of an antibody and permit bonding of other compounds which form a part of a means for producing a detectable signal. A wide variety of organic and inorganic polymers, both natural and synthetic, and combinations thereof, may be employed as the material for the solid surface. Illustrative polymers include polyethylene, polypropylene, poly(4- methylbutene), polystyrene, polymethracrylate, poly(ethylene terephthalate), rayon, nylon, poly(vinyl butyrate), silicones, polyformaldehyde, cellulose, cellulose acetate, nitrocellulose, and latex. Other surfaces include paper, glasses, ceramics, metals, metaloids, semiconductor materials, cements, silicates or the like. Also included are substrates that form gels, gelatins, lipopolysaccharides, silicates, agarose and polyacrylamides or polymers which form several aqueous phases such as dextrans, polyalkylene glycols (alkylene of 2 to 3 carbon atoms) or surfactants such as phospholipids. The binding of the antibody to the surface may be accomplished by well known techniques, commonly available in the literature (see, for example, "Immobilized Enzymes," Ichiro Chibata, Press, New York (1978) and Cuatrecasas, J. Bio. Chem., 245: 3059 (1970)). In carrying out the assay in accordance with this aspect of the invention, the sample is mixed with aqueous medium and the medium is contacted with the surface having an antibody bound thereto. Labels may be included in the aqueous medium, either concurrently or added subsequently so as to provide a detectable signal associated with the surface. The means for producing the detectable signal can involve the incorporation of a labeled analyte or it may involve the use of a. second jnonoclonal antibody having a label conjugated thereto. Separation and washing steps will be carried out as needed. The signal detected is related to the presence of PAP in the sample. It is within the scope of the present invention to include a calibration on the same support. A particular embodiment of an assay in accordance with the present invention, by way of illustration and not limitation, involves the use of a support such as a slide or a well of apetri dish. The technique involves fixing the sample to be analyzed on the support with an appropriate fixing material and incubating the sample on the slide with a monoclonal antibody. After washing with an appropriate buffer such as, for example, phosphate buffered saline, the support is contacted with a labeled specific binding partner for the antibody. After incubation as desired, the slide is washed a second time with an aqueous buffer and the determination is made of the binding of the labeled monoclonal antibody to the antigen. If the label is fluorescent, the slide may be covered with a fluorescent antibody mounting fluid on a cover slip and then examined with a fluorescent microscope to determine the extent of binding. On the other hand, the label can be an enzyme conjugated to the monoclonal antibody and the extent of binding can be determined by examining the slide for the presence of enzyme activity, which may be indicated by the formation of a precipitate, color, etc. A particular example of an assay utilizing the present antibodies is a double determinant ELISA assay. A support such as, e.g., a glass or vinyl plate, is coated with an antibody specific for PAP by conventional techniques. The support is contacted with the sample suspected of containing PAP, usually in aqueous medium. After an incubation period from 30 seconds to 12 hours, the support is separated from the medium, washed to remove unbound PAP with, for example, water or an aqueous buffered medium, and contacted with an antibody specific for PAP, again usually in aqueous medium. The antibody is labeled with an enzyme directly or indirectly such as, e.g., horseradish peroxidase or alkaline phosphatase. After incubation, the support is separated from the medium, and washed as above. The enzyme activity of the support or the aqueous medium is determined. This enzyme activity is related to the amount of PAP in the sample.
The invention also includes kits, e.g., diagnostic assay kits, for carrying out the methods disclosed above. In one embodiment, the kit comprises in packaged combination (a) a monoclonal antibody more specifically defined above and (b) a conjugate of a specific binding partner for the above monoclonal antibody and a label capable of producing a detectable signal. The reagents may also include ancillary agents such as buffering agents and protein stabilizing agents, e.g., polysaccharides and the like. The kit may further include, where necessary, other members of the signal producing system of which system the label is a member, agents for reducing background interference in a test, control reagents, apparatus for conducting a test, and the like. In another embodiment, the diagnostic kit comprises a conjugate of monoclonal antibody of the invention and a label capable of producing a detectable signal. Ancillary agents as mentioned above may also be present. Further, an anti-PAP antibody (e.g., monoclonal antibody) can be used to isolate
PAPs by standard techniques, such as affinity chromatography or immunoprecipitation. For example, an anti-PAP antibody can facilitate the purification of natural PAPs from cells and of recombinantly produced PAP expressed in host cells. Moreover, an-anti-PAP antibody can be used to isolate PAP to aid in detection of low concentrations of PAP (e.g., in serum, cellular lysate or cell supernatant) or in order to evaluate the abundance and pattern of expression of the PAP. Anti-PAP antibodies can be used diagnostically to monitor protein levels in tissue as part of a clinical testing procedure, e.g., to determine the efficacy of a given treatment regimen. Detection can be facilitated by coupling (i.e., physically linking) the antibody to a label group.
Protein Arrays
Detection, purification, and screening of the polypeptides of the invention may be accomplished using retentate chromatography (preferably, protein arrays or chips), as described by U.S. Patent 622*5027 and U.S. Patent Application 20010014461, disclosures of which are herein incorporated by reference in their entireties. Briefly, retentate chromatography describes methods in which polypeptides (and/ or other sample components) are retained on an adsorbent (e.g., array or chip) and subsequently detected. Such methods involve (1) selectively adsorbing polypeptides from a sample to a substrate under a plurality of different adsorbent/eluant combinations ("selectivity conditions") and (2) detecting the retention of adsorbed polypeptides by desorption spectrometry (e.g., by mass spectrometry). In conventional chromatographic methods, polypeptides are eluted off of the adsorbent prior to detection. The coupling of adsorption chromatography with detection by desorption spectrometry provides extraordinary sensitivity, the ability to rapidly analyze retained components with a variety of different selectivity conditions, and parallel processing of components adsorbed to different sites (i.e., "affinity sites" or "spots") on the array under different elution conditions.
These methods are useful for: combinatorial, biochemical separation and purification of the PAPs; study of differential gene expression; detection of differences in protein levels (e.g., for diagnosis); and detection of molecular recognition events (e.g., for screening and drug discovery). Thus, this invention provides a molecular discovery and diagnostic device that is characterized by the inclusion of both parallel and multiplex polypeptide processing capabilities. Polypeptides of the invention and PAP-binding substances are preferably attached to a label group, and thus directly detected, enabling simultaneous transmission of two or more signals from the same "circuit" (i.e., addressable "chip" location) during a single unit operation.
Detection of PAPs by mass spectrometry In accordance with the present invention, any instrument, method, process, etc. can be utilized to determine the identity and abundance of proteins in a sample. A preferred method of obtaining identity is by mass spectrometry, where protein molecules in a sample are ionized and then the resultant mass and charge of the protein ions are detected and determined. To use mass spectrometry to analyze proteins, it is preferred that the protein be converted to a gas-ion phase. Various methods of protein ionization are useful, including, e.g., fast ion bombardment (FAB), plasma desorption, laser desorption, thermal desorption, preferably, electrospray ionization (ESI) and matrix-assisted laser desorption/ionization (MALDI). Many different mass analyzers are available for peptide and protein analysis, including, but not limited to, Time-of-Flight (TOF), ion trap (ITMS), Fourier transform ion cyclotron (FTMS), quadrupole ion trap, and sector (electric and/or magnetic) spectrometers. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,572,025 for an ion trap MS. Mass analyzers can be used alone, or in combination with other mass analyzers in tandem mass spectrometers. In trie latter case, a first mass analyzer can be use to separate the protein ions (precursor ion) from each other and determine the molecular weights of the various protein constituents in the sample. A second mass analyzer can be used to analyze each separated constituents, e.g., by fragmenting the precursor ions into product ions by using, e.g. an inert gas. Any desired combination of mass analyzers can be used, including, e.g., triple quadrupoles, tandem time-of-flights, ion traps, and/or combinations thereof.
Different kinds of detectors can be used to detect the protein ions. For example, destructive detectors can be utilized, such as ion electron multipliers or cryogenic detectors (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,640,010). Additionally, non-destructive detectors can be used, such as ion traps which are used as ion current pick-up devices in quadrupole ion trap mass analyzers or FTMS.
For MALDI-TOF, a number of sample preparation methods can be utilized including, dried droplet (Karasand Hillenkamp, Anal. Chem., 60:2299-2301, 1988), vacuum-drying (Wϊnberger et al., In Proceedings of the 41st ASMS Conference on Mass Spectrometry and Allied Topics, San Francisco, May 31-June 4, 1993, pp. 775a-b), crush crystals (Xiang et al., Rapid Comm. Mass Spectrom., 8:199-204,1994), slow crystal growing (Xiang et al., Org. Mass Spectrom, 28:1424-1429, 1993); active film (Mock et al., Rapid Comm. Mass Spectrom.,6:233-238, 1992; Bai et al., Anal. Chem., 66:3423-3430, 1994), pneumatic spray (Kochling et al., Proceedings of the 43rd ASMS Conference on Mass Spectrometry and Allied Topics; Atlanta, GA, May 21-26, 1995, pl225); electrospray (Hensel et al.,
Proceedings of the 43rd ASMS Conference on Mass Spectrometry and Allied Topics; Atlanta, GA, May 21 -26, 1995, p947); fast solvent evaporation (Vorm et al., Anal. Chem., 66:3281-3287, 1994); sandwich (Li et al., J. Am. Chem. Soc, 11 8:11662-11663,1996); and two-layer methods (Dal et al., Anal. Chem., 71:1087-1091, 1999). See also, e.g., Liang et al., Rapid Commun. Mass Spectrom., 10: 1219-1226, 1996; van Adrichemet al., Anal. Chem., 70:923-930, 1998.
For MALDI analysis, samples are prepared as solid-state co-crystals or thin films by mixing them with an energy absorbing compound or colloid (the matrix) in the liquid phase, and ultimately drying the solution to the solid state upon the surface of an inert probe. In some cases an energy absorbing molecule (EAM) is an integral component of the sample presenting surface. Regardless of EAM application strategy, the probe contents are allowed to dry to the solid state prior to introduction into the laser desorption/ionization time-of-flight mass spectrometer (LDIMS). Ion detection in TOF mass spectrometry is typically achieved with the use of electro- emissive detectors such as electron multipliers (EMP) or microchannel plates (MCP). Both of these devices function by converting primary incident charged particles into a cascade of secondary, tertiary, quaternary, etc. electrons. The probability of secondary electrons being generated by the impact of a single incident charged particle can be taken to be the ion-to- electron conversion efficiency of this charged particle (or more simply, the conversion efficiency). The total electron yield for cascading events when compared to the total number of incident charged particles is typically described as the detector gain. Because generally the overall response time of MCPs is far superior to that of EMPs, MCPs are the preferred electro-emissive detector for enhancing mass/charge resolving power. However, EMPs function well for detecting ion populations of disbursed kinetic energies, where rapid response time and broad frequency bandwidth are not necessary.
In a preferred aspect, for the analysis of digested proteins, a liquid-chromatography tandem mass spectrometer (LC-TMS) is used. This system provides an additional stage of sample separation via use of a liquid chromatograph followed by tandem mass spectrometry.
In preferred aspects, a protein eluted from a column according to the system described in Example 1 is analyzed using both MS and MS-MS analysis. For example, a small portion of intact proteins eluting from RP2 may be diverted to online detection using LC-ESI MS. The proteins are aliquoted on a number of plates allowing digestion or not with trypsin, preparation for MALDI-MS as well as for ESI-MS, as well as preparation of the MALDI plates with different matrices. The methods thus allow, in addition to information on intact mass, to conduct an analysis by both peptide mass fingerprinting and MS-MS techniques.
The methods described herein of separating and fractionating proteins provide individual proteins or fractions containing small numbers of distinct proteins. These proteins can be identified by mass spectral determination of the molecular masses of the protein and peptides resulting from the fragmentation thereof. Making use of available information in protein sequence databases, a comparison can be made between proteolytic peptide mass patterns generated in silico, and experimentally observed peptide masses. A "hit-list" can be compiled, ranking candidate proteins in the database, based on (among other criteria) the number of matches between the theoretical and experimental proteolytic fragments. Several Web sites are accessible that provide software for protein identification on-line, based on peptide mapping and sequence database search strategies (e.g., http://www.expasy.ch). Methods of peptide mapping and sequencing using MS are described in WO 95/252819, U.S. Pat. No. 5,538,897, U.S. Pat. No. 5,869,240, U.S. Pat. No. 5,572,259, and U.S. Pat. No. 5,696,376. See, also, Yates, J. Mass Spec, 33:1 (1998).
Data collected from a mass spectrometer typically comprises the intensity and mass to charge ratio for each detected event. Spectral data can be recorded in any suitable form, including, e.g., in graphical, numerical, or electronic formats, either in digital or analog form. Spectra are preferably recorded in a storage medium, including, e.g., magnetic, such as floppy disk, tape, or hard disk; optical, such as CD-ROM or laser-disc; or, ROM-CHIPS. The mass spectrum of a given sample typically provides information on protein intensity, mass to charge ratio, and molecular weight. In preferred embodiments of the invention, the molecular weights of proteins in the sample are used as a matching criterion to query a database. The molecular weights are calculated conventionally, e.g., by subtracting the mass of the ionizing proton for singly-charged protonated molecular ions, by multiplying the measured mass/charge ratio by the number of charges for multiply-charged ions and subtracting the number of ionizing protons.
Various databases are useful in accordance with the present invention. Useful databases include, databases containing genomic sequences, expressed gene sequences, and/or expressed protein sequences. Preferred databases contain nucleotide sequence-derived molecular masses of proteins present in a known organism, organ, tissue, or cell-type. There are a number of algorithms to identify open reading frames (ORF) and convert nucleotide sequences into protein sequence and molecular weight information. Several publicly accessible databases are available, including, the SwissPROT/TrEMBL database (http://www.expasy.ch). ,
Typically, a mass spectrometer is equipped with commercial software that identifies peaks above a certain threshold level, calculates mass, charge, and intensity of detected ions. Correlating molecular weight with a given output peak can be accomplished directly from the spectral data, i.e., where the charge on an ion is one and the molecular weight is Iherefore equal to the numerator value minus the mass of the ionizing proton. However, protein ions can be compϊexed with various counter-ions and adducts, such as N, C, and K'. In such a case, it would be expected that a given protein ion would exhibit multiple peaks, such as a triplet, representing different ionic states (or species) of the same protein. Thus, it may be necessary to analyze and process spectral data to determine families of peaks arising from the same protein. This analysis can be carried out conventionally, e.g., as described by Mann et al., anal. Chem., 61:1702-1708 (1989).
In matching a molecular mass calculated from a mass spectrometer to a molecular mass predicted from a database, such as a genomic or expressed gene database, post- translation processing may have to be considered. There are various processing events which modify protein structure, including, proteolytic processing, removal of N-terminal methionine, acetylation, methylation, glycosylation, phosphorylation, etc.
A database can be queried for a range of proteins matching the molecular mass of the unknown. The range window can be determined by the accuracy of the instrument, the method by which the sample was prepared, etc. Based on the number of hits (where a hit is match) in the spectrum, the unknown protein or peptide is identified or classified.
Methods of identifying one or more PAP by mass spectrometry are useful for diagnosis and prognosis of PAP-related disorders. Preferably, such methods are used to detect one or more PAP present in human serum. Exemplary techniques are described in U.S. Patent Applications 02/0060290, 02/0137106, 02/0138208, 02/0142343, 02/0155509, disclosures of which are incorporated by reference in their entireties.
Diagnostic and Prognostic Uses
The nucleic acid molecules, proteins, protein homologues, and antibodies described herein can be used in one or more of the following methods: diagnostic assays, prognostic assays, monitoring clinical trials, screening assays, and pharmacogenetics as further described herein.
The invention provides diagnostic and prognostic assays for detecting PAP nucleic acids and proteins, as further described. Also provided are diagnostic and prognostic assays for detecting interactions between PAPs and PAP target molecules, particularly natural agonists and antagonists.
The present invention provides methods for identifying polypeptides that are differentially expressed between two or more samples. "Differential expression" refers to differences in the quantity or quality of a polypeptide between samples. Such differences could result at any stage.ofprotein expression.from transcription through post-translational modification. For example, using protein array methods, two samples are bound to affinity spots on different sets of adsorbents (e.g., chips) and recognition maps are compared to identify polypeptides that are differentially retained by the two sets of adsorbents. Differential retention includes quantitative retention as well as qualitative differences in the polypeptide. For example, differences in post-translational modification of a protein can result in differences in recognition maps detectable as differences in binding characteristics (e.g., glycosylated proteins bind differently to lectin adsorbents) or differences in mass (e.g., post-translational cleavage products). In certain embodiments, an adsorbent can have an array of affinity spots selected for a combination of markers diagnostic for a disease or syndrome.
Differences in polypeptide levels between samples (e.g., differentially expressed PAPs in serum samples) can be identified by exposing the samples to a variety of conditions for analysis by desorption spectrometry (e.g., mass spectrometry). Unknown proteins can be identified by detecting physicochemical characteristics (e.g., molecular mass), and this information can be used to search databases for proteins having similar profiles.
Preferred methods of detecting a PAP utilize mass spectrometry techniques. Such methods provide information about the size and character of the particular PAP isoform that is present in a sample, e.g., a biological sample submitted for diagnosis or prognosis. Mass spectrometry techniques are detailed in the section titled "Detection of PAPs by mass spectrometry". Example 1 outlines a preferred detection scheme, wherein a biological sample is separated by chromatography before characterization by mass spectrometry. The invention provides a method of detecting a PAP in a biological sample comprising the steps of: fractionating a biological sample (e.g., plasma, serum, lymph, cerebrospinal fluid, cell lysate of a particular tissue) by at least one chromatographic step; subjecting a fraction to mass spectrometry; and comparing the characteristics of polypeptide species observed in mass spectrometry with known characteristics of PAP polypeptides.
The isolated nucleic acid molecules of the invention can be used, for example, to detect PAP mRNA (e.g., in a biological sample) or a genetic alteration in a PAP-encoding gene, and to modulate a PAP activity, as described further below. In addition, the PAPs can be used to screen for naturally occurring PAP target molecules, and to screen for drugs or compounds which modulate PAP activity. Moreover, the anti- PAP antibodies of the invention can be used to detect and isolate PAPs, regulate the bioavailability of PAPs, and modulate PAP activity.
Accordingly one embodiment of the present invention involves a method of use wherein a molecule of the present invention (e.g., a PAP, PAP nucleic acid, PAP modulator, or antibody) is used, for example, to diagnose and/or prognose a disorder in which any of the aforementioned PAP activities is indicated. Ih another embodiment, the present invention involves a method of use wherein a molecule of the present invention is used, for example, for the diagnosis and/or prognosis of subjects, preferably a human subject, in which any of the aforementioned activities is pathologically perturbed. For example, the invention encompasses a method of determining whether a PAP is expressed within a biological sample comprising: a) contacting said biological sample with: i) a polynucleotide that hybridizes under stringent conditions to a PAP nucleic acid; or ii) a detectable polypeptide (e.g. antibody) that selectively binds to a PAP; and b) detecting the presence or absence of hybridization between said polynucleotide and an RNA species within said sample, or the presence or absence of binding of said detectable polypeptide to a polypeptide within said sample. Detection of said hybridization or of said binding indicates that said PAP is expressed within said sample. Preferably, the polynucleotide is a primer, and said hybridization is detected by detecting the presence of an amplification product comprising said primer sequence, or the detectable polypeptide is an antibody. Ih certain embodiments, detection involves the use of a probe/primer in a polymerase chain reaction (PCR) (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos.4,683,195 and 4,683,202, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties), such as anchor PCR or RACE PCR, or, alternatively, in a ligation chain reaction (LCR) (see, e.g., Landegren et al. (1988) Science 241:1077-1080; andNakazawa et al. (1994) PNAS 91:360-364, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties), the latter of which can be particularly useful for detecting point mutations in the PAP-encoding-gene (see Abravaya et al. (1995) Nucleic Acids Res. 23:675-682, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety).
Also envisioned is a method of determining whether a mammal, preferably human, has an elevated or reduced level of expression of a PAP, comprising: a) providing a biological sample from said mammal; and b) comparing the amount of a PAP or of a PAP RNA species encoding a PAP within said biological sample with a level detected in or expected from a control sample. An increased amount of said PAP or said PAP RNA species within said biological sample compared to said level detected in or expected from said control sample indicates that said mammal has an elevated level of PAP expression, and a decreased amount of said PAP or said PAP RNA species within said biological sample compared to said level detected in or expected from said control sample indicates that said mammal has a reduced level of expression of a PAP. The present invention also pertains to the field of predictive medicine in which diagnostic assays, prognostic assays, and monitoring clinical trials are used for prognostic purposes. Accordingly, one aspect of the present invention relates to diagnostic assays for determining PAP and/or nucleic acid expression as well as PAP activity, in the context of a biological sample (e.g., blood, serum, cells, tissue) to thereby determine whether an individual is afflicted with a disease or disorder, or is at risk of developing a disorder, associated with aberrant PAP expression or activity. The invention also provides for prognostic (or predictive) assays for determining whether an individual is at risk of developing a disorder associated with a PAP, nucleic acid expression or activity. For example, mutations in a PAP-encoding gene can be assayed in a biological sample. Such assays can be used for prognostic or predictive purpose to thereby prophylactically treat an individual prior to the onset of a disorder characterized by or associated with PAP expression or activity.
The term "biological sample" is intended to include tissues, cells and biological fluids isolated from an individual, as well as tissues, cells and fluids present within an individual. That is, the detection methods of the invention can be used to detect a PAP mRNA, protein, or genomic DNA in a biological sample in vitro as well as in vivo. Preferred biological samples are biological fluids such as lymph, cerebrospinal fluid, blood, and especially blood serum. For example, in vitro techniques for detection of a PAP mRNA include Northern hybridizations and in situ hybridizations. Ih vitro techniques for detection of a PAP include mass spectrometry, Enzyme Linked Immuno Sorbent Assays (ELISAs), Western blots, immunoprecipitations and immunofluorescence. In vitro techniques for detection of a PAP-encoding genomic DNA include Southern hybridizations. Furthermore, in vivo techniques for detection of a PAP include introducing into an individual a labeled anti- PAP antibody.
In preferred embodiments, the subject methods can be characterized by generally comprising detecting, in a tissue sample of the individual (e.g. a human patient), the presence or absence of a genetic lesion characterized by at least one of (i) a mutation of a gene encoding one of the subject PAP or (ii) the mis-expression of a PAP-encoding gene. To illustrate, such genetic lesions can be detected by ascertaining the existence of at least one of (i) a deletion of one or more nucleotides from the PAP-encoding gene, (ii) an addition of one or more nucleotides to the gene, (iii) a substitution of one or more nucleotides of the gene, (iv) a gross chromosomal rearrangement or amplification of the gene, (v) a gross alteration in the level of a messenger KNA transcript of the gene, (vi) aberrant modification of the gene, such as of the methylation pattern of the genomic DNA, (vii) the presence of a non-wild type splicing pattern of a messenger RNA transcript of the gene, and (viii) reduced level of expression, indicating lesion in regulatory element or reduced stability of a PAP-encoding transcript.
In yet another exemplary embodiment, aberrant methylation patterns of a PAP nucleic acid can be detected by digesting genomic DNA from a patient sample with one or more restriction endonucleases that are sensitive to methylation and for which recognition sites exist in the PAP-encoding gene (including in the flanking and intronic sequences). See, for example, Buiting et al. (1994) Human MoI Genet 3:893-895. Digested DNA is separated by gel electrophoresis, and hybridized with probes derived from, for example, genomic or cDNA sequences. The methylation status of the PAP-encoding gene can be determined by comparison of the restriction pattern generated from the sample DNA with that for a standard of known methylation. In yet another embodiment, a diagnostic assay is provided which detects the ability of a PAP to bind to a cell surface or extracellular protein. For instance, it will be desirable to detect PAP mutants which, while expressed at appreciable levels in the cell, are defective at binding a PAP target protein (having either diminished or enhanced binding affinity for the target). Such mutants may arise, for example, from mutations, e.g., point mutants, which may be impractical to detect by the diagnostic DNA sequencing techniques or by the immunoassays described above. The present invention accordingly further contemplates diagnostic screening assays which generally comprise cloning one or more PAP-encoding gene from the sample tissue, and expressing the cloned genes under conditions which permit detection of an interaction between that recombinant gene product and a target protein. As will be apparent from the description of the various drug screening assays set forth herein, a wide variety of techniques can be used to determine the ability of a PAP to bind to other components. These techniques can be used to detect mutations in a PAP-encoding gene which give rise to mutant proteins with a higher or lower binding affinity for a PAP target protein relative to the wild-type PAP. Conversely, by switching which of the PAP target protein and PAP is the "bait" and which is derived from the patient sample, the subject assay can also be used to detect PAP target protein mutants which have a higher or lower binding affinity for a PAP relative to a wild type form of that PAP target protein. In an exemplary embodiment, a target protein can be provided as an immobilized protein (a "target"), such as by use of GST fusion proteins and glutathione treated microliter plates as described herein.
In another embodiment, the methods further involve obtaining a control biological sample from a control subject, contacting the control sample with a compound or agent capable of detecting a PAP, iriRNA, or genomic DNA, such that the level of a PAP, mKNA, or genomic DNA is measured in the biological sample, and comparing the level of the PAP, mKNA or genomic DNA in the control sample to that of the test sample. The invention also encompasses kits for detecting the presence of a PAP, mKNA or genomic DNA in a biological sample. For example, the kit can comprise: a labeled compound or agent capable of detecting a PAP, mKNA or genomic DNA in a biological sample; means for determining the amount of a PAP in the sample; and means for comparing the amount of PAP in the sample with a standard. The compound or agent can be packaged in a suitable container. The kit can further comprise instructions for using the kit to detect PAP or nucleic acid.
Drug Screening Assays
The invention provides a method (also referred to herein as a "screening assay") for identifying candidate modulators (e.g., small molecules, peptides, antibodies, peptidomimetics or other drugs) which bind to PAPs, have a modulatory effect on, for example, PAP expression or preferably PAP biological activity. Ih some embodiments small molecules can be generated using combinatorial chemistry or can be obtained from a natural products library. Assays may be cell based or non-cell based assays. Drug screening assays may be binding assays or more preferentially functional assays, as further described.
When the invention is used for drug development, e.g., to determine the ability of a PAP polypeptide or candidate modulator to induce an anti-PAP-related disorders response, the body fluid analyzed for the level of at least one PAP is preferably from a non-human mammal. The non-human mammal is preferably one in which the induction of an anti- PAP- related disorders response by endogenous and/or exogenous agents is predictive of the induction of such a response in a human. Rodents (mice, rats, etc.) and primates are particularly suitable for use in this aspect of the invention.
Agents that are found, using screening assays as further described herein, to modulate PAP activity by at least 5%, more preferably by at least 10%, still more preferably by at least 30%, still more preferably by at least 50%, still more preferably by at least 70%, even more preferably by at least 90 %, may be selected for further testing as a prophylactic and/or therapeutic anti-PAP-related disorders agent.
In another aspect, agents that are found, using screening assays as further described herein, to modulate PAP expression by at least 5%, more preferably by at least 10%, still more preferably by at least 30%, still more preferably by at least 50%, still more preferably by at least 70%, even more preferably by at least 90 %, may be selected for further testing as a prophylactic and/or therapeutic anti-PAP-related disorders agent.
Agents that are found to modulate PAP activity may be used, for example, to modulate treatment regimens for PAP-related disorders or to reduce the symptoms of PAP- related disorders alone or in combination with other appropriate agents or treatments.
Protein array methods are useful for screening and drug discovery. For example, one member of a receptor/ ligand pair is docked to an adsorbent, and its ability to bind the binding partner is determined in the presence of the test substance. Because of the rapidity with which adsorption can be tested, combinatorial libraries of test substances can be easily screened for their ability to modulate the interaction. In preferred screening methods, PAPs are docked to the adsorbent. Binding partners are preferably labeled, thus enabling detection of the interaction. Alternatively, in certain embodiments, a test substance is docked to the adsorbent. The polypeptides of the invention are exposed to the test substance and screened for binding. In other embodiments, an assay is a cell-based assay in which a cell which expresses a PAP or biologically active portion thereof is contacted with a test compound and the ability of the test compound to modulate PAP activity determined. Determining the ability of the test compound to modulate PAP activity can be accomplished by monitoring the bioactivity of the PAP or biologically active portion thereof. The cell, for example, can be of mammalian origin, insect origin, bacterial origin or a yeast cell.
Ih one embodiment, the invention provides assays for screening candidate or test compounds which are target molecules of a PAP or biologically active portion thereof. Ih another embodiment, the invention provides assays for screening candidate or test compounds which bind to or modulate the activity of a PAP or biologically active portion thereof. The test compounds of the present invention can be obtained using any of the numerous approaches in combinatorial library methods known in the art, including: biological libraries; spatially addressable parallel solid phase or solution phase libraries; synthetic library methods requiring deconvolution; the 'one-bead one-compoundΛ library method; and synthetic library methods using affinity chromatography selection. The biological library approach is used with peptide libraries, while the other four approaches are applicable to peptide, non-peptide oligomer or small molecule libraries of compounds (Lam, K. S. (1997) Anticancer Drug Des. 12:145, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety).
Examples of methods for the synthesis of molecular libraries can be found in the art, for example in: DeWitt et al. (1993) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 90:6909; Erb et al. (1994) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 91:11422; Zuckermann et al. (1994). J. Med. Chem. 37:2678; Cho et al. (1993) Science 261:1303; Carrell et al. (1994) Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl. 33 :2059 and 2061 ; and in Gallop et al. (1994) J. Med. Chem. 37: 1233, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
Libraries of compounds may be presented in solution (e.g., Houghten (1992) Biotechmques 13:412-421), or on beads (Lam (1991) Nature 354:82-84), chips (Fodor (1993) Nature 364:555-556), bacteria (Ladner U.S. Pat. No. 5,223,409), spores (Ladner U.S. Pat. No. "409), plasmids (Cull et al. (1992) Proc Natl Acad Sci USA 89:1865-1869) or on phage (Scott and Smith (1990) Science 249:386-390); (Devin (1990) Science 249:404-406); (Cwirla etal. (1990) Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 87:6378-6382); (Felici (1991) J. MoI. Biol.222:301-310); (Ladner supra).
Determining the ability of the test compound to modulate PAP activity can also be accomplished, for example, by coupling the PAP or biologically active portion thereof with a label group such that binding of the PAP or biologically active portion thereof to its cognate target molecule can be determined by detecting the labeled PAP or biologically active portion thereof in a complex. For example, the extent of complex formation may be measured by itnmunoprecipitating the complex or by performing gel electrophoresis. It is also within the scope of this invention to determine the ability of a compound to interact with its cognate target molecule without the labeling of any of the interactants. For example, a micrόphysiometer can be used to detect the interaction of a compound with its cognate target molecule without the labeling of either the compound or the target molecule. McConnell, H. M. et al. (1992) Science 257:1906-1912, the disclosure of which is incorporated by reference in its entirety. A microphysiometer such as a cytosensor is an analytical instrument that measures the rate at which a cell acidifies its environment using a Light-Addressable Potentiometric Sensor (LAPS). Changes in this acidification rate can be used as an indicator of the interaction between compound and receptor. In a preferred embodiment, the assay comprises: contacting a cell which expresses a PAP or biologically active portion thereof with a target molecule to form an assay mixture, contacting the assay mixture with a test compound, and determining the ability of the test compound to modulate the activity of the PAP or biologically active portion thereof. Determining the ability of the test compound to modulate the activity of the PAP or biologically active portion thereof comprises: determining the ability of the test compound to modulate a biological activity of the PAP expressing cell (e.g., interaction with a PAP target molecule, as discussed above).
In another preferred embodiment, the assay comprises contacting a cell which is responsive to a PAP or biologically active portion thereof with a PAP or biologically active portion thereof, to form an assay mixture, contacting the assay mixture with a test compound, and determining the ability of the test compound to modulate the activity of the PAP or biologically active portion thereof. Determining the ability of the test compound to modulate the activity of the PAP or biologically active portion thereof comprises determining the ability of the test compound to modulate a biological activity of the PAP-responsive cell.
In another embodiment, an assay is a cell-based assay comprising contacting a cell expressing a PAP target molecule (i.e. a molecule with which PAPs interact) with a test compound and determining the ability of the test compound to modulate the activity of the PAP target molecule. Determining the ability of the test compound to modulate the activity of a PAP target molecule can be accomplished, for example, by assessing the activity of a target molecule, or by assessing the ability of the PAP to bind to or interact with the PAP target molecule.
Determining the ability of the PAP to bind to or interact with a PAP target molecule, for example, can be accomplished by one of the methods described above for directly or indirectly determining binding. Ih a preferred embodiment, the assay includes contacting the PAP or biologically active portion thereof with a known compound which binds said PAP (e.g., a PAP antibody or target molecule) to form an assay mixture, contacting the PAP with a test compound before or after said known compound, and determining the ability of the test compound to interact with the PAP. Determining the ability of the test compound to interact with a PAP comprises determining the ability of the test compound to preferentially bind to the PAP or biologically active portion-thereof as compared to the known compound. Determining the ability of the PAP to bind to a PAP target molecule can also be accomplished using a technology such as real-time Biomolecular Interaction Analysis (BIA). Sjolander, S. and Urbaniczky, C. (1991) Anal. Chem. 63:2338-2345 and Szabo et al. (1995) Curr. Opin. Struct. Biol. 5:699-705, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties. As used herein, "BIA" is a technology for studying biospecific interactions in real time, without labeling any of the interactants (e.g., BIAcore). Changes in the optical phenomenon of surface plasmon resonance (SPR) can be used as an indication of real-time reactions between biological molecules.
In another embodiment, the assay is a cell-free assay in which a PAP or biologically active portion thereof is contacted with a test compound and the ability of the test compound to modulate the activity of the PAP or biologically active portion thereof is determined. In a preferred embodiment, determining the ability of the PAP to modulate or interact with a PAP target molecule can be accomplished by determining the activity of the target molecule. For example, the activity of the target molecule can be determined by contacting the target molecule with the PAP or a fragment thereof and measuring induction of a cellular second messenger of the target (e.g., cAMP, STAT3, Akt, intracellular Ca2+, diacylglycerol, IP3, etc.), detecting catalytic/enzymatic activity of the target for an appropriate substrate, detecting the induction of a reporter gene (comprising a target-responsive regulatory element operatively linked to a nucleic acid encoding a detectable marker, e.g., luciferase), or detecting a target-regulated cellular response, for example, signal transduction or protein:protein interactions. The cell-free assays of the present invention are amenable to use of both soluble and/or membrane-bound forms of isolated proteins (e.g. PAPs or biologically active portions thereof or molecules to which PAPs targets bind). In the case of cell-free assays in which a membrane-bound form an isolated protein is used it may be desirable to utilize a solubilizing agent such that the membrane-bound form of the isolated protein is maintained in solution. Examples of such solubilizing agents include non-ionic detergents such as n-ocrylglucoside, n-dodecylglucoside, n-dodecylmaltoside, octanoyl-N-methylglucamide, decanoyl-N- methylglucamide, Triton TM X-100, Triton TM X-114, Thesit TM, Isotridecypoly(ethylene glycol emer)n,3-[(3-cholamidopropyl)dirnethylamminio]- 1 -propane sulfonate (CHAPS), 3- [(3-cholamidopropyl)dimemylarnminio]-2-hydroxy-l-propane sulfonate (CHAPSO), or N- dodecyl=N,N-dimethyl-3-ammonio-l-propane sulfonate.
In more than one embodiment of the above assay methods of the present invention, it may be desirable to immobilize either a PAP or its target molecule to facilitate separation of complexed from uncomplexed forms of one or both of the proteins,, as well as to accommodate automation of the assay. Binding of a test compound to a PAP, or interaction of a PAP with a target molecule in the presence and absence of a candidate compound, can be accomplished in any vessel suitable for containing the reactants and by any immobilization protocol described herein. Alternatively, the complexes can be dissociated from the matrix, and the level of PAP binding or activity determined using standard techniques.
Other techniques for immobilizing proteins on matrices can also be used in the screening assays of the invention. For example, either a PAP or a PAP target molecule can be immobilized utilizing conjugation of biotin and streptavidin. Biotinylated PAP or target molecules can be prepared from biotin-NHS (N-hydroxy-succinimide) using techniques well known in the art (e.g., biotinylation kit, Pierce Chemicals, Rockford, 111.), and immobilized in the wells of streptavidin-coated 96 well plates (Pierce Chemical). Alternatively, antibodies reactive with PAP or target molecules but which do not interfere with binding of the PAP to its target molecule can be derivatized to the wells of the plate, and unbound target or PAP trapped in the wells by antibody conjugation. Methods for detecting such complexes, in addition to those described above for the GST-immobilized complexes, include immunodetection of complexes using antibodies reactive with the PAP or target molecule, as well as enzyme-linked assays which rely on detecting an enzymatic activity associated with the PAP or target molecule.
In another embodiment, modulators of PAP expression are identified in a method wherein a cell is contacted with a candidate compound and the expression of PAP mRNA or protein in the cell is determined. The level of expression of PAP mRNA or protein in the presence of the candidate compound is compared to the level of expression of PAP mRNA or protein in the absence of the candidate compound. The candidate compound can then be identified as a modulator of PAP expression based on this comparison. For example, when expression of PAP mRNA or protein is greater (statistically significantly greater) in the presence of the candidate compound than in its absence, the candidate compound is identified as a stimulator of PAP mRNA or protein expression. Alternatively, when expression of PAP mRNA or protein is less (statistically significantly less) in the presence of the candidate compound than in its absence, the candidate compound is identified as an inhibitor of PAP mRNA or protein expression. The level of PAP mRNA or protein expressionin the cells can be determined by methods described herein for detecting PAP mRNA or protein.
In yet another aspect of the invention, the PAP can be used as "bait proteins" in a two-hybrid assay or three-hybrid assay (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,283,317; Zervos et al.
Ill (1993) Cell 72:223-232; Madura et al. (1993) J. Biol. Chem. 268:12046-12054; Bartel et al. (1993) Biotechniques 14:920-924; Iwabuchi et al. (1993) Oncogene 8:1693-1696; and Brent WO94/10300, the disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties), to identify other proteins, which bind to or interact with PAPs ("PAP-binding proteins" or "PAP-bp") and are involved in PAP activity. Such PAP-binding proteins are also likely to be involved in the propagation of signals by the PAP or PAP targets as, for example, downstream elements of a PAP-mediated signaling pathway.
The two-hybrid system is based on the modular nature of most transcription factors, which consist of separable DNA-binding and activation domains. Briefly, the assay utilizes two different DNA constructs. In one construct, the gene that codes for a PAP or a fragment thereof is fused to a gene encoding the DNA binding domain of a known transcription factor (e.g., GAL-4). In the other construct, a DNA sequence, from a library of DNA sequences, that encodes an unidentified protein ("prey" or "sample") is fused to a gene that codes for the activation domain of the known transcription factor. If the "bait" and the "prey" proteins are able to interact, in vivo, forming a PAP -dependent complex, the DNA-binding and activation domains of the transcription factor are brought into close proximity. This proximity allows transcription of a reporter gene (e.g., LacZ) which is operably linked to a transcriptional regulatory site responsive to the transcription factor. Expression of the reporter gene can be detected and cell colonies containing the functional transcription factor can be isolated and used to obtain the cloned gene which encodes the protein which interacts with the PAP. This invention further pertains to novel agents identified by the above-described screening assays and to processes for producing such agents by use of these assays. Accordingly, in one embodiment, the present invention includes a compound or agent obtainable by a method comprising the steps of any one of the aforementioned screening assays (e.g., cell-based assays or cell-free assays).
Accordingly, it is within the scope of this invention to further use an agent identified as described herein in an appropriate animal model. For example, an agent identified as described herein (e.g., a PAP modulating agent, or a PAP -binding partner) can be used in an a'nimal model to determine the efficacy, toxicity, or side effects of treatment with such an agent. Alternatively, an agent identified as described herein can be used in an animal model to determine the mechanism of action of such an agent. Furthermore, this invention pertains to uses of novel agents identified by the above-described screening assays for treatments as described herein. The present invention also pertains to uses of novel agents identified by the above- described screening assays for diagnoses, prognoses, prevention, and treatments as described herein. Accordingly, it is within the scope of the present invention to use such agents in the design, formulation, synthesis, manufacture, and/or production of a drug or pharmaceutical composition for use in diagnosis, prognosis, or treatment, as described herein. For example, in one embodiment, the present invention includes a method of synthesizing or producing a drug or pharmaceutical composition by reference to the structure and/or properties of a compound obtainable by one of the above-described screening assays. For example, a drug or pharmaceutical composition can be synthesized based on the structure and/or properties of a compound obtained by a method in which a cell which expresses a PAP target molecule is contacted with a test compound and the ability of the test compound to bind to, or modulate the activity of, the PAP target molecule is determined. In another exemplary embodiment, the present invention includes a method of synthesizing or producing a drug or pharmaceutical composition based on the structure and/or properties of a compound obtainable by a method in which a PAP or biologically active portion thereof is contacted with a test compound and the ability of the test compound to bind to, or modulate, the activity of the PAP or biologically active portion thereof is determined.
Pharmaceutical Compositions "When polypeptides of the present invention are expressed in soluble form, for example as a secreted product of transformed yeast or mammalian cells, they can be purified according to standard procedures of the art, including steps of ammonium sulfate precipitation, ion exchange chromatography, gel filtration, electrophoresis, affinity chromatography, according to, e.g., "Enzyme Purification and Related Techniques," Methods in Enzymology, 22:233-577 (1977), and Scopes, R., Protein Purification: Principles and Practice (Springer-Verlag, New York, 1982) provide guidance in such purifications. Likewise, when polypeptides of the invention are expressed in insoluble form, for example as aggregates or inclusion bodies, they can be purified by appropriate techniques, including separating the inclusion bodies" from disrupted host cells by centrifugation, solubilizing the inclusion bodies with chaotropic and reducing agents, diluting the solύbilized mixture, and lowering the concentration of chaotropic agent and reducing agent so that the polypeptide takes on a biologically active conformation. The latter procedures are disclosed in the following references, which are incorporated by reference: Winkler et al, Biochemistry, 25: 4041-4045 (1986); Winkler et al, Biotechnology, 3: 992-998 (1985); Koths et al, U.S. patent 4,569,790; and European patent applications 86306917.5 and 86306353.3.
Compounds capable of detecting or modulating a PAP or a PAP biological activity, including small molecules, peptides, PAP nucleic acid molecules, and anti- PAP antibodies of the invention, can be incorporated into pharmaceutical compositions suitable for administration. Such compositions typically comprise a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. As used herein the language "pharmaceutically acceptable carrier" is intended to include any and all solvents, dispersion media, coatings, antibacterial and antifungal agents, isotonic and absorption delaying agents, and the like, compatible with pharmaceutical administration. The use of such media and agents for pharmaceutically active substances is well known in the art. Except insofar as any conventional media or agent is incompatible with the active compound, use thereof in the compositions is contemplated. Supplementary active compounds can also be incorporated into the compositions.
A pharmaceutical composition of the invention is formulated to be compatible with its intended route of administration. Examples of routes of administration include parenteral, e.g., intravenous, intradermal, subcutaneous, oral (e.g., inhalation), transdermal (topical), transmucosal, and rectal administration. Solutions or suspensions used for parenteral, intradermal, or subcutaneous application can include the following components: a sterile diluent such as water for injection, saline solution, fixed oils, polyethylene glycols, glycerine, propylene glycol or other synthetic solvents; antibacterial agents such as benzyl alcohol or methyl parabens; antioxidants such as ascorbic acid or sodium bisulfite; chelating agents such as ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid; buffers such as acetates, citrates or phosphates and agents for the adjustment of tonicity such as sodium chloride or dextrose. pH can be adjusted with acids or bases, such as hydrochloric acid or sodium hydroxide. The parenteral preparation can be enclosed in ampoules, disposable syringes or multiple dose vials made of glass or plastic.
Pharmaceutical compositions suitable for injectable use include sterile aqueous solutions (where water soluble) or dispersions and sterile powders for the extemporaneous preparation of sterile injectable solutions or dispersion. For intravenous administration, suitable carriers include physiological saline, bacteriostatic water, Cremophor EL® (BASF, Parsippany, NJ.) or phosphate buffered saline (PBS). In all cases, the composition must be sterile and should be fluid to the extent that easy syringability exists. It must be stable under the conditions of manufacture and storage and must be preserved against the contaminating action of microorganisms such as bacteria and fungi. The carrier can be a solvent or dispersion medium containing, for example, water, ethanol, polyol (for example, glycerol, propylene glycol, and liquid polyethylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof. The proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of a coating such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersion and by the use of surfactants. Prevention of the action microorganisms can be achieved by various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, parabens, chlorobutanol, phenol, ascorbic acid, thimerosal, and the like. In many cases, it will be preferable to include isotonic agents, for example, sugars, polyalcohols such as manitol, sorbitol, sodium chloride in the composition. Prolonged absorption of the injectable compositions can be brought about by including in the composition an agent which delays absorption, for example, aluminum monostearate and gelatin.
Where the active compound is a protein, e.g., an anti-PAP antibody, sterile injectable solutions can be prepared by incorporating the active compound in the required amount in an appropriate solvent with one or a combination of ingredients enumerated above, as required, followed by filtered sterilization. Generally, dispersions are prepared by incorporating the active compound into a sterile vehicle which contains a basic dispersion medium and other required ingredients from those enumerated above. Ih the case of sterile powders for the preparation of sterile injectable solutions, the preferred methods of preparation are vacuum drying and freeze-drying which yields a powder of the active ingredient plus any additional desired ingredient from a previously sterile-filtered solution thereof.
Oral compositions generally include an inert diluent or an edible carrier. They can be enclosed in gelatin capsules or compressed into tablets. For the purpose of oral therapeutic administration, the active compound can be incorporated with excipients and used in the form of tablets, troches, or capsules. For administration by inhalation, the compounds are delivered in the form of an aerosol spray from pressured container or dispenser which contains a suitable propellant, e.g., a gas such as carbon dioxide, or a nebulizer. Systemic administration can also be by transmucosal or transdermal means. For transmucosal or transdermal administration, penetrants appropriate to the barrier to be permeated are used" in the formulation. Such penetrants are generally known in the art, and include, for example, for transmucosal administration, detergents, bile salts, and fusidic acid derivatives. Transmucosal administration can be accomplished through the use of nasal sprays or suppositories. For transdermal administration, the active compounds are formulated into ointments, salves, gels, or creams as generally known in the art. Most preferably, active compound is delivered to a subject by intravenous injection.
In one embodiment, the active compounds are prepared with carriers that will protect the compound against rapid elimination from the body, such as a controlled release formulation, including implants and microencapsulated delivery systems. Biodegradable, biocompatible polymers can be used, such as ethylene vinyl acetate, polyanhydrides, polyglycolic acid, collagen, polyorthoesters, and polylactic acid. Methods for preparation of such formulations will be apparent to those skilled in the art. The materials can also be obtained commercially from Alza Corporation and Nova Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Liposomal suspensions (including liposomes targeted to infected cells with monoclonal antibodies to viral antigens) can also be used as pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. These can be prepared according to methods known to those skilled in the art, for example, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,522,811, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. In a further embodiment, the active compound may be coated on a microchip drug delivery device. Such devices are useful for controlled delivery of proteinaceous compositions into the bloodstream, cerebrospinal fluid, lymph, or tissue of an individual without subjecting such compositions to digestion or subjecting the individual to injection. Methods of using microchip drug delivery devices are described in US Patents 6123861, 5797898 and US Patent application 20020119176A1, disclosures of which are hereby incorporated in their entireties.
It is especially advantageous to formulate oral or preferably parenteral compositions in dosage unit form for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage. Dosage unit form as used herein refers to physically discrete units suited as unitary dosages for the subject to be treated; each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active compound calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect in association with the required pharmaceutical carrier. The specification for the dosage unit forms of the invention are dictated by and directly dependent on the unique characteristics of the active compound and the particular therapeutic effect to be achieved, and the limitations inherent in the art of compounding such an active compound for the treatment of individuals.
Toxicity and therapeutic efficacy of such compounds can be determined by standard pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures or experimental animals, e.g., for determining the LD50 (the dose lethal to 50% of the population) and the ED50 (the dose therapeutically effective in 50% of the population). The dose ratio between toxic and therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index and it can be expressed as the ratio LD50/ED50. Compounds which exhibit large therapeutic indices are preferred. While compounds that exhibit toxic side effects may be used, care should be taken to design a delivery system that targets such compounds to the site of affected tissue in order to minimize potential damage to uninfected cells and, thereby, reduce side effects.
The data obtained from the cell culture assays and animal studies can be used in formulating a range of dosage for use in humans. The dosage of such compounds lies preferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include the ED50 with little or no toxicity. The dosage may vary within this range depending upon the dosage form employed and the route of administration utilized. For any compound used in the method of the invention, the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially from cell culture assays. A dose may be formulated in animal models to achieve a given circulating concentration, subsequently used to more accurately determine useful doses in humans. Levels in plasma may be measured, for example, by high performance liquid chromatography.
The pharmaceutical compositions can be included in a container, pack, or dispenser together with instructions for administration.
Disease therapy
The PAP modulators and PAP-related compositions of the invention can be used in the treatment or prevention of PAP-related disorders. Thus, in one aspect the invention relates to pharmaceutical compositions containing an antibody, antibody fragment, or peptide modulator of PAP, preferably containing a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent. The carrier or diluent is preferably adapted for oral, intravenous, intramuscular or subcutaneous administration. Pharmaceutical compositions may comprise or consist essentially of any of the PAP-related compositions, PAP modulators, anti-PAP antibodies, or anti-PAP antibody fragments described herein.
Having generally described this invention, a further understanding can be obtained by reference to certain specific examples which are provided herein for purposes of illustration only, and are not intended to be limiting unless otherwise specified. EXAMPLES
Example 1: Characterization of PAP levels in early and late pregnancy samples Sera from 2500 pregnant women were collected firstly during the first trimester and secondly during the third trimester of pregnancy.
ImI of serum from the early pregnancy stage from each of the 2500 women were pooled, as well as 1 ml of serum from the late pregnancy stage from each of the 2500 women. 500 ml of each of these 2 pools (early and late) were then submitted to the separation process described below.
Step 1: HSAJIgG depletion
125 ml frozen serum were defrost and filtered on 0.45 μm sterile filter in a sterile hood. Filtrate was injected on two inline columns of respectively 300 ml of HSA ligand
Sepharose fast Flow column (Amersham, Uppsala, Sweden), 5cm ID, 15 cm length; and 100 ml Protein G Sepharose fast Flow column (Amersham, Uppsala, Sweden), 5 cm ID, 5 cm length.
Columns were equilibrated and washed with 50 mM PO4 buffer, pH 7.1, 0.15M NaCl. Flow rate was 5 ml/rnin.
Non-retained fraction (350 ml) was frozen until second step.4 runs were performed.
Step 2: Gel Filtration / 'Reverse Phase Capture step
Sample from step 1 was defrost and-filtered on 0.45 μm sterile filter in a sterile hood. Filtrate was injected on two in line gel filtration columns: 2 X 9.5 litres Superdex 75
(Amersham, UK) column, 14 cm TD, 62 cm length. Column was equilibrated with 5OmM PO4 buffer pH 7.4, 0.1 M NaCl, 8M urea. Hydrophobic impurities were retained on a reverse phase precolumn: 150 ml PLRPS (Polymer Labs, UK). Precolumn was switched for sample injection. Gel filtration was performed at a flow rate of 40 ml/min. Low molecular weight proteins (<20 kDa) were oriented to in line reverse phase capture column: 50 ml PLRPS 100 angstroms (Polymer labs, XJK). The three-way valve controlling injection on PLRPS column was switched at a cut-off of 33 mAU (280 nm) to send gel filtration eluate into reverse phase capture column. This cut-off value was established first by SDS-PAGE to provide an estimated range of OD values and then, by evaluating three cut-off values (high, median and low values of OD range). The cut-off value was chosen to maximize the low molecular weight protein obtained, with a low molecular protein proportion of at least 85%. Low molecular weight proteins and peptides were eluted from reverse phase capture PLRPS column by one column volume gradient of 0.1 % TFA, 80% CH3CNin water.
Eluate fractions (50 ml) were frozen until next step. 4 runs were performed. At the end of this step, all reverse phase eluates were defrost, pooled (200 ml) and shared in 2 polypropylene containers. Containers were kept at -200C until use for next step.
Step 3: Cation Exchange
Sample from step 2 (100 ml) was defrost and mixed with two volumes of cation exchange buffer A (Gly/HCl buffer 50 mM, pH 2.7, urea 8M).
Sample was injected on a 100 ml Source 15S column (Amersharn, Uppsala, Sweden), 35 mm ID, 100 mm length. Column was equilibrated and washed with buffer A. Flow rate was 10 ml/min.
Proteins and peptides were eluted with step gradient from 100% buffer A until 100 % buffer B (buffer A containing IM NaCl):
3 column volumes 7.5% B (75 mM NaCl) 3 column volumes 10% B (100 mM NaCl)
3 column volumes 17.5% B (175 mM NaCl)
2 column volumes 22.5% B (225 mM NaCl)
2 column volumes 27.5% B (275 mM NaCl)
2 column volumes 100% B (1 M NaCl)
45 to 60 fractions were collected based on peak, and as detailed in Table 2. 2 runs were realized. After 2 runs were achieved, fractions were pooled intra and inter run in order to obtain 12 fractions. Fractions were kept at -200C until use for next step.
Step 4: Reduction/Alkylation and Reverse Phase HPLC Fractionation 1
After adjusting the pH to 8.5 with concentrated tris-HCl, each 12 cation exchange fractions was reduced with dithioerythritol (DTE, 30 mM, 3 hours at 37°C) and alkylated with iodoacetamid (120 mM, 0.5 hour 37°C in the dark). The latter reaction was stopped with the addition of DTE (30 mM) followed by acidification (TFA, 0.1%). The fractions were then injected on an Uptispher C8, 5 μm, 300 angstroms column (biterchim, France), 21 mm ED, 150 mm length. Injection was performed with a 10 ml/min flow rate.
C8 column was equilibrated and washed with 0.1% TFA in water (solution A). Proteins and peptides were eluted with a biphasic gradient from 100% A until 100% B (0.1% TFA, 80% CH3CN in water) in 30 min. Flow rate was 20 ml/min. 15 fractions of 40 ml were collected.
Based on the measured optical density (OD) at 215 nm of each fraction, which reflects the protein concentration in that fraction, aliquots of similar protein content are created for each fraction.
AU aliquots are frozen and kept for further use except one per fraction which is dried with a Speed Vac (Savant, Fischer, Geneva) after addition of 500 μl 10% glycerol in water in each fraction, in order to prevent excess drying. Dried fractions were kept at -200C until use for next step.
Step 5: Reverse Phase HPLC Fractionation 2
Dried samples from step 4 were resuspended in 1 ml of solution A (0.03% TFA in water) and injected on a Vydac LCMS C4 column, 3 micrometers, 300 angstroms (Vydac, USA), 4.6 mm ID, 100 mm length. Flow rate was 0.8 ml/min. C4 column was equilibrated and washed with solution A and proteins and peptides were eluted with a biphasic gradient adapted to elution position of the sample in Reverse Phase HPLC Fractionation 1. Intact mass data were acquired using Electrospray Ion Trap Mass spectrometry. 16 different gradients were used with a CH3CN concentration range minus and plus 5% CH3CN of RPl fraction corresponding solvent concentration. For proteins eluted in RPl with a solvent concentration equal to or greater than 30% CH3CN, the starting elution conditions for the RP2 gradient were set, in CH3CN precentage, at the RPl elution concentration minus 3%.24 eluted fractions were collected in a deep well plate, adopting specific collection configurations, based on CH3CN content, designed for optimal SpeedVac concentration. The evaporation times are also adjusted according to the CH3CN content, and the pressure during the run is monitored to better determine the end of the run. Step 6: Mass detection
4320 fractions were collected following reverse phase HPLC fractionation 2 into 96- well deep well plates (DWP). A small proportion (2.5 %) of the volume is diverted to online analysis using LC-ESI-MS (Bruker Esquire). Aliquots of undigested proteins are mixed with MALDI matrices, and spotted on MALDI plates together with mass calibration standards and sensitivity standards. Automated spotting devices (Bruker MALDI sample prep. Robots) are used. Two different MALDI matrices are employed: sinapic acid (SA), also known as sinapinic acid, trans-3,5-dimethoxy-4-hydroxycinnamic acid, and alpha-cyano-4- hydroxycinnamic acid (HCCA). MALDI plates are subjected to mass detection using Bruker Reflex III MALDI MS apparati. The 96-well plates are stored at +4 C.
96-well plates (DWP) are recovered and subjected to two sequential concentration steps. Volumes are concentrated from 0.8 ml to about 50 microl per well by drying with a SpeedVac, and then resolubilized to ca. 200 microl and reconcentrated to about 50 microl per well, and stored at +4 C. Proteins are then digested by re-buffering, adding trypsin to the wells, sealing and incubating the plates at 37 C for 12 hours, followed by quenching.
Quenching is accomplished by bringing the pH to 2 with formic acid. The concentration of trypsin to be added to the wells was adjusted based on the OD at 280 ran recorded for each particular fraction. This ensures an optimal use of trypsin and a complete digestion of the most concentrated fractions. Automated spotting devices (Bruker MALDI sample prep. Robots) are used to deposit a volume from each well, pre-mixed with a HCCA matrix onto a MALDI plate together with sensitivity and mass calibration standards. MALDI plates are analyzed using a Bruker Reflex DI MALDI MS device. Contents from each well of the 96 well plates are analyzed by LC-ESI-MS-MS on Bruker Esquire 3000 plus ESI Ion-Trap MS devices.
Step 7: Protein identification
The mass spectra collected in step 6 above (a total of 2,737,293spectra) were processed as described in the International Patent Application published as WO 04/013635, on the following databanks: human subsection of SwissProt, TrEMBL, TrEMBLNew, GeneSeqP, Clustered ESTs from GenBank human dbEST and predicted peptides from the human genome by Genscan and HMM gene. This resulted in the identification of 24,433 database hits, corresponding to 14,213 non redundant protein sequences. Example 2: Chemical Synthesis of PAPs
In this example, a PAP of the invention is synthesized. Peptide fragment intermediates are first synthesized and then assembled into the desired polypeptide.
A PAP can initially be prepared in, e.g. 5 fragments, selected to have a Cys residue at the N-terminus of the fragment to be coupled. Fragment 1 is initially coupled to fragment 2 to give a first product, then after preparative HPLC purification, the first product is coupled to fragment 3 to give a second product. After preparative HPLC purification, the second product is coupled to fragment 4 to give a third product. Finally, after preparative HPLC purification, the third product is coupled to fragment 5 to give the desired polypeptide, which is purified and refolded. Thioester formation
Fragments 2, 3, 4, and 5 are synthesized on a thioester generating resin, as described above. For this purpose the following resin is prepared: S-acetylthioglycolic acid pentafluorophenylester is coupled to a Leu-PAM resin under conditions essentially as described by Hackeng et al (1999). In the first case, the resulting resin is used as a starting resin for peptide chain elongation on a 0.2 mmpl scale after removal of the acetyl protecting group with a 30 min treatment with 10% mercaptoethanol, 10% piperidine in DMF. The N" of the N-terminal Cys residues of fragments 2 through 5 are protected by coupling a Boc- thioproline (Boc-SPr, i.e. Boc-L-thioproline) to the terminus of the respective chains instead of a Cys having conventional 1ST* or Sβ protection, e.g. Brik et al, J. Org. Chem., 65: 3829- 3835 (2000). Peptide synthesis
Solid-phase synthesis is performed on a custom-modified 433A peptide synthesizer from Applied Biosystems, using in situ neutralization/2-(lH-benzotriazol-l-yl)-l, 1,1,3,3- tetramethyluronium hexafiuoro-phosphate (HBTU) activation protocols for stepwise Boc chemistry chain elongation, as described by Schnolzer et al, Int. J. Peptide Protein Res., 40: 180-193 (1992). Each synthetic cycle consists of Nα-Boc -removal by a 1 to 2 min treatment with neat TFA, a 1-min DMF flow wash, a 10-min coupling time with 2.0 mmol of preactivated Boc-amino acid in the presence of excess DEEA and a second DMF flow wash. Nα-Boc-amino acids (2 mmol) are preactivated for 3rnin with 1.8mmol HBTU (0.5M in DMF) in the presence of excess DIEA (6mmol). After coupling of GIn residues, a dichloromethane flow wash is used before and after deprotection using TFA, to prevent possible high temperature (TFA/DMF)-cataIyzed pyrrolidone carboxylic acid formation. Side-chain protected amino acids are Boc-Arg(p-toluenesulfonyl)-OH, Boc-Asn(xanthyl)- OH5 Boc-Asp(0-cyclohexyl)-OH, Boc-Cys(4-methylbenzyl)-OH, Boc-Glu(O-cyclohexyl)- OH, Boc-His(dmitrophenylbenzyl)-OH, Boc-Lys(2-Cl-Z)-OH, Boc-Ser(benzyl)-OH, Boc- Thr(benzyl)-OH, Boc-Trp(cyclohexylcafbonyl)-OH and Boc-Tyr(2-Br-Z)-OH (Orpagen Pharma, Heidelberg, Germany). Other amino acids are used without side chain protection. C- terminal Fragment 1 is synthesized on Boc-Leu-0-CH2-Pam resin (0.71mmol/g of loaded resin), while for Fragments 2 through 5 machine-assisted synthesis is started on the Boc-Xaa- S-CH2-CO-Leu-Pam resin. This resin is obtained by the coupling of S-acetylthioglycolic acid pentafluorophenylester to a Leu-PAM resin under standard conditions. The resulting resin is used as a starting resin for peptide chain elongation on a 0.2 mmol scale after removal of the acetyl protecting group with a 30min treatment with 10% mercaptoethanol, 10% piperidine in DMF.
After chain assembly is completed, the peptide fragments are deprotected and cleaved from the resin by treatment with anhydrous hydrogen fluoride for lhr at 00C with 5% p-cresol as a scavenger. In all cases except Fragment 1, the imidazole side chain 2,4- dinitrophenyl (DNP) protecting groups remain on His residues because the DNP-removal procedure is incompatible with C-terminal thioester groups. However DNP is gradually removed by thiols during the ligation reaction, yielding unprotected His. After cleavage, peptide fragments are precipitated with ice-cold diethylether, dissolved in aqueous acetonitrile and lyophilized. The peptide fragments are purified by RP-HPLC with a Cl 8 column from Waters by using linear gradients of buffer B (acetonitile/0.1% trifluoroacetic acid) in buffer A (H2O/0.1% trifluoroacetic acid) and UV detection at 214nm. Samples are analyzed by electrospray mass spectrometry (ESMS) using an Esquire instrument (Briicker, Bremen , Germany), or like instrument. Native chemical ligations
As described more fully below, the ligation of unprotected fragments is performed as follows: the dry peptides are dissolved in equimolar amounts in 6M guanidine hydrochloride (GuHCl), 0.2M phosphate, pH 7.5 in order to get a final peptide concentration of 1-8 mM at a pH around 7, and 1% benzylmercaptan, 1% thiophenol is added. Usually, the reaction is carried out overnight and is monitored by HPLC and electrospray mass spectrometry. The ligation product is subsequently treated to remove protecting groups still present. Opening of the N-terminal thiazolidine ring further required the addition of solid methoxamine to a 0.5M final concentration at pH3.5 and a further incubation for 2h at 37°C. A 10-fold excess of Tris(2-carboxyethyl)phosphine is added before preparative HPLC purification. Fractions containing the polypeptide chain are identified by ESMS, pooled and lyophilized.
The ligation of fragments 4 and 5 is performed at pH7.0 in 6 M GuHCl. The concentration of each reactant is 8mM, and 1 % benzylmercaptan and 1 % thiophenol were added to create a reducing environment and to facilitate the ligation reaction. An almost quantitative ligation reaction is observed after overnight stirring at 37°C. At this point in the reaction, CH3-O-NH2-HCl is added to the solution to get a 0.5M final concentration, and the pH adjusted to 3.5 in order to open the N-terminal thiazolidine ring. After 2h incubation at 370C3 ESMS is used to confirm the completion of the reaction. The reaction mixture is subsequently treated with a 10-fold excess of Tris(2-carboxyethylphosphine) over the peptide fragment and after 15min, the ligation product is purified using the preparative HPLC (e.g., C4, 20-60% CH3CN, 0.5% per min), lyophilized, and stored at -200C.
The same procedure is repeated for the remaining ligations with slight modifications. Polypeptide Folding The full length peptide is refolded by air oxidation by dissolving the reduced lyophilized protein (about 0.1 mg/mL) in IM GuHCl, 10OmM Tris, 1OmM methionine, pH 8.6 After gentle stirring overnight, the protein solution is purified by RP-HPLC as described above.
Example 3: Preparation of PAP antibody compositions Substantially pure PAP or a portion thereof is obtained. The concentration of protein in the final preparation is adjusted, for example, by concentration on an Amicon filter device, to the level of a few micrograms per ml. Monoclonal or polyclonal antibodies to the protein are then prepared as described in the sections titled "Monoclonal antibodies" and "Polyclonal antibodies." Briefly, to produce an anti-PAP monoclonal antibody, a mouse is repetitively inoculated with a few micrograms of the PAP or a portion thereof over a period of a few weeks. The mouse is then sacrificed, and the antibody producing cells of the spleen isolated. The spleen cells are fused by means of polyethylene glycol with mouse myeloma cells, and the excess unfused cells destroyed by growth of the system on selective media comprising aminopterin (HAT media). The successfully fused cells are diluted and aliquots of the dilution placed in wells of a microliter plate where growth of the culture is continued. Antibody-producing clones are identified by detection of antibody in the supernatant fluid of the wells by immunoassay procedures, such as ELISA3 as originally described by Engvall, E., Meth. Enzymol. 70: 419 (1980), the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. Selected positive clones can be expanded and their monoclonal antibody product harvested for use. Detailed procedures for monoclonal antibody production are described in Davis, L. et al. Basic Methods in Molecular Biology Elsevier, New York. Section 21 -2, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
For polyclonal antibody production by immunization, polyclonal antiserum containing antibodies to heterogeneous epitopes in the PAP or a portion thereof are prepared by immunizing a mouse with the PAP or a portion thereof, which can be unmodified or modified to enhance immunogeniciry. Any suitable norihuman animal, preferably a non- human mammal, may be selected including rat, rabbit, goat, or horse.
Antibody preparations prepared according to either the monoclonal or the polyclonal protocol are useful in quantitative immunoassays which determine concentrations of PAP in biological samples; or they are also used semi-quantitatively or qualitatively to identify the presence of antigen in a biological sample. The antibodies may also be used in therapeutic compositions for killing cells expressing the protein or reducing the levels of the protein in the body.

Claims

1. A method of diagnosis of a PAP-related disorder in a subject, comprising the steps of:
(a) detecting and /or quantifying the level of a polypeptide in a biological sample from said subject, wherein the polypeptide is selected from: i) a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of: Pregnancy-Associated Polypeptides (PAPs) 1-33; ii) a variant, with at least 75% sequence identity, having one or more amino acid substitutions, deletions or insertions relative to the amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of PAPs 1-33; and iii) a fragment of a polypeptide as defined in i) or ii) above which is a-least ten amino acids long; and
(b) comparing said level to that of a control sample, wherein an alteration in said level relative to that of the control is indicative of a PAP- related disorder.
2. A method of predicting a PAP-related disorder in a subject, comprising the steps of:
(a) detecting and /or quantifying the level of a polypeptide in a biological sample from said subject, wherein the polypeptide is selected from: i) a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of: Pregnancy-Associated Polypeptides (PAPs) 1-33; ii) a variant, with at least 75% sequence identity, having one or more amino acid substitutions, deletions or insertions relative to the amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of PAPs 1-33; and iii) a fragment of a polypeptide as defined in i) or ii) above which is a least ten amino acids long; and
(b) comparing said level to that of a control sample, wherein an alteration in said level relative to that of the control indicates a risk of developing a PAP-related disorder.
3. The method of claims 1 or 2, wherein said biological sample is serum.
4. The method of any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein said method is performed ex vivo.
5. The method of any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein said polypeptide is detected and /or quantified by mass spectrometry.
6. The method of any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein said polypeptide is detected and /or quantified by Enzyme-Linked Immuno Sorbent Assay.
7. An isolated polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of PAPs 1-33, wherein said polypeptide is fused to a heterologous polypeptide sequence.
8. An anti-Pregnancy-Associated Polypeptide (PAP) antibody that selectively binds to a polypeptide comprising the amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of PAPs 1-33.
9. A method of binding an antibody to a Pregnancy-Associated Polypeptide (PAP) comprising the steps of: i) contacting the antibody of claim 8 with a biological sample under conditions that permit antibody binding; and ii) removing contaminants.
10. The method of claim 9, wherein said antibody is attached to a label group.
11. The method of claim 9, wherein said sample is human serum.
12. A method of identifying a Pregnancy-Associated Polypeptide (PAP) modulator comprising the steps of: i) contacting a test compound with a polypeptide selected from the group consisting of PAPs 1-33 under sample conditions permissive for at least one
PAP biological activity; ii) determining the level of said at least one PAP biological activity; iii) comparing said level to that ofa-control sample lacking-said test compound; and iv) selecting a test compound which causes said level to change for further testing as a PAP modulator for the prophylactic and/or therapeutic treatment of PAP- related disorders.
13. An isolated polypeptide having the amino acid sequence of a Pregnancy-Associated
Polypeptide (PAP) selected from the group of PAPs 1-5, 14-15, 18, 22-23, 25, 29.
14. An isolated polynucleotide encoding the polypeptide of claim 13.
PCT/EP2005/007563 2004-07-12 2005-07-12 Secreted polypeptide species differentially expressed during pregnancy WO2006005585A2 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US58758604P 2004-07-12 2004-07-12
US60/587,586 2004-07-12

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2006005585A2 true WO2006005585A2 (en) 2006-01-19
WO2006005585A3 WO2006005585A3 (en) 2006-08-10

Family

ID=35520133

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/EP2005/007563 WO2006005585A2 (en) 2004-07-12 2005-07-12 Secreted polypeptide species differentially expressed during pregnancy

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2006005585A2 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20110045495A1 (en) * 2008-01-17 2011-02-24 Yoshinori Tanaka Composition and method for diagnosis or detection of renal cancer
EP2356998A1 (en) * 2010-02-17 2011-08-17 Université de Liège A pharmaceutical composition for treatment of thrombosis-related diseases comprising a fragment of prolactin (PRL)-growth hormone (GH) - placental lactogen (PL)-family protein

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0506377A2 (en) * 1991-03-29 1992-09-30 Kenji Sobue Calmodulin binding protein
WO2002038168A2 (en) * 2000-11-07 2002-05-16 Nemod Immuntherapie Ag Use of selectin-binding active ingredients for the treatment of inflammatory and tumoral diseases

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0506377A2 (en) * 1991-03-29 1992-09-30 Kenji Sobue Calmodulin binding protein
WO2002038168A2 (en) * 2000-11-07 2002-05-16 Nemod Immuntherapie Ag Use of selectin-binding active ingredients for the treatment of inflammatory and tumoral diseases

Non-Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
HALL SUSAN M ET AL: "Origin, differentiation, and maturation of human pulmonary veins" AMERICAN JOURNAL OF RESPIRATORY CELL AND MOLECULAR BIOLOGY, vol. 26, no. 3, March 2002 (2002-03), pages 333-340, XP002370147 ISSN: 1044-1549 *
LEIK COURTNEY E ET AL: "Isolation and culture of arterial smooth muscle cells from human placenta" HYPERTENSION (BALTIMORE), vol. 43, no. 4, April 2004 (2004-04), pages 837-840, XP002370148 ISSN: 0194-911X *
WORD R ANN ET AL: "Contractile elements and myosin light chain phosphorylation in myometrial tissue from nonpregnant and pregnant women" JOURNAL OF CLINICAL INVESTIGATION, vol. 92, no. 1, 1993, pages 29-37, XP008060646 ISSN: 0021-9738 *

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20110045495A1 (en) * 2008-01-17 2011-02-24 Yoshinori Tanaka Composition and method for diagnosis or detection of renal cancer
EP2356998A1 (en) * 2010-02-17 2011-08-17 Université de Liège A pharmaceutical composition for treatment of thrombosis-related diseases comprising a fragment of prolactin (PRL)-growth hormone (GH) - placental lactogen (PL)-family protein
WO2011101373A1 (en) * 2010-02-17 2011-08-25 Université de Liège A pharmaceutical composition for treatment of thrombosis-related diseases comprising a fragment of prolactin (prl)-growth hormone (gh)-placental lactogen (pl)-family protein

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2006005585A3 (en) 2006-08-10

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20070082363A1 (en) Secreted polypeptide species reduced cardiovascular disorders
WO2006005583A2 (en) Secreted polypeptide species involved in multiple sclerosis
US20080227125A1 (en) Secreted Polypeptide Species Reduced in Cardiovascular Disorders
US20070009955A1 (en) Secreted polypeptide species associated with cardiovascular disorders
JP2005533086A5 (en)
EP1654545A2 (en) Secreted polypeptide species associated with cardiovascular disorders
WO2006069765A2 (en) Secreted polypeptide species involved in multiple sclerosis
WO2006029838A2 (en) Secreted polypeptide species involved in alzheimer’s disease
WO2006005586A2 (en) New polypeptide species specific to cerebrospinal fluid
EP1620735A1 (en) Secreted polypeptide species reduced in cardiovascular disorders
WO2006005585A2 (en) Secreted polypeptide species differentially expressed during pregnancy
WO2004106941A2 (en) Secreted polypeptide species associated with cardiovascular disorders
US20060148690A1 (en) Secreted peptides
US20060147447A1 (en) Secreted peptides
US20070105169A1 (en) Secreted polypeptide species associated with cardiovascular disorders
EP1616194A2 (en) Secreted polypeptide species associated with cardiovascular disorders
WO2004005331A2 (en) Peptides derived from pep133 (g1p3, 6-16)
US20070098635A1 (en) Secreted polypeptide species associatedwith cardiovascular disorders
EP1626986A2 (en) Secreted polypeptide species associated with cardiovascular disorders
EP1641821A2 (en) Human secreted proteins
EP1642138A1 (en) Secreted polypeptide species reduced in cardiovascular disorders
CA2512629A1 (en) Secreted polypeptide species (fragments from chitotriosidase) reduced in cardiovascular disorders

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BW BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE EG ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KM KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NA NG NI NO NZ OM PG PH PL PT RO RU SC SD SE SG SK SL SM SY TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VC VN YU ZA ZM ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): BW GH GM KE LS MW MZ NA SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IS IT LT LU LV MC NL PL PT RO SE SI SK TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
NENP Non-entry into the national phase in:

Ref country code: DE

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Country of ref document: DE

32PN Ep: public notification in the ep bulletin as address of the adressee cannot be established

Free format text: COMMUNICATION PURSUANT TO RULE 69(1) EPC (EPO FORM 1205A) SENT 02.04.2007.

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 05774331

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A2